PM 
 
 1032 
 
 :47+ 
 
 $w 
 
 .^ 
 
 w 
 
 w, 
 
The Bopp Library, 
 
 « » -- »- 
 
 COLLECTED BY FEANZ EOPP, 
 
 Professor of Comparative Philology in the 
 University of Berlin. 
 
 Purchased by Cornell , University, 1868. 
 
Cornell University Library 
 PM 1032.Z47 
 
 Grammar ol the language of the Lenni Len 
 
 3 1924 027 142 284 
 
y <& 
 
 Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of this book is in 
 the Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924027142284 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 OP 
 
 vain rahon? awh 
 
 OF 
 
 THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 STfje ^translator's $n*acc. 
 
 THE astonishing progress which the comparative science 
 of languages has made within the last thirty years is not 
 among the least important of the many wonders which 
 the present age has produced. The first strong impulse 
 was given towards the close of the last century by the pub- 
 lication of the Comparative Vocabulary*, compiled by pro- 
 fessor Pallas, under the direction of the empress Catharine 
 of Russia ; a work indeed better conceived than executed, 
 but which nevertheless has been and still is of great use to 
 the learned, in the prosecution of philological studies. This 
 work, which was left incomplete, being confined to the lan- 
 guages of Europe and Asiaf, was followed in this country 
 
 * Linguarum totius orbis vocabularia comparativa, augustissimae cura 
 collecta. Petrop. 1786 — 1787, 4to. 
 
 f The empress, wishing her work to be completed, committed it to 
 M. Theodore Jankiewitsch de Miriewo, with a view, it is presumed, 
 that he should merely add to the European and Asiatic words which Pal- 
 1 
 
4 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 by Dr B. S. Barton's " New Views of the Origin of the Tribes 
 and Nations of America." The object of the learned au- 
 thor at first was to supply the deficiency of the great phi- 
 lological monument which the empress Catharine had begun 
 as far as related to the languages of America. Happy would 
 it have been if he had not suffered his imagination to draw 
 him away from that simple but highly useful design ! But 
 he conceived that by comparing the American with the 
 Asiatic languages he could prove the origin of our Indians 
 from the nations which inhabit the opposite coast of Asia ; 
 and thus he sacrificed the real advantage of science to the 
 pursuit of a favourite theory. He has nevertheless brought 
 together, in a comparative view, fifty-two select words in 
 about thirty or forty of our aboriginal idioms; by which, he 
 has shewn, that he might, if he pleased, have completed 
 professor Pallas's Vocabulary, as far as it could have been 
 done at that period, when we had not the means that have 
 been obtained since. His was the first attempt to collect 
 and compare to some extent* specimens of our Indian lan- 
 las had given the corresponding terms in the African and American lan- 
 guages. But M. Jankiewitsch took upon himself to alter the whole plan 
 of Pallas's work, and, instead of pursuing the original system, which was 
 to give the same Russian word in the different languages in due succes- 
 sion, he made an alphabetical catalogue of exotic wordsi which he ex- 
 plained into Russian, and in which he mixed all nations and languages 
 together, with a view to shew how the same sounds received different 
 meanings in different idioms. The empress was displeased, and the 
 edition was suppressed. A few copies, however, have gone abroad, one of 
 which is in the library of the American Philosophical Society. 
 
 M. Jankiewitch did wrong in not following the plan of his predecessor, 
 whose work he thus left incomplete, when its completion was the very 
 object which was entrusted to his care. He should first have executed his 
 task : he might afterwards have published a vocabulary on his own sys- 
 tem, which would have been a useful counterpart to the other. Indeed 
 these two parts seem essential to a good comparative vocabulary, pre- 
 cisely as in a dictionary of two languages there must be a part beginning 
 with each and explaining the words of each into the other. 
 
 * Relandus, in the third volume of his dissertations, published voca- 
 bularies of nine American languages, extracted from different authors. 
 They are the Brazilian, Chilese, Peruvian, Poconchi, Caribbee, Mexican, 
 Massachusetts which he calls Virginian, Algonkin, and Huron. 
 
OF THE LENNI LBNAPE INDIANS. 5 
 
 guages, and as such it is useful to philologists and entitled 
 to respect. 
 
 • The next performance that appeared on a comprehensive 
 scale on the subject of languages was the Mithridatbs, 
 !he glory of our science. I have spoken of it at large in 
 my Report to the Historical Committee, made in the year 
 1819, on thf progress then made in the investigation com- 
 mitted to me respecting the character and grammatical forms 
 of the languages of the American Indians*. Excellent as 
 the Mithridates was at the time when it was published, such 
 is the progress which the philological science has made 
 since that period, that it would require to be almost entirely 
 written anew. But Vater is no more, and who will ven- 
 ture to assume his vacant, placet ? 
 
 About the same true appeared at Madrid, in six octavo 
 volumes, "A catalogue of all the known languages, classed 
 according to the diversity of their idioms and dialects," by 
 the Abb6 Don Lorenzo HervasJ. It had been before pub- 
 lished in Italian at Cesena, in the Roman states, as part of 
 a great encyclopedical performance, by the same author, 
 entitled "An idea of the universe," in SI volumes quarto. 
 The five last volumes (except the' 17th which treats of the 
 arithmetic of nations) relate exclusively to languages. The 
 17th volume contains the catalogue above mentioned. The 
 18th is a treatise on the origin, formation, mechanism, and 
 harmony of languages. The 49th is entitled "A polyglot 
 vocabulary of more than .one hundred and fifty languages." 
 And lastly, the 21st volume is a practical essay on lan- 
 guages, with prolegomena, and the lord's prayer in more 
 than three hundred languages and dialects^. It is probable 
 that the Spanish translation, though it would seem that it 
 only bears the title of the 17th volume in the Italian, con- 
 
 * Historical Transactions, Vol. I. p. xix. 
 
 f Professor Vater died at Halle on the 16th of March 1826. 
 j Discours sur l'Etude Philosophique des Langues, par M. de Volney, 
 p. 31. ' 
 
 § Eichhorn, Geschichte der neuen Sprachkunde, Vol. I. p. 31. 
 
b GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 tains all the philological treatises of the author, or at least a 
 great part of them. As, however, neither the original nor 
 the translation have, to my knowledge, made their way into 
 this country, I can not say any thing more upon the subject, 
 nor can I form a judgment of the merits of the work itself: 
 all I can say is, that it does not appear to have been written 
 on the same plan with the Mithridates*, whose authors, how- 
 ever, have occasionally availed themselves of its contents, 
 but always with due acknowledgment. 
 
 Since that period nothing has appeared, as far as I know, 
 in Europe or elsewhere, embracing the whole science of 
 languages; and indeed the works which I have cited cannot 
 be said to he entitled to be so considered; for the Compa- 
 rative Vocabulary is purely etymological, and the Mithri- 
 dates, although it takes in a much wider scope and gives 
 a view of the structure and grammatical forms of the 
 different languages, is in an important point entirely defi- 
 cient, being confined exclusively to oral language, while the 
 various modes by which nations express their thoughts in 
 writing are a no less interesting part of the philological 
 science. I have heard of an Ethnographical Atlas by M. 
 Ealbi, which has lately appeared at Paris, containing a de- 
 scription of the world geographically divided by languages 
 
 * The title of this work in Italian is Idea deW Universo, Cesena, 1778 
 — 1787,21 vols, quarto. 
 
 The 17th volume is entitled Catalogo delle lingue conosciute, enotizia 
 delle loro affinita e diversild, 1784. Tfie 18th, Origine, formazione, 
 mecanismo, ed armonia degli idiomi, 1785. The 19th, Aritmetica delle 
 nazioni e divisione del tempo fra gl'orientali, 1786. The 20th, Vocabu- 
 lario poliglotto con prolegomeni sopra piii di 150 lingue. And the 21st, 
 Saggio prattico delle lingue, con prolegomeni, e una raccolta di orazioni 
 domenicali in piu de trecento lingue e dialetti, 1787. The exotic words 
 are all written in Roman characters. 
 
 As some of the public libraries of this country may wish to become 
 possessed of this work or some of its parts, these titles are given in order 
 to facilitate the means of obtaining them. I have not the Spanish title 
 of the Madrid translation. The 1st volume was published in 1800, and 
 the 6th and last in 1806. Volney, Discours sur V etude philosophique des 
 langues, Paris, 1821. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 7 
 
 and dialects. The late M. Malte Brun, in a review to which 
 he affixed his name*, spoke favourably of this performance. 
 If well executed, it will afford considerable aid to the 
 learned. 
 
 It is very doubtful whether philology has yet reached that 
 degree of advancement that will allow of its various parts 
 bt ing methodized and reduced to a general system. There 
 are yet, perhaps, too many unsettled opinions to be fixed, 
 too many prejudices to be dispelled, before we can take a 
 clear, distinct, and comprehensive view of the various modes 
 by which mankind communicate their perceptions and ideas 
 to each other, through the medium of the senses, and trace 
 with a steady eye their origin and progress. New and 
 important facts are daily exhibited to us by the unwearied 
 labours of learned men, which overthrow long established 
 theories and turn in a great measure the current of our ideas. 
 By means of the light afforded in the works of Morrison, 
 Marshman, Abel Remusat, and l)e Guignes, we have acquired 
 a clear conception of the nature and character of the writ- 
 ing of the Chinese, about which so many fables have been 
 disseminated by missionaries and others, who echoed the 
 boastings of the literati of that countryf. We no longer 
 believe it to be an original written language, unconnected 
 
 * Journal des Debats, 1st December 1826. 
 
 f Les caracteres chinois sont signes immediats des idees qu'ils ex- 
 priment. On dirait que cette ecriture aurait ete inventee par des jnuets 
 qui ignorent l'usage des paroles. Nous pouvons comparer les caracteres 
 qui la composent avec nos chiffres numeraux, avec les signes algebriques 
 qui expriment les rapports dans nos livres de mathematiques, &c. Que 
 l'on presente une demonstration de geometrie exprimee en caracteres 
 algebriques aux yeux de dix matheroaticiens de pays differents ; ils en- 
 tendront la meme chose : neanmoins ces dix hommes sont supposes parler 
 des langues differentes, et ils ne comprendront rien aux termes par les- 
 quels ils exprimeront ces idees en parlant. C'est la meme chose a la 
 Chine ; l'ecriture est non seulement commune a tous les peuples de ce 
 grand pays, qui parlent des dialectes tres differents, mais encore aux 
 japonais, aux tonquinois, et aux cochinchinois, dont les langues sont to- 
 talement distinguees du chinois.— Reflexions sur les principes gtnbraux 
 de fart d'tcrire, &c. par M. Freret, in the Memoirs of the Academy of 
 Inscriptions and Belles Lettres, Vol. VI. p. 609. 
 
8 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 with and independent of speech, conveying ideas imme- 
 diately to the mind, and which may be read in all the diffe- 
 rent idioms of the earth. Philology has taught us the 
 impossibility of the existence of such a cosmopolite writing. 
 The important discoveries of M. Champollion the younger* 
 have also drawn aside the mystic veil which concealed the 
 real character of the writing of the ancient Egyptians; he has 
 shewn it beyond all controversy to be chiefly alphabetical, 
 with some auxiliary abbreviations of the hieroglyphic kind, 
 such as we use in our almanacs to represent the sun, the 
 moon, and other planets, and the signs of the zodiac, and in 
 our books of mathematics to express certain words which 
 often recur in the science. From all these lights it seems 
 to result, that a purely ideographical system of writing; is a 
 creature of the imagination, and cannot exist any where but 
 for very limited purposes. The paintings of the Mexicans, as 
 they are called, remain to be investigated, in order to fix our 
 ideas on this interesting subject. This task ought properly 
 to belong to the learned societies and individuals of this con- 
 tinent, who, it is to be hoped, will emulate those of the old 
 world in prosecuting researches so interesting to the philolo- 
 gical sciencef. In this pursuit the method which M. Cham- 
 pollion has followed of making the oral language subservient 
 to the study of the written characters cannot be too strongly 
 recommended ; for it is by audible sounds that the ideas of 
 
 * Precis du systeme hieroglyphique des anciens egyptiens, par M. 
 Champollion le jeune, Paris, 1824. I Vol. 8vo, 410 pp. with a volume of 
 plates. 
 
 f It is now very difficult to procure original specimens of the Mexican 
 paintings ; the government of that country having lately established a 
 museum in their capital where all that can be collected are to be pre- 
 served, and taken measures to prevent any being exported to foreign 
 countries. Our learned associate, Mr Poinsett, minister to that republic 
 not only of our government but of science, gives us reason to hope that 
 correct fac similes can be obtained, by means of which this study may 
 be pursued to a certain extent ; but certainly not with the same ad- 
 vantage as in the city of Mexico, where the ancient language is still in 
 Use, and where a large collection of written monuments will be at all tim^s 
 accessible. 
 
OF THE IiENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 9 
 
 mankind are embodied, and acquire an outward form to the 
 ear and an inward form to the mini ; while writing is but a 
 secondary mode of communication, much more limited in 
 its objects and use, and which is in necessary connection 
 with the oral signs of ideas. It seems idle at this day to 
 talk of a written language, entirely independent of speech, 
 and unconnected with it. There is little reason to doubt but 
 that such a connection. will be discovered in the Mexican 
 writing, as it has been in the Egyptian and Chinese. 
 
 Auxiliary to these vast labours, Europe has produced, 
 since the beginning of the present century, a great number 
 of grammars and dictionaries of languages, which till then 
 were little known, and some of them not at all*. Several 
 of those which had been composed by the catholic mission- 
 aries, and either never published or printed solely for the 
 use of the missions, have been drawn forth from their re- 
 cesses, and published with learned notes and additions. 
 Among them we remark the Chinese dictionary of Father 
 Basil de (Jlemona never before printed, which was published 
 at Paris by M. de Guignes, in the year 18 13, by. order of 
 the emperor Napoleon, in a large folio volume of 1114 
 pages, with a supplement by M. Klaproth, and the Japanese 
 grammar of Father Rodriguez translated into French and 
 printed at Paris by M. Landresse with valuable additions by 
 M. Abel llemusat and a supplement by baron W. Humboldtf. 
 The Asiatic Society of Calcutta are prosecuting their learned 
 
 * Several excellent grammars have also been published of languages 
 already known, as the Arabic, Hebrew, &c. among which are remarked 
 those of Gesenius, Silvestre de Sacy, and several other eminent philolo- 
 gists. The Arabic grammar of the latter is particularly esteemed. As 
 an orientalist and a writer on general grammar, M. de Sacy enjoys a 
 high and justly acquired reputation. 
 
 f Elements de la Grammaire Japonaise, par le P. Rodriguez. Traduit 
 du Portugais sur le MS. de la Bibliotheque du Roi, et collationne avec la 
 Grammaire publiee par le mime a Nangasaki en 1604. Par M. C. Lan- 
 dresse. Precede d'un explication des Syllabaires Japonais, avec deux 
 Planches. Par M. Abel llemusat. Paris, 1825. 
 
 Supplement a la Grammaire Japonaise du P. Rodriguez, &c. Par M. 
 le Baron G. de Humboldt. Paris, 1826. 
 
10 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 labours, which have thrown much light on the languages of 
 hither and farther India. A society established at Paris 
 since 1822 emulates their exertions, and its numerous pub- 
 lications are highly valuable : among these we cannot help 
 noticing the learned and interesting essay of Mess. Burnouf 
 and Lassen, on the Pali or Bali, the sacred language of the 
 peninsula beyond the Ganges*. The Journal Asiatique, 
 published by that Society, of which nine volumes have already 
 appeared, and the tenth will be completed in June next, is 
 full of instructive matter concerning the languages of Asia. 
 The same may be said of the Melanges Asiatiques of M. 
 Remusatf, and the Me moires relatifs a 1'Asie of M. Kla- 
 proth:!:. The Asia Polyglotta of the latter is a work of great 
 merit§. 
 
 There is also in London, as we are informed, an Asiatic 
 Society lately established, but their memoirs have not yet 
 reached us. 
 
 It is said that the sacred scriptures, or parts of them, have 
 been translated into one hundred and fifty different lan- 
 guages or dialects by the exertions of the British, Russian, 
 aud American Bible Societies. The christian missionaries 
 of different sects and countries, and the European and 
 American navigators and travellers, have immensely in- 
 creased our stock of vocabularies and other specimens of 
 languages hitherto unknown. Among the latter we are 
 bound to notice lieutenant John White of the United States 
 navy, who brought to this country, from Cochin China, 
 a comparative vocabulary of the Chinese and Cochin Chi- 
 
 * Essai sur le Pali, ou languesacree de la presqu'isle au dela du Gange, 
 avec 6 planches. Par E. Burnouf & Chr. Lassen. Paris, 1826. 
 
 •}■ Melanges Asiatiques, ou choix de morceaux de critique relatifs aux 
 religions, aux sciences, &c. des nations orientales. Par M. Abel Remusat, 
 2 vols, 8vo. Paris, 1815. 
 
 J Memoires relatifs a l'Asie, contenant des recherches historiques, 
 geographiques, et philblogiques sur les peuples de l'orient. Par M. J. 
 Klaproth. 2 vols, 8vo. Paris, 1824 — 1826. 
 
 <§ Asia Polyglotta von Julius Klaproth. 1 vol. quarto, with an atlas of 
 languages, folio. Paris, 1823. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 11 
 
 nese languages, which he has deposited in the Marine East 
 India Company's Museum at Salem in Massachusetts, an 
 extract from which is subjoined to the History of his Voy- 
 age to the China Sea*. It is hoped that the Boston Academy 
 ©f Arts and Sciences will cause the whole to be published in 
 their valuable Transactions. It will be interesting not only 
 to the learned of this country, but also to those of Europe; 
 as it not only shews the degree of affinity in the idioms of 
 the two nations, Chinese and Cochin Chinese, but also in 
 what manner the characters of the former are employed to 
 represent the words of the latter, when they differ in sound 
 or in sense: It proves to demonstration that the Chinese 
 characters cannot be read alike in every language ; not even 
 in those which have the greatest resemblance to that of 
 China and may be considered in a measure as Chinese 
 dialects. 
 
 Thus learned and industrious men are collecting in all 
 parts of the world the valuable materials out of which is to be 
 erected the splendid edifice of Universal Philology. Various 
 attempts have been made to reduce this science into a body 
 of doctrine, but none has completely succeeded, because 
 the facts on which ir rests have not yet been sufficiently 
 ascertained. Innumerable works have been written on the 
 origin of language, while the greatest number of the idioms 
 of the earth were entirely unknown. Theories have been 
 accumulated instead of facts, every one of which had its day 
 until superseded by some newer and more fashionable sys- 
 tem. Now and then some gifted men pierced through the 
 cloud of darkness by the mere force of their intuitive genius, 
 
 * History of a Voyage to the China Seas. By John White, Lieutenant 
 in the U. S. Navy. Boston. Wells & Lilly. 1823. 
 
 This book has been since reprinted in London. But the booksellers, 
 probably for want of Chinese characters, have left out of their edition all 
 that relates to the Cochin Chinese language. Thus in our American 
 edition of Barrow's Travels in China, the specimens of Tartar characters 
 have been omitted, because the booksellers did not think it expedient to 
 have them cast or engraved. In this manner trade prospers at the ex- 
 pense of science. 
 3 
 
13 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 and their writings have not a little contributed to the ad- 
 vancement of knowledge. Among those we must place 
 in the first rank the illustrious president De Brosses, whose 
 excellent treatise on the mechanical formation of language* 
 contains more correct reasoning than any other work on 
 the same subject. Nor carr 1 pass over in silence the 
 lights that are diffused through the Elements of Ideo- 
 logy of our venerated associate Destutt Tracyf, so fruit- 
 ful of important principles that still remain to be applied 
 to various unsettled points of our science. But, with these 
 helps and many others that could be mentioned, we are 
 not yet prepared for a general elementary treatise on phi- 
 lology taken in its whole extent : more facts are yet to be 
 collected, and inveterate theories submitted to the test of 
 truth, before this great work can be undertaken with hopes 
 of success. 
 
 Philology in fact, in the sense in which t wish to be 
 understood, is of immense extent. It not only embraces 
 oral language in all its varieties, but also writing and all 
 the signs by means of which ideas are communicated 
 through the organs of sight. The language of signs which 
 the deaf and dumb make use of is alone a science. But 
 setting these aside, and confining ourselves to speech pro- 
 perly so called, we find in that alone a boundless field of 
 inquiry. We are arrested in the outset by the unnumbered 
 languages and dialects which are spread over the surface of 
 the earth, of which a very few only can be acquired by any 
 individual. But philology comprehends them all, it ob- 
 liges us to class and compare them with each other, for 
 which we have no other aid than the knowledge more or 
 less perfect of a few, and a superficial view of the rest. The 
 philologist must learn to catch the prominent traits by 
 which the different modes of speech are distinguished, 
 
 * Traite de la formation mecanique des langues et des principes 
 physiques de l'etymologie, 2 \50ls, 12mo. Paris, An IX. 
 
 f Elements d'ideologie, par A. L. C. Destutt Tracy, Senateur, 3 vols, 
 8vo. Paris, 1804—1805. 
 
OF THE liENNI IiENAPE INDIANS. 13 
 
 and for that must trust to the labours of others in the 
 shape of grammars, dictionaries, vocabularies, and other 
 works of detail. This is enough to occupy a whole life. 
 But it is not all. The single branch of philology which 
 relates to oral languages has its subdivisions, each of which 
 may be considered as a separate science: There is phono- 
 logy, which teaches us to distinguish the various sounds 
 produced by the human voice, with their tones, accents, and 
 inflections, to analyze, class, and compare them with each 
 other, and represent them, as much as possible, by visible 
 signs* ; etymology, or the knowledge of those constituent 
 parts of language that we call words, by means of which we 
 are enabled to trace the affinities of the different idioms of 
 the earth, and the filiation of the numerous races and fami- 
 lies of men who inhabit it ; and lastly, ideology, or the com- 
 parative study ol the grammatical forms and idiomatic con- 
 struction of languages, by which we are taught to analyze 
 and distinguish the different shapes in which ideas combine 
 themselves in order to fix perceptions in our minds, and 
 transmit them to those of others; while we observe with 
 wonder the effects of that tendency to order and method 
 and that natural logic which God has implanted in the mind 
 of every man. A considerable time must elapse before we 
 shall have collected a sufficiency of facts to enable us to 
 generalize to a certain extent our ideas on these various 
 subjects, the attempting of which too soon has hitherto been 
 the great error of -philologists. It is astonishing to see what 
 efforts have been made by men of superior as well as those 
 of inferior talents, to discover the origin of human speech, 
 to trace an original or primitive language in those which 
 now exist, to invent a universal or philosophical idiom, a uni- 
 versal grammar, a universal alphabet, and so many other 
 universals, while the particulars are yet to be learned. 
 
 * I have treated of this subject separately, merely in its application to 
 the English language, in the first volume or' the present series of these 
 Transactions, p. 228. A reference to that essay will shew the immense 
 extent of this branch of the philological science. 
 
14 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 When we find such men as Court de Gebelin, Bishop Wilkins, 
 Maupertuis, Rousseau, Adam Smith, and so many others, seri- 
 ously employed in the pursuit of those unattainable objects, 
 we can but lament the disposition of the human mind to 
 transgress the bounds which Eternal Wisdom lias prescribed 
 to human knowledge and human power. 
 
 If philology had no other object than to promote and fa- 
 cilitate the intercourse between nations, and make men 
 better acquainted with the globe they inhabit, it would be 
 well worth all the trouble and labour that may be bestowed 
 upon it. What further results it may produce, useful or 
 interesting to mankind, it is impossible to foretel. Thus 
 much is certain, that no science more powerfully excites 
 that desire of knowledge which is inherent in our nature, 
 and which, no doubt, was given to us by the Almighty for 
 wise purposes. 
 
 Moved hy these considerations, the American Philosophi- 
 cal Society have thought it incumbent upon them to add to 
 the mass of facts which are accumulating on all sides, hy the 
 publication of this grammar. While the languages of Asia 
 occupy the attention of the philologists of Europe, light is 
 expected from this quarter to be shed on those of our own 
 continent. This Society was the first to discover and make 
 known to the world the remarkable character which per- 
 vades, as far as they are yet known, the aboriginal languages 
 of America, from Greenland to Cape Horn. In the period of 
 seven years which has elapsed since the publication of the 
 Report presented to their Historical Committee in 1819*, all 
 the observations which have been made on Indian languages, 
 at that time unknown, have confirmed their theory, if theory 
 it can be called, which is no more than the general result of 
 a multitude of facts collected with care. This result has 
 shewn that the astonishing variety of forms of human speech 
 which exists in the eastern hemisphere is not to be found in 
 
 ■ Y 
 * Transactions of the Historical and Literary Committee of the Ame- 
 rican Philosophical Society, vol. 1. Philadelphia, 1819. 
 
OF THE IiENNI LENAPE INDIANS. J 5 
 
 the western. Here we find no monosyllabic language like 
 the Chinese*, and its cognate idioms; no analytical lan- 
 guages like those of the north of Europe, with their nume- 
 rous expletive and auxiliary monosyllables ; no such contrast 
 is exhibited as that which is so striking to the most su- 
 perficial observer, between the complication of the forms 
 of the Basque language and the comparative simplicity of 
 those of its neighbours the French and Spanish ; but a uni- 
 form system, with such differences only as constitute vari- 
 eties in natural objects, seems to pervade them all, and this 
 genus of human languages has been called polysynthetic, from 
 the numerous combinations of ideas which it presents in the 
 form of words. It has also been shewn that the American 
 languages are rich in words and regular in their forms, and 
 that they do not yield in those respects to any other idiom. 
 These facts have attracted the attention of the learned in 
 Europe, as well as in this country; but they have not been 
 able entirely to remove the prejudices that have been so 
 long entertained against the languages of savage nations. 
 The pride of civilization is reluctant to admit facts like these 
 in their utmost extent, because they shew how little philoso- 
 phy and science have to do with the formation of language. 
 A vague idea still prevails that the idioms of barbarous tribes 
 must be greatly inferior to those of civilized nations, and rea- 
 sons are industriously sought for to prove that inferiority, not 
 only in point of cultivation, which would readily be admitted, 
 but also to shew that their organization is comparatively 
 imperfect. Thus a learned member of the Berlin Acade- 
 
 * By a monosyllabic language, I do not mean one every word of which 
 consists of a single syllable, but one of which every syllable is a complete 
 word. The learned M. Remusat has satisfactorily proved in his Melanges 
 Asiatiques, vol. 2, p. 47, and in the third volume of the Mines de V Orient, 
 that the Chinese language is not monosyllabic in the first of these senses ; 
 but at the same time, I think it cannot be denied that it is so in the second, 
 its polysyllabic words being formed by the junction of two or more vo- 
 cables, each consisting only of one syllable, in the same manner as our 
 compound English words welcome, welfare, &c. There may be a few 
 exceptions ; but they prove nothing against the general rule. 
 4 
 
16 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 my of Sciences, in an ingenious and profound disserta- 
 tion on the forms of languages*, while he admits that those 
 of the American Indians are rich, methodical, and arti- 
 ficial in their structure, yet will not allow them to pos- 
 sess what he calls genuine grammatical forms (sechte for- 
 men), because, says he, their words are not inflected like 
 those of the Greek, Latin, and Sanscrit, but are formed by 
 a different process, which he calls agglutination, and on that 
 supposition, he assigns to them an inferior rank in the scale 
 of languages; considered in the point of view of their capa- 
 city to aid the development of ideas. That such prejudices 
 should exist among men who have deservedly acquired an 
 eminent reputation for science is much to be regretted ; and 
 it is particularly with a view to remove them from the minds 
 of such men, that this grammar is published. The learned 
 baron will, I hope, recognize in the conjugations of the Del- 
 aware verbs those inflected forms which he justly admires, 
 and he will find that the process which he is pleased to call 
 agglutination, is not the only one which our Indians em- 
 ploy in the combination of their ideas and the formation 
 of their words. 
 
 But it is not in Europe alone that we find persons dispo- 
 sed to disparage every thing that belongs to the American 
 Indians. The same spirit prevails, I am sorry to say in a 
 much higher degree, among many in this country, particu- 
 larly those who inhabit our frontier settlements, where causes 
 of difference too often arise between the two races. This 
 feeling, when once entertained, knows no bounds, and men, 
 in other respects gifted with judgment and talents, feel its 
 influence unperceived. I have been led into this observa- 
 tion by a well written and otherwise interesting article on 
 the Indians and their languages, which appeared in the North 
 American Review for January, 1826, the anonymous author 
 
 * Ueber das Entstehen der grammatischen Formen, und ihren Einfluss 
 auf die Ideen Entwicklung. Von Baron Wilhelm von Humboldt. Pub- 
 lished in the Transactions of the Berlin Academy of Sciences for the year 
 1822. Historical and Philological Class, p. 401. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 17 
 
 of which labours hard to depreciate the unfortunate Indians, 
 and make them appear the most stupid as well as the most 
 barbarous race of men, and their languages of course as cor- 
 responding with that degraded character. It is a matter of 
 regret that this writer should have been carried so far away 
 by his prejudices, as to charge the venerable Heckewelder, 
 who resided nearly forty years as a missionary among the 
 Delaware Indians, not only with ignorance of their language, 
 but with fabricating Delaware words, in order to suit a par- 
 ticular purpose*. This is carrying too far the maxim nul? 
 litis in verba, and the reviewer who ventures so much ought 
 first to have convinced his readers that he was himself per- 
 fectly acquainted with the Delaware language, while, on the 
 contrary, after mentioning a few of Mr Heckewelder's sub- 
 stantives, the sounds of which it seems are not pleasing to 
 his ears, he exclaims in disgust, "Pronounce these who can ; 
 we eschew the task/' This strong expression of an un- 
 pleasant feeling is not natural to one who is conversant 
 with a particular idiom : such a one, besides, must be pre- 
 sumed to be in some degree familiar with its sounds, and 
 to be able, at least, to articulate them. 
 
 The reviewer that I speak of pays no greater respect to 
 Mr Zeisherger, the author of this grammar. If he does not 
 expressly charge him with forgery, he at least tries to make 
 it appear that he did not know the language on which he 
 wrote. In this grammar, in the conjugation of the causative 
 form of the verb wulamallsin, to be happy, will be found the 
 participle present wmlamalessohalmved, he who makes hap- 
 py, which in the transitive form is changed into widamale^r 
 sohalid, he who makes me happy, and this last word, taking 
 the vocative termination an, becomes wulamaiessohalkin, 
 O thou who makest me happy ! The reviewer is pleased 
 (p. 75.) to turn this beautiful grammatical form into ridicule, 
 and expressly denies there being such a one in the language. 
 
 * This word (elumiangellatschik) has been evidently formed to meet 
 the case, and formed on erroneous principles. N. A. ILeview, p. 76. 
 
18 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 Among other reasons equally unsatisfactory, he objects that 
 the pronoun who or its elements are not to be found in the 
 composition of the word ; as if this pronoun could not be un- 
 derstood, as it is in the participial forms of all languages, when 
 used as substantives. Thus the Latin participle amans may be 
 translated he who loves, ille qui amat, and yet, not a trace 
 of the pronoun qui is found in it. In the English language the 
 participle present is not generally employed in a substantive 
 sense, therefore the word loving can not be translated by 
 he who loves, but the meaning of the noun substantive 
 lover may be thus rendered, and the participle past beloved 
 is often used in that sense, as the beloved, he who is be- 
 loved, the pronoun who being understood. But the reviewer 
 goes farther, and pretends that there is no word in any In- 
 dian language answering to our pronoun who*. Be it so ; 
 but the idea which it conveys certainly exists in the minds of 
 the Indians, and therefore there is the greater necessity for 
 words in which that idea may be comprehended when it 
 cannot be separately expressed. These specimens are suffi- 
 cient to give an idea of the reviewer's course of reasoning, 
 nor do the limits of this preface allow me to pursue it far- 
 ther. 
 
 It is difficult to know to what Indian language this gentle- 
 man's attention has been particularly directed. If we are to 
 judge from his numerous specimens of Indian phrases, he 
 should be equally familiar with the idioms of the Delawares, 
 Chippeways, Sioux, Kickapoos, Sacs and Foxes, Potowato- 
 mies, Wyandots, and Shawanese, in all which he furnishes us 
 with sentences, without any apparent object than to show that 
 those languages are poor and illy constructed. Our author, 
 Mr Zeisberger, did not pretend to so much knowledge; the 
 Delaware and the Ononda^o were all he professed to know, 
 and he proved the justice of his claim, by a dictionary of the 
 
 * On the contrary, the pronoun who has an equivalent in every Indian 
 language that I know of: Delaware, auwen (see this grammar) ; Onon- 
 dago, schu, schune, schung, schunahote (Zeisberger's Dictionary) ; Meno- 
 monie, owa; Dahcota or Sioux, tuda, &c. &c. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 19 
 
 one, and grammars of both. Mr Heckewelder pretended 
 only to know the Delaware, and his correspondence with 
 our Historical Committee, in the first volume of their Tran- 
 sactions, appears sufficient to support his pretensions. Both 
 these gentlemen spent the greatest part of their lives among 
 the Indians on whose languages they wrote ; while the ano- 
 nymous reviewer does not tell us that he ever resided 
 with any of them. If he derived his information from In- 
 dian traders and interpreters, he is not probably aware that 
 they are not the proper sources from which the knowledge 
 of the grammar of those languages is to be obtained ; they 
 do not pretend to be men of science, and it is a well known 
 fact that even Indians, who are much in the habit of convers- 
 ing with white men, will adapt their forms as much as pos- 
 sible to the construction of our own language, expecting 
 thereby to be better understood. It is thus that we often 
 speak broken English, when addressing foreigners, and that 
 nurses will lisp when speaking to children; but it is not so 
 that Indian orators express themselves when addressing their 
 tribes on important subjects.' 
 
 I should not have taken notice of this anonymous publi- 
 cation, but that the high character and extensive circulation 
 of the North American Review, in which it would seem 
 that it was inadvertently inserted, made it incumbent 
 upon me to say something to counteract the effect of asser- 
 tions so boldly made, and therefore calculated to make an 
 impression on those who have not leisure to investigate the 
 subject. It is but lately that the forms of the languages of 
 the American Indians have begun to attract attention ; I am 
 satisfied that the more they are known, the greater astonish- 
 ment they will excite in unprejudiced minds. In the mean 
 time we must expect that ancient prepossessions will have 
 their way, and that a priori reasoners will not see their favou- 
 rite theories disturbed without a struggle; but facts are 
 stubborn, and their evidence must at last prevail. 
 
 The most curious thing, undoubtedly, that exists in the 
 languages of the Indians, is the manner in which they com- 
 
20 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 pound their words. It was first observed by Egede in his 
 account of Greenland, and Mr Heckewelder explains it at 
 large in the eighteenth letter of his correspondence*. By 
 this means, says governor Colden, speaking of the Iro-' 
 quois, these nations can increase the number of their words 
 to any extent. None of the languages of the old world that 
 we know of appear to possess this prerogative : a multitude 
 of ideas are combined together, by a process which may be 
 called agglutination, if the term be found agreeable, but which, 
 whatever name it may receive, is not the less a subject of 
 real wonder to the inquiring philologist. I have not space 
 to give here many examples of this manner which the In- 
 dians have of combining several ideas together into one 
 locution. I must therefore refer the reader to those ad- 
 duced by Egede and by Mr Heckewelder, in the above cited 
 passage of his correspondence. I shall, however, select a 
 word from the Delaware language, which will convey a clear 
 idea of the mode of formation of all others of ihe same kind. 
 I have chosen this word for the sake of its euphony, to which 
 even the most delicate Italian ear will not be disposed to 
 object. When a Delaware woman is playing with a little 
 dog or cat, or some other young animal, she will often say 
 to it kuligatschis ! wh'ch I would translate into English, give 
 me your pretty little pate, or what a pretty little paw you 
 have ! This word is compounded in the following manner : 
 
 K is the inseparable pronoun of the second person, and 
 may be rendered by thou or thy, according to the context. 
 
 UH (pronounced oolee) is part of the word wulit, which 
 signifies handsome or pretty. It has also other meanings 
 not necessary to be here specified. 
 
 Gat is part of the word wichgat, which signifies a leg of 
 paw. 
 
 Schis is a diminutive termination, and conveys the idea of 
 littleness. 
 
 * Hist. Trans, p, 405. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 31 
 
 Thus in one word the Indian woman says to the animal, 
 Thy pretty little paw ! and according to the tone in which 
 she speaks, and the gestures which she makes, either calls 
 upon it to present its foot, or simply expresses her fondling 
 admiration. In the same manner Pilape, a youth, is formed 
 from Pilsit, chaste, innocent, and Lenape, a man*. It is dif- 
 ficult to find a more elegant combination of ideas in a single 
 word of any existing idiom. 
 
 I do not know of any language out of this part of the 
 world in which words are compounded in this manner. The 
 process consists in putting together portions of different 
 woids, so as to awaken at the same lime in the mind of the 
 hearer the various ideas which ihey separately express. 
 There are probably principles or rules pointing out the 
 particular parts that are to be selected in order to form 
 the compound locution. Sometimes a whole syllable, 
 and perhaps more; so netimes a single sound, or, as we 
 would call it, a single letter: to discover those rules 
 would require a great proficiency in the language, and at 
 the same time" a very sound discriminating mind ; qualities 
 Which are seldom found united ; perhaps also the ear, an 
 Indian ear, is the guide which is generally followed: but the 
 ear has also its rules, to which the mind imperceptibly con- 
 forms: however it may be, this is an interesting fact in the 
 natural history of human language, justly entitled to the atten- 
 tion of philologists. 
 
 This is not the only manner in which the American In- 
 dians combine their ideas into words. They also have 
 many of the forms of the languages which we so much ad- 
 mire, the Latin, Greek, Sanscrit, Slavonic, £jc. mixed with 
 others peculiarly their own. Their conjugations are as re- 
 gular as those of any language that we know ; and for 
 the proof of this I need only to refer to the numerous 
 paradigms of Delaware verbs that are contained in this 
 grammar, in which will be found the justly admired in- 
 
 * MS. letter of Mr Heckewelder, 22d of October 1818. 
 
22 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 flections of the languages of ancient Europe. Although 
 they do not appear to have the numerous tenses which 
 the Greek boasts of, they are not, however, deficient in 
 the expression of the relations of the present, past, and 
 future to each other. There is no shade of idea in respect 
 to the time, place, and manner of action which an Indian 
 verb cannot express, and the modes of expression which 
 they make use of for those purposes are so numerous, that 
 if they were to be considered as parts of the conjugation of 
 each \erb, one single paradigm might fill a volume. Thus 
 n'mitzi signifies I eat, in a general sense, and n'mamitzi. I am 
 eating at this moment. Each of these verbs is separately 
 conjugated in all its forms. 
 
 Indeed, the multitude of ideas which in the Indian lan- 
 guages are combined with the verb has justly attracted the 
 attention of the learned in all parts of the world. It is not 
 their transitive conjugations expressing at the same time 
 the idea of the person acting, and that acted upon, that have 
 excited so much astonishment. They are found also, though 
 not with the same rich variety of forms, in the Hebrew 
 and other oriental languages. But when two verbs with 
 intermediate ideas are combined together into one, as in 
 the Delaware n'schingiwipoma, I do not like to eat with 
 him*, which the Abbe Molina also declares to exist in the 
 idiom of Chili f; there is sufficient cause to wonder, particu- 
 larly when we compare the complication of these languages 
 with the simplicity of the Chinese and its kindred dialects in 
 the ancient world. Whence can have arisen such a marked 
 diversity in the forms of human speech ? 
 
 Nor is it only with the verbs that accessary ideas are so 
 curiously combined in the Indian languages ; it is so likewise 
 with the other parts of speech. Take the adverb for in- 
 stance. The abstract idea of time is frequently annexed to 
 it. Thus if the Delawares mean to say, If you do not return, 
 
 * Hist. Trans, p. xxvi. 
 
 f Iduancloclavin, I do not wish to eat with him." Hist, of Chili, 
 Append, on the Chilian Language. 
 
OF THE LENNI IiENAPE INDIANS. 23 
 
 they will express it by mattatsch gluppi weque, which may be 
 thus construed : 
 
 Matta is the negative adverb no ; tsch is the sign of the 
 future, with which the adverb is inflected ; gluppiweque is 
 the second person of the plural number of the present 
 tense of the subjunctive mood of the verb gluppiechton, 
 To turn about or return. In this manner every idea meant 
 to be conveyed by this sentence is clearly understood. 
 The subjunctive mood shews the uncertainty of the action, 
 and the sign of the future tense coupled with the adverb 
 points to a time not yet come when it may or may not take 
 place. The Latin phrase nisi veneris expresses all these 
 meanings ; but the English If you do not come, and the French 
 Si vous tie venez pas, have by no means the same elegant 
 precision. The idea which in Delaware and Latin the 
 subjunctive form directly conveys is left to be gathered in 
 the English and French from the words if and si, and there 
 is nothing else to point out the futurity of the action. And 
 where the two former languages express every thing with 
 two words, each of the latter requires five, which yet repre- 
 sent a smaller number of ideas. To which of these gram- 
 matical forms is the epithet barbarous to be applied ? 
 
 This very cursory view of the general structure of the 
 Indian languages, exemplified by the Delaware, will at least 
 convince the reader that a considerable degree of art and 
 method has presided over their formation. Whether this as- 
 tonishing fact is to be considered as a proof (as many are 
 inclined to believe) that this continent was formerly inha- 
 bited by a civilized race of men, or whether it is not more 
 natural to suppose that the Almighty Creator has endowed 
 mankind with a natural logic which leads them, as it were, by 
 instinct, to such methods in the formation of their idioms as 
 are best calculated to facilitate their use, I shall not at pre- 
 sent inquire ; I do not, however, hesitate to say, that the 
 bias of my mind is in favour of the latter supposition ; be- 
 cause no language has yet been discovered, either among 
 savage or polished nations, which was not governed by rules 
 6 
 
S4 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 and principles which nature alone could dictate, and human 
 science never could have imagined. Various attempts have 
 been made towards the formation of a philosophical lan- 
 guage ; none of them has ever gone beyond the imitation of 
 those which were previously known ; neither Leibnitz nor 
 Bishop Wilkins, neither Monboddo nor De Brosses, nor any 
 of those illustrious philosophers who have written so much 
 on the origin and formation of languages, could have disco- 
 vered a priori the curious combinations by which the Ame- 
 rican Indians form their words ; nor the manner in which 
 they associate with the verb such an immense number of 
 accessary ideas; we are therefore compelled, when endea- 
 vouring to account for the variety of modes in which men 
 represent their perceptions through the organs of speech, 
 to abandon all vain theories, and look up only to nature 
 and nature's God. 
 
 I have been led into these preliminary observations far- 
 ther than I expected ; I feel that I have been insensibly 
 drawn beyond the legitimate bounds of a preface ; it is, 
 however, necessary that I should say something of this 
 grammar and of its author. 
 
 The Reverend David Zeisberger was a native of Mora- 
 via, where he was born in the year 1721. He was edu- 
 cated at Herrnhut in the principles of the religion of the 
 United Brethren. At the age of seventeen he came to this 
 country, and landed in Georgia, where his co-religionists had 
 begun some settlements. Thence he came to Pennsylvania. 
 In the year 1746, (being twenty five years of age) he was 
 sent out as a missionary to the Noith American Indians, 
 in which employment he continued, with few and short 
 intervals, until his death, which happened in the year 1808. 
 He died at Goshen, in the state of Ohio, at the advanced 
 age of eighty -seven years. 
 
 Thus this venerable missionary resided upwards of sixty 
 years among the Indians of this country, preaching the gos- 
 pel to them in their native idioms. In this manner he 
 acquired several of their languages ; but was particularly 
 
OF THE LENNI IiENAPE INDIANS. 25 
 
 skilled in the Onondago (an Iroquois dialect) and the Lenni 
 Lcnape 01 Delaware. On the former he wrote three gram- 
 mars, two in German* and the other in Knglishf, and a 
 dictionary, German and Indian, consisting of seven volumes 
 in quarto. These works, all in manuscript, are deposited 
 in our Society's library. 
 
 Those on the Delaware, except this grammar, have been 
 all printed. They consist of a copious spelling book in De- 
 laware and English, of which two editions have been pub- 
 lished!. Sermons to Children in Delawai e$, and a Collection 
 of Hymns in the same language)), all which appeared in 
 his life time. After his death his translation into Dela- 
 ware of Lieherkuhn's Harmony of the Four Gospels^ was 
 given to the public by the care and at the expense of 
 the Female Auxiliary Missionary Society at Bethlehem, 
 aided by private subscribers, among whom the late Ho- 
 nourable Elias Boudinot of New Jersey was conspicuous. 
 
 The original manuscript of this grammar the author order- 
 ed by his will to remain deposited in the library of the 
 United Brethren at Bethlehem, where it now is. In the 
 
 * Onondagoische Grammatica. MS. 4to, pp. 176 ; and a shorter one 
 also in 4to, pp. 87. 
 
 f Essay of an Onondago Grammar, or a short introduction to learning 
 the Onondago alias Maqua tongue. MS. 4to, pp. 67. 
 
 J Delaware and English Spelling Book, for the use of the Missions of 
 the United Brethren. Philadelphia, 1776 and 1806. The second edition 
 is much improved, and contains pp. 179, 12mo. 
 
 § Ehelittonhenk li amemensak gischitak Elleniechsink, untschi David 
 Zeisberger. Philadelphia, 1803, pp. 115, 12mo. 
 
 || A Collection of Hymns for the use of the Christian Indians of the 
 Mission of the United Brethren in America. Philadelphia, 1803, pp. 
 358, 12mo. 
 
 These hymns are all in the metre of German poetry, and are to be sung 
 to German tunes. It would have required more genius than falls to the 
 common lot of man to have discovered a rhythm suited to the character 
 of the language, and melodies adapted to it.: Such diversified talents 
 are seldom to be looked for in those who devote their lives to the convert 
 sion of savage nations. 
 
 If Elekup Nihillalquonk woak Pemauchsohalquonk Jesus Christ, seki ta 
 iauchsitup wochgidhakamike. New York, 1821, pp. 222, 12mq. 
 
S6 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 year 1816, our late lamented associate, the Reverend John 
 Heckewelder, having been requested to aid our Historical 
 Committee in their investigation of the forms and struc- 
 ture of the Indian languages, was kind enough, with the 
 permission of his superiors, to confide to them that va- 
 luable manuscript for their temporary use. The Commit- 
 tee ordered it to be translated into English ; and I willingly 
 undertook the task: various circumstances have hitherto 
 prevented its appearance. Several learned men, however, 
 both in Europe and in this country, having repeatedly ex- 
 pressed their wish to see it in print, its publication could 
 no longer be delayed. 
 
 The reader must not expect to find here a philoso- 
 phical grammar, as this was not made for the use of philo- 
 sophers, but of young missionaries — its object was entirely 
 practical. The author never dreamt that the theory of 
 the Indian languages would ever become the subject of philo- 
 sophical study. He has followed the Usual divisions of the 
 parts of speech ; but has not endeavoured, like the Spanish 
 American grammarians, to force the Indian forms of lan- 
 guage into too close an analogy with our own. To a cer- 
 tain degree it is necessary to explain the forms of the 
 Indian languages by those to which we are accustomed ; 
 to do otherwise would be following the old exploded me- 
 thod of teaching the Latin language by means of a giam- 
 mar written entirely in Latin ; at the same'* time, the peculiar 
 forms of the new idiom ought to be pointed out in a clear 
 and intelligible manner, and their principles analyzed so 
 as to lay down their rules, when differing from our own, 
 with the greatest possible perspicuity. It were to be wished 
 that our author had devoted a chapter to the syntax and 
 phraseology of the language ; but that, I presume, he left 
 to be acquired by practice. Upon the whole, however, 
 I think his grammar the best that I have seen of an Ame- 
 rican dialect. It is copious and rich in examples, and 
 his paradigms of the conjugations of Indian verbs are suf- 
 ficiently numerous to give a correct idea of the manner in 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 27 
 
 which that part of speech is constructed. The personal verbs 
 or transitions are fully and clearly explained. Indeed, it 
 may be said that he has the merit of clearness throughout ; 
 a merit so very rare, that it deserves to be noticed. Those 
 who before him have treated of Indian languages have either 
 not always understood themselves, or not been very anxious 
 to be understood by others. I do not even except the vene- 
 rable Eliot, whose Grammar of the Language of the Massa- 
 chusetts Indians is not free from obscurities ; some of which 
 the present one of its kindred dialect, the Delaware, will 
 help to clear up. 
 
 The Indian words in this Grammar are to be pronounced 
 according to the powers of the German alphabet, which Mr 
 Zeisberger thought proper to adopt*. It has long been a 
 desideratum in the philological science, that there should be 
 a uniform mode of writing exotic words, in order to convey, 
 as much as possible, the same idea of their sounds, at least 
 to the learned, through the civilized world. But, independ- 
 ent of the numerous difficulties which naturally attend such 
 a design, from the almost entire impossibility of conveying to 
 the mind through the eye the idea of sounds which the ear 
 never heard, an ill understood national pride makes every 
 nation desire that their own alphabet should be chosen as the 
 medium of communication. The least prejudiced on this 
 subject insist at least on the Roman character being univer- 
 sally used. The celebrated Volney wished all the Oriental 
 
 * The translator has preserved the orthography of the original, except 
 that he has substituted the letter y for the German j, because y has the 
 same sound according to the English and German pronunciation. Also 
 where the author has introduced the vowel o after w, in order to shew 
 that the latter is to have the English and not the German sound, and so 
 writes woagan to be pronounced wagan, the translator has suppressed 
 the o, thinking it sufficient to give notice that w consonant is always to 
 be pronounced as in English, whether it be followed by another conso- 
 nant or by a vowel. In the former case a sheva or mute vowel is interposed 
 between the two sounds : thus, wdanis (daughter) is pronounced w'danis 
 and not oo-danis. Following the same principle, where the author writes 
 wiquoam (a house) the translator writes ivikwam, which is precisely the 
 sound which Zeisberger meant to represent. 
 
 7 
 
28 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 languages to be written in that character, and not only pro- 
 posed a plan to that effect, but left a considerable legacy by 
 his will to be employed in premiums to those who should 
 suggest the best means of carrying it into execution. This 
 shews how far a favourite idea may take hold of the mind of 
 a man, however distinguished by his genius and talents. 
 
 It is not for those languages that have already an alphabet 
 and an orthography of their own that a uniform mode of 
 writing their words is desirable ; uniformity in this respect, 
 even among the nations that use the same characters, is ab- 
 solutely unattainable. All that is desired is a common mode 
 of communicating the sounds of unwritten languages, in or- 
 der to facilitate the comparison of their words and gramma- 
 tical forms with each other with the greater exactness. To 
 this object the powers of our English alphabet are not ade- 
 quate ; because its vowel sounds are uncertain and a great 
 part of them are represented by diphthongs. But most nations 
 seem to think that their national honour is concerned in 
 forcing their own orthography upon the learned world. 
 Thus since the study of the Chinese language has become 
 fashionable in Europe, the Portuguese mode of spelling Chi- 
 nese words, to which all were before accustomed, has been 
 entirely abandoned, and the English and French have each 
 adopted the orthography of their own language ; so that it is 
 sometimes difficult to recognize the same words in the gram- 
 mars and dictionaries which they have respectively published. 
 
 In this country we are free from this prejudice; therefore 
 my learned friend Mr Pickering, with the liberality which 
 characterizes an American man of science, has proposed a 
 uniform mode of writing the words of our Indian languages*, 
 which I am happy to find has been almost universally 
 adopted by our Missionaries not only on this continent, but 
 in the South Sea Islands. I am also informed that our go- 
 
 * An Essay on a uniform Orthography for the Indian Languages of 
 North America. By John Pickering. Published at Boston in the Me?- 
 raoirs of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Vol. IV. p. 319. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 29 
 
 vernment, who, it is reported and generally believed, are 
 preparing to publish an important national work on the 
 languages of the Indians who inhabit these United States on 
 the model considerably improved of that of the empress Ca- 
 therine, have recommended to the agents and other persons 
 employed in collecting the materials to conform themselves 
 as much as possible to the alphabet proposed hy Mr Pick- 
 ering. Thus America will have the honour of giving an 
 example which it is to be hoped will be more generally 
 followed. 
 
 This alphabet is entirely formed of our Roman characters. 
 The vowel sounds are those of the German and Italian lan- 
 guages. The nasals are expressed by a comma or cedilla 
 under each nasal vowel, after the Polish manner. The En- 
 glish sh is preserved, and its correlative zh is adopted for the 
 sound of the French and Portuguese j. The compound 
 consonant sounds are represented by their component 
 signs, thus ks, ksh, ts, tz. Sjc. The Author has been care- 
 ful not to introduce any new characters. Even the sound 
 of the Greek x and Spanish jota is expressed in the most 
 usual manner by kh; and although there is a real diffe- 
 rence between these two sounds, the one being k, and 
 the other g aspirate, Mr Pickering did not think it ne- 
 cessary to appropriate to each a separate character, well 
 knowing that approximation is all that can be reached, and 
 that every attempt to disiinguish nice differences of sound 
 would eventually prove vain. 
 
 Thus, with a liberality which cannot be too much praised, 
 Mr Pickering has selected among the various powers which 
 the naiions of Europe have given to the characters of the 
 Boman alphabet those which best suited his purpose, without 
 shewing favour or partiality to any country, and least to 
 his own. His plan, moreover, is simple and easy of execu- 
 tion. If it is not the best that could possibly be devised, it is 
 the one that is most likely to be certainly adopted. Bril- 
 liant theories and highly complicated schemes may dazzle 
 for a while : but simplicity in plans presented for general 
 
30 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGtJAGE 
 
 practice is the mark of true genius, and must ultimately pre- 
 vail. 
 
 Before I conclude this preface, I beg leave to say a few 
 words respecting the present translation. When, eleven 
 years aa;o, I undertook to make it for the Philosophical So- 
 ciety I had never turned my attention to the Indian lan- 
 guages, and I was entirely ignorant of their forms and con- 
 struction. I therefore thought of nothing beyond a close 
 and literal translation of the manuscript. I soon per- 
 ceived, however, that it had been written on loose sheets, 
 which had been bound together after the Author's death 
 by persons not conversant with the subject. It also became 
 clear to me that Mr Zeisberger had not given the last finish- 
 ing hand to his work. He probably meant fo have con- 
 densed it, and to have exhibited the various forms of the 
 conjugations of the verbs in a lesser number of paradigms. 
 These observations struck me as I went on with the, transla- 
 tion which I finished as I had begun it. 1 left out only one 
 chapter, in which the author explained the manner of ex*- 
 pressing the German compound verbs into the Delaware 
 language; as it would have required too much labour to adapt 
 it to the English forms of speech, and would have participa- 
 ted in too great a degree of an original composition. I 
 regret, however, that I did not attempt it. It is now too 
 late, as Mr Zeisberger's manuscript has been returned to the 
 Bethlehem library. 
 
 I had no idea at the time that this grammar would ever 
 be published. Since the Society came to a resolution to 
 commit it to the press, it became my duty to revise what 
 I had done; I saw that it would require to be almost entirely 
 recast, and above all to be considerably abridged, in order to 
 give it that form which alone could satisfy the taste of the 
 present age. But on this I could not venture. For more 
 than ten years, indeed, I have applied myself to the study of 
 the Indian languages, and have become more conversant 
 with their structure and forms than those who have not paid 
 a similar attention to the subject. Besides the usual helps 
 
OF THE L.ENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 31 
 
 of grammars, dictionaries, vocabularies, 8jc. I have had the 
 benefit of correspondences and personal communications 
 with Indians, missionaries, and other persons from various 
 parts of this hemisphere, more or less skilled in those 
 idioms. With regard to the Delaware, I have received much 
 information from my deceased friend Mr Heckewelder, 
 whom I always found ready to answer my queries, and solve 
 my doubts, whenever I thought proper to communicate them 
 to him. If he were still alive, I would not have hesitated, 
 with his kind assistance, to have presented this grammar in 
 a more acceptable form to the public. Without such aid I 
 could not undertake it, being in want of that practical know- 
 ledge which can only be acquired by a long residence 
 among the Indians. 
 
 Another reason has induced me not to make too free with 
 this grammar, although I am satisfied that it might have 
 been advantageously abridged. Several gentlemen, par- 
 ticularly of the army, who are stationed or reside in the 
 vicinity of the Indian country, and consequently have much 
 intercourse with the aborigines, have expressed a wish that 
 Mr Zeisberger's Work should be given in as ample a form 
 as possible, as it would be of great use to them in studying 
 not only the language of the Delawares, but also those of 
 the Chippeways, Menomonies, and other cognate idioms. 
 Therefore it is to be considered that it is not only intended 
 as an exhibition of the forms of the Indian dialects in a 
 scientific point of view, but also as a guide to those who 
 may be engaged in the study of this language. To them 
 the multiplicity of examples which others may think unne- 
 cessary will be of great value, as there are no other writ- 
 ten sources from which they can derive information, if we 
 except Mr Zeisberger's Spelling Book, which has long been 
 out of print, and his Translation of Lieberkuhn's Harmony 
 of the Gospels, which was printed only for the use of mis- 
 sionaries, and is not to be purchased. Neither is the Trans- 
 lation of St John's Epistle by Dencke to be had in the shops. 
 It is much to be regretted that a certain number of copies 
 8 
 
33 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 of such works are not put in the hands of booksellers for 
 sale. They would be purchased, at least, by the public libra- 
 ries of this country, and perhaps also, of Europe. 
 
 For these reasons 1 have ventured upon few alterations 
 of the Manuscript now published. I have, however, some- 
 times varied from the Author's method, when I thought 
 it too defective, and I have modified his explanations, so 
 as to give them (as I thought) a greater degree of clear- 
 ness and precision, and make them more easily under- 
 stood. I have even occasionally, always with the same 
 view, added some facts and illustrations which were not 
 in the text. But this I have chiefly done in the form of 
 notes at the bottom of the page, under my own name 
 and responsibility. Upon the whole, I have taken no 
 liberty with the Author's work which I was not sure he 
 would have approved of if he had been living;. As a fair 
 copy of the original manuscript of this translation still re- 
 mains in the Society's library, the alterations which I have 
 made may be seen and judged of by all who will take the 
 pains to compare it with the one now published. 
 
 I hope this Grammar will convince those who may still be 
 incredulous, that I did not go too far when I asserted in my 
 Report to the Historical Committee that the Indian lan- 
 guages are rich in words and grammatical forms, and that 
 their general structure displays as much order and me- 
 thod as that of any of those that exist on the face of the 
 earth. They are highly synthetical, and combine ideas toge- 
 ther in a manner so artificial and so uniformly consistent 
 with the rules of analogy, that it is not to be wondered at if 
 men. reasoning c priori, have thought it impossible that such 
 combinations could proceed from the minds of savages. As 
 the fact cannot be denied, the pride of civilization has 
 at last found out that it is very natural that it should be 
 so ; because analysis is the most difficult operation of the 
 human mind, and barbarous nations being incapable of it, 
 their languages must necessarily be synthetical. But Mr 
 Adam Smith, who first broached this doctrine in a disser- 
 
OF THE LENNI liENAPE INDIANS. 33 
 
 tation on the origin of language subjoined to his Theory of 
 Moral Sentiments, and who has been highly applauded for 
 this discovery, did not surely consider that before the Indians 
 could have combined their ideas, and arranged them in re- 
 gular order in the forms in which they now appear, they 
 must first have analysed them, otherwise they could not have 
 discovered their analogies and adhered to them so closely. 
 But in this they did not proceed as philosophers would have 
 done in their closets ; the operations of nature are much 
 quicker than those of science, and perhaps are not the less 
 sure. I leave it to others to explain the details of this pro- 
 cess ; my task is to exhibit the facts, not to trace them' to 
 their origin. 
 
 I am not an enthusiastic or exclusive admirer of the In- 
 dian languages, and am far from being disposed to assert 
 that their forms are superior to those of others. Compa- 
 risons on such subjects appear to me idle, and can lead to 
 no useful results. Language is the instrument of thought 
 and must always be adequate to its object. Therefore no 
 language has yet been and probably never will be found, des- 
 tiiute of forms; for without them none can exist. By forms 
 I do not mean only inflexions of words and the like; I 
 mean every regular and methodical arrangement of the ele- 
 ments of speech for practical purposes. This the Chinese 
 have as well as the Delaware, although in vulgar accepta- 
 tion it is commonly said that the Chinese idiom has no 
 forms. Like every thing else in nature, the forms of lan- 
 guage, are various, and in that variety consists the chief 
 beauty of the works of the Almighty Creator. A lan- 
 guage, it is true, may be more or less adapted to certain 
 objects. Some are more poetical than others, while there 
 are those which are better suited to the perspicuity of 
 logical reasoning. But it is only after they have been 
 moulded by the hand of genius that this particular cha- 
 racter becomes apparent. Who can say what Homer 
 would have produced if he had had for his instrument 
 the language of the Lenni Lenape? This, however, we 
 
34 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 may with safety assert; that he -would have been able to say 
 more in fewer words, than even in his own admirable Greek. 
 Every mode of speech has its peculiar qualities, susceptible 
 of being developed and improved by cultivation ; but, like 
 flowers and plants, all languages have a regular organiza- 
 tion, and none can be called barbarous in the sense which 
 presumption has affixed to that word. An unorganized lan- 
 guage would be a chaos, unfit to be used as the medium 
 of intercourse between men. ~No memory could retain a 
 long list of arbitrary words, if order and method, founded 
 on analogy, did not come to its aid. Grammatical forms, 
 therefore, are as necessary to human languages as the or- 
 gans of life and vegetation are to animals and plants. Nei- 
 ther could exist without them. 
 
 In the idiom before us we have an example of what na- 
 ture can produce, unaided by the theories of science and the 
 refinements of art. To assign to each its proper share in 
 the composition of such noble instruments as the languages 
 of men is not among the least important questions which 
 philology presents to our inquiry. It deserves to be tho- 
 roughly investigated. The result, it is true, will be morti- 
 fying to our pride; but that pride, which makes us ascribe 
 so much to our own efforts, and so little to the silent and 
 unperceived operations of nature, is the greatest obstacle 
 that we meet in our road to knowledge, and we cannot pro- 
 ceed very far in the discovery of natural causes while we 
 remain disposed to attribute every thing to our so much 
 boasted civilization, our limited sciences, and our mimic arts. 
 
OF THE EENNT EENAPE INDIANS. 35 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 riiHE Delaware Indians have no / nop r in their language*. 
 -■- The letters must be pronounced as in German or Latin. 
 The language has no resemblance to any of ours ; it has, 
 however, its own fixed rules, to which those must conform 
 who will speak intelligibly. Whoever will speak Indian 
 must learn to think in Indian. 
 
 This treatise will greatly facilitate those who wish to learn 
 this language, if they will only impress themselves with the 
 rules-, which are neither numerous nor difficult. In propor- 
 tion as the knowledge of them is acquired, a greater plea- 
 sure will be found in this study, and every day new treasures 
 will be discovered; but above all, there must be a desire to 
 learn, without which nothing can be effected. 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — The Delawares who inhabited Pennsylvania, while it was under 
 die Swedish dominion, used the r instead of the I. They called themselves Renni Re nape. See 
 Lutheri Catechismus, Oefwersat pao American- Virginiske Spraoket. Stockholm, 1696. This 
 race appears to be extiUcf. 
 
36 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 GRAMMAR. 
 
 I SHALL treat in this essay of the different parts of speech, 
 to wit : * Noun, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Con- 
 junction, and Interjection. 
 
 Nouns are of two kinds, substantive and adjective. 
 
 Of the Noun Substantive. 
 
 The Indians have no declensions, properly so called; that is to say, the 
 nouns are not declined by inflections, as in the Latin and Greek, except 
 in two cases, the vocative and the local. In the others the place of these 
 terminations is supplied by the relative position of the noun, or by gram- 
 matical forms or combinations of the verbs and other parts of speech; as 
 will be shewn in the following examples. These grammatical forms or 
 combinations are peculiar to the Indian languages, and I believe are not 
 to be found in any others. They will be more fully explained under their 
 proper heads. At present I shall only shew in what manner what are 
 commonly called the cases of nouns are expressed or indicated. 
 
 Nominative. 
 
 This case (if it may be so called) has no particular form or inflection. 
 It is simply the name of the substantive, as in English. 
 
 Lenni, the man 
 Ochqueu, the woman 
 Wikwam, the house 
 
 Sipo or sipu, the river 
 Getanittowit, God 
 Gischuch, the sun. 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — The Author does not speak of the article ; yet there is one in the 
 Delaware language, the article mo, which is used either in a definite or indefinite sense, as 
 m'hittuck, a tree or the tree. The Minsi say michtuk. This article was discovered by the Trans- 
 lator in the Massachusetts language, and on inquiring of Mr Heckewelder, he said that the same 
 article was also in the Delaware, but was not frequently used, because the word was sufficiently 
 understood without it. See his letter to the Translator in the notes to Eliot's Grammar, 11th Mas- 
 sachusetts' Historical Collections, Second Series, p. xv. > 
 
OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [of nounb.] 
 
 37 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 The genitive is expressed by placing the noun employed in that sense 
 immediately before that which is used in the nominative. Sometimes 
 also by prefixing to the nominative the inseparable pronoun of the third 
 person w, as we say in English John his book for John's book. 
 
 Getannittowit quisall, God's son 
 Nihillalquonk wtanglawagan*, the Lord's death 
 Getannitowit wtahoaltowagan, God's lore 
 Getannitowit gekteniagelowagan, God's mercy 
 
 Lennowikit, the man's house 
 Getannitowit wtallewussowagan, God's ma- 
 jesty 
 Nihillalquonk allogewaganall, the Lord's works. 
 
 The Dative 
 
 Is expressed by inflections in the verbs and by prefixes and suffixes 
 which will be more particularly explained. 
 
 Nemilan, I give (to) him 
 Milap, he gave to him 
 NdeUap, I said (to) him 
 Nowitschemap, I fetched (to 1 him 
 Melat hallemiwi pommauchsowoagan, eternal 
 life 
 
 Ndatschimolschap, I related to him 
 Nolschap , I went, came to him 
 Nowitschewap, I went with him. 
 
 The Accusative 
 Is likewise expressed by means of the verbs, as is said above. 
 
 Ndahoala, I love him 
 Nowaha, I know him 
 Npendawa, I understand him 
 Npenauwelema, I take care of him 
 
 Npennauwa, I look athim 
 Nemachelema, I honour him 
 Getanittowit nquitayala, I fear God. 
 fear him). 
 
 (God I 
 
 The Vocative 
 
 Is expressed in the singular by the termination an, and by erik, when 
 coupled with the pronoun our. 
 
 Wo Kitanittowianf ! O God! 
 Nihillalan ! O Lord ! 
 Nihillalian ! O my Lord ! 
 Nihillaliyenk ! O our Lord ! 
 Elangomellan ! O my friend ! 
 Wetochemellan ! O my father ! 
 Wetochemellenk ! O our father ! 
 Wetochernuxian ! O father ! 
 
 Pemauchsohalian ! my Saviour ! 
 Pemauchsohalu weyan ! O Saviour ! 
 Nocha! (for Nochan), O my father! 
 
 child to its father) 
 Elenapewian ! Thou Indian ! 
 Shawanowian ! Thou Shawanese ! 
 Metapewian ! wicked man ! 
 Welilissian ! O pious man ! 
 
 The Local case%. 
 
 This as well as the preceding may be properly so called. It is formed 
 by means of the suffixes ink and unk, and expresses in, in the, on, out of. 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — Wtanglowagan. In this word, anglowagan signifies death, from 
 angel, to die. W is the inseparable pronoun his, and t is interposed for euphony's sake. 
 
 t JVote by the Translator. — The Author frequently uses the letters g and k and d and t indis- 
 criminately. 
 
 % JVote by the Translator.— The Author calls this case the ablative. I have preferred the de- 
 nomination local. 
 
38 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [of nouns.] 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Utenink (from Uteney, a city or town), in the Awossagamewunk (from Awossagame, hea- 
 
 town, in town j ven), in heaven 
 
 Utenink nda, I am going to town, or into the \ Waehtschunk nda. (from Wachtschu, hill, rnoun- 
 
 town ' tain), I am going up the hill 
 
 Utenink noon, I am. coming from or out of Waehtschunk noom, I come from the hill 
 
 town Gamunk nda or noom, I am going over the war 
 
 Sipunk (from Sipo, river, creek, water),, to. or ! ter or coming, from thence 
 
 into the river Machtschikamigunk, in the hole (meaning a 
 
 Mbink (from Mbi, water), in the water | hole in the ground) 
 
 Hakink (from Hacki,, earth, ground), in or on i Ochunk, at his father's. 
 
 the earth 
 
 OF NUMBERS. 
 
 The singular has in general no particular inflections to distinguish it 
 from the plural, except in the third person, where it ends in Z, but most 
 commonly in wall: The plural is variously inflected. There isasingu*- 
 lar number combined with the plural, as in our father, my fathers, and a 
 double plural, as in our fathers. These are distinguished by particular 
 inflections, the double plural, by the duplication of a syllable. Substan- 
 tives are generally combined with the inseparable possessive pronoun, 
 which in the singular is n for the first person; k for the second, and w or 
 o for the third. The inseparable pronoun is often omitted in the plural 
 and in the third person singular, and the sense is determined by the nur 
 meric inflection, which is at the same time pronominal. Those inflec- 
 tions are na or nana in the first person, wa or wawa in the second, and 
 wall, wak and wawall in the third. The duplication of a syllable, as na- 
 na, wawa, wawawall, indicates the double plural. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Wetoochwink, Father. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nooch, my father 
 Kooch, thy father 
 Ochwall, his or her father 
 
 Singular with Plural. 
 Noochena, our father 
 Koochuwa, your father 
 Ochuwawall, their father. 
 
 Double Plural. 
 Naochenana, our fathers 
 Kooch'ewawa, your fathers 
 Ochuwawawall, their fathers. 
 
 Gahowes, Mother. 
 
 Singular. 
 Ngahowes, my mother! 
 Kahowes, thy mother: 
 Gohessal, his or her mother. 
 
 Singular with PlwraV. 
 Gohessena, our mother 
 Kohessuwa, your mother 
 Gohessuwawall, their mother. 
 
 • The double 
 ceding. exampL 
 
 ilural is formed as in the- pre- 
 
 Sometimes the singular receives numerical inflections, and the substan- 
 tive itself is somewhat modified, as we have already seen in wetoochwink, 
 father^ from which are formed nooch, kooch, &c. S»>in>the following ex- 
 ample : 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [of nouns.] 
 
 39 
 
 Achpoan, Bread. 
 
 N'dappoanum, my bread 
 K'dappoanaum, thy bread 
 Wdappoanum, his bread 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'dappoanummena, our bread 
 K'dappoanumowa, your bread 
 Wdappoanumowawall, their bread. 
 
 The following examples are sufficient to point out the general form of 
 numerical declension : 
 
 Hakihacan, the field or plantation. 
 
 N'dakihacan, my plantation 
 K'dakihacan, thy plantation 
 Wdakihacan, his plantation 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dakihacanena, our plantation 
 K'dakihacanena, your plantation 
 W'dakihacanowawall, their plantation. 
 
 Wuschkink, the eye or sight. 
 
 Neschkink, my sight or eye 
 Keschkink, thy sight or eye 
 Wuschkink, his sight or eye 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Neschkinkuna, our sight or eye 
 Keschkinkuwa, your sight or eye 
 Wuschkinkuwawall, their sight or eye. 
 
 The singular with plural and the double plural are formed as in the 
 former examples. 
 
 The termination naninga is employed in the double plural, when 
 speaking of deceased persons. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Nochena, our father 
 Nochenana, our fathers 
 Nochenaninga, our deceased fathers 
 Muchomsena, our grandfather 
 
 Muchomsenaninga, our deceased grandfathers 
 Kimachtenaninga, our deceased brothers 
 Chesmussenaninga, our deceased sisters 
 Gohessenaninga, our deceased mothers. 
 
 Substantives without the prefixed pronouns are generally inflected in 
 the plural by all or ak, the former termination being applied to inanimate 
 and the latter to animate objects. Trees and the larger plants are con- 
 sidered animate. There are some exceptions to this rule, as for instance. 
 namessall, fishes, which takes the inanimate termination ; but they are not 
 numerous. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Inanimate Form. 
 
 Hakihacanall, plantations 
 Menachgaquall, fence-rails 
 Siposall, rivers, creeks 
 Wikwahemall, houses 
 Uteneyall, cities, towns 
 
 Lennowak, men 
 Ochquewak, women 
 Amemensak, children 
 
 10 
 
 Achsinall, stones 
 Ulakensall, dishes 
 Amocholall, canoes 
 Kitoaltewall, ships 
 Oyosall, pieces of meat or flesh. 
 
 Animate Form. 
 
 (Amangamequak, large fishes 
 Tiposak, hens, fowls 
 Achsinnaminschiak, sugar trees 
 
40 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [of nouns.] 
 
 Wschumaissak, cows, calves 
 Nenayungesak, horses 
 Hhquak or hitgook, trees 
 
 Tscholensak, birds 
 Tsquallak, frogs. 
 
 Substantives derived from active or neutral verbs take in the plural 
 the termination ik : 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Wenitschanit, father or mother, parent, (from 
 Wentschikin, to descend, grow out of) 
 
 Wenitschanitschik, parents 
 
 Wdallemansitschik, the owners of cattle, birds, 
 fowls, &c. 
 
 Pemsitschik, those who are going 
 
 Peyatschik, those who are coming 
 Elemussitschik, those who are going away 
 Wikhetschik, the cultivators of the earth 
 Mikemossitschik, labouring people 
 Mannachetschik, hewers of wood 
 Elauwitschik, hunters. 
 
 Of the various kinds of Substantives. 
 
 The substantive combines itself in this language with almost every part 
 of speech, but principally with the verb. We have seen those immediately 
 derived from active or neutral verbs : we shall now proceed to others of 
 an analogous description. 
 
 1. There are substantives derived from passive verbs: they end in wa- 
 gan and have no plural : 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Machelemuxowagan, honour, the being ho- 
 noured 
 
 Gettemegelemuxowagan, the being shewn fa- 
 vour, mercy, tenderness 
 
 Mamschalgussowagan, the being held in re- 
 membrance 
 
 Mamintochimgussowagan, the being esteemed 
 
 Wulakenimgussowagan, the being praised 
 
 -. And many others of the same kind. 
 
 Machelemoachgenimgussowagan, the receiv- 
 ing honour and praise 
 Amangachgenimgusswagan, the being raised or 
 
 elevated by praise 
 Schingalgussowagan, the being taken 
 Mamachtschimgussowagan, the being insulted 
 Pilsohalgussowagan, holiness, purity 
 
 Note. — It might, indeed, be said that substantives in this language 
 have a passive mood, so nearly are they allied to verbs, as will be shewn 
 in its pftace. 
 
 2. 'There are, moreover, substantives which are akin to participles, 
 such as, 
 
 Ahoalgussit, the beloved 
 Mechelernuxit, the honoured 
 Nilchgussit, the killed 
 Lekhikit, the one who is writing 
 
 Mikemossit, the one who is labouring, the la- 
 bourer 
 Nanhillowit, the one who takes care of the dead 
 Schingaluesit, the enemy, the adversary. 
 
 3. There are also those which are derived from verbs but assume the 
 character of participles, such as, 
 
 Ppmmauchsowaganit, he who is living 
 Ahoaltowaganit, he who is love 
 Wulamoewaganit, he who is the truth 
 Wacheyekumuit, he who is the light 
 Wdallemunsit, the owner of the cattle 
 
 Wewikit, the master of the house 
 Wenitschanit, a child's father or mother 
 Gettemagelowaganit, he who is mercy 
 Tschitanessowaganit, he who is strength. 
 
OF THE LENNl t^ENAPE INJHANS. 
 
 [op NOUNS. J 
 
 41 
 
 4. There are also substantives formed of two substantives together, or 
 a substantive with an adjective or verb : 
 
 Yagawan, a hut 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 | Tipas, a hen or fowl. 
 
 From which two words are formed, 
 
 Tipasigawan, the hen coop 
 Goschgoschigawan, the hog sty 
 Mosigawan, the cow stable 
 
 Also, 
 
 Pemauchso waptonamik, the word of life 
 Wulelendamowaptonamik, the glad tiding 
 
 the gospel 
 KtemakauschsowagaD, a poor miserable life 
 Machtapan, bad, stormy weather 
 Matalogacan, a bad wicked servant 
 
 of 
 
 Pitawikham, the front roof of a house 
 Patamoewigawan, a house of prayer, (the Lord's 
 house, from Patamawos, God, the Lord). 
 
 Pallalogasowagan, crime, evil deed 
 Mattalogasowagan, a wicked, sinful act 
 Machtatenawagan, discontent, unhappiness 
 Tschitanatenawagan, strength of the spirit of the 
 
 inner man 
 Kschiechauchsowagan, a holy life and conduct. 
 
 Diminutives are formed by the suffix tit*, as, 
 
 Amemens, amementit, a little child 
 
 Nitschan, nitschantit, my little friend (from 
 
 Nitis, friend; a coaxing expression used by 
 
 parents to their children) 
 Pilawetschitsch, pilawetit, a little boy 
 Ochquerit or quetit, a little girl 
 Lennotit, a little man 
 Wikwamtit, a little room (house) 
 Sipotit, a little creek or brook 
 
 Hitguttit, a little tree 
 Goschgotit, a pig 
 Tipatit, a chicken 
 Motit, a little calf 
 
 Achpoantit, a little loaf or little piece of bread 
 Oyotit, a little piece of meat (as is given to chil- 
 dren) 
 Tscholentit, a little bird— Tscholentittak, (Plur.) 
 
 OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 There are not many of these, because those words, which with us are 
 adjectives, here are verbs, and although they are not inflected through 
 all the persons, yet they have tenses. The adjectives proper end in uwi 
 and owi, and are derived sometimes from substantives and sometimes from 
 verbs. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Hallemiwi, eternal Wulelendamuwi, merry; from wulelendam, to re- 
 Genamuwi, grateful; from genam, thanks joice, to be joyful or merry 
 
 Tgauchsuwi — good, kind; from tgauchsin, to be Wscnitschanquiwi, spiritual; from wtschitschank, 
 good or kind the spirit. 
 
 * JVbte by the translator. — The diminutive tit is only used in the animate gender. In the 
 inanimate the termination es is employed, as wikmames, a small house, amocholes, a small canoe. 
 In speaking of a pretty little animal, the diminutive form is is, schis, or tsehis, as mamalis, the 
 fawn of a dee,r, kuligatschis, thy pretty little paw. (See the Preface.) There are some excep- 
 tions to this rule, as for instance, allumes, a little dog, in which the inanimate diminutive is em- 
 ployed. But these are not numerous. 
 
GRAMMAR OF THE IiANGUAGE 
 
 [of nouns.] 
 
 Hakeyiwi, corporeal ; from hakey, the body 
 Pommauchsuwi, living ; from pommauchsin, to 
 
 live 
 Wdehiwi, hearty, cordial ; from Wdehin, the 
 
 heart 
 Ahoaltiwi, loving ; from ahoalan, to love 
 Wachtuchwepiwi, personal, bodily ; from wach- 
 
 tuchwepi, the body, the flesh 
 Pilsuwi, piluwi, clean, chaste; from pilsin, to be 
 
 clean or chaste 
 Wulatenamuwi, wulatenamowi, happy; from 
 
 wulatenamen, to be happy 
 Wulamallessuwi, well, happy ; from wulamalles- 
 
 sin, to be in health or happy 
 Allowiwi, more, yet more 
 Nungiwi, trembling; from nungihillan,to tremble 
 Schauwewi, tired, weak ; from schauchsin, to be 
 
 weak 
 Nolemiwi, invisible, unseen 
 Apendawi, useful ; from apendamen, to enjoy, to 
 
 make use of 
 Mattelemuwi, contemptible ; from mattelendam, 
 
 to despise 
 Angellowi, anglowi, mortal ; from angel, to die 
 Mboiwi, mortal; mboiwi wochganall, dead bones; 
 
 from mboagan, death 
 Awendamowi, awendamuwi, painful; from a wen- 
 dam, to suffer pain 
 Ayandamuwi, ayandamowi, to desire, wish for 
 Machtamallessuwi, indisposed, sick; from mach- 
 
 tamalsin, to be sick 
 Hachtalenamuwi, discontented; from machtale- 
 
 namen, to be dissatisfied or discontented 
 Mhukuwi, bloody; from mhuk, blood 
 Moschiwi, clear, luminous 
 Tengandasuwi, pierced through 
 Petapaniwi, at break of day; from petapan, the 
 
 day breaks 
 Nipahwi, at night, by night 
 Wschitachanquiwi, ghostly, spiritual 
 
 Gischguniwi, in the day, by day 
 Sedpokuniwi, early in the morning 
 Wuschginquiwi, face to face; from wuschgink, 
 
 face 
 Wewatamowi, wise, prudent ; from wewoatam, 
 
 to be wise 
 Matiauchsuwi, sinful; from mattauchsin, to sin 
 Mayauchsuwi, of one mind; from mayauchsin, to 
 
 be of one mind 
 Langomuwi, friendly, peaceably disposed 
 Gettemagelensuwi, humble; from gettemagel- 
 
 ensin, to be humble 
 Gektemagelemuwi, gettemageluwi, merciful; 
 
 from gettemagelin, to be merciful 
 Allowelemuwi, valuable; from allowelenden, to 
 
 esteem, value 
 Wonattamowi, weak, impotent; from wonatam, 
 
 to be weak, impotent 
 Schahowapewi, heartless, desponding 
 Awullsittamuwi, obedient ; from awulsiltam, to 
 
 be obedient 
 Achwandoguwi, very peaceable 
 Amemensuwi, childish; from amemens, child 
 Schacachgapewi, an honest man, (from Schac- 
 
 achgapewin, to be just, upright) _ 
 Nihillowewi, murderous ; from nihillowen, to put 
 
 to death, to murder 
 Machelemuwi, honourable; from machelendam, 
 
 to honour 
 Langundowivi, peaceful, peaceable 
 Tachpachiwi, little, low 
 Tachpachelensuwi, little, low, humble 
 Wilawi, rich, valuable 
 Askiwi, raw 
 
 Tangelensuwi, tangitchewi, humble, modest 
 Scha welemuwi, miserable, painful, burthensome; 
 
 from schawelendam, to be burthened with 
 
 sorrow, labour, or trouble 
 Scattewi, burning 
 Scattewi wdehin, a burning heart. 
 
 There are also adjectives with other terminations, as 
 
 Nenapalek, unworthy, good for nothing 
 
 Segachtek, ardent 
 
 Segachtek ahoaltowan, an ardent love 
 
 Schewek, weak, tired 
 
 Wingimaktek, odoriferous, of good smell 
 
 Nundeyek, defective 
 
 Scattek, burning, ardent 
 
 Wisawek, yellow 
 
 Wapelechen, white 
 
 Asgask, green 
 
 Tekek, cold 
 
 Kschittek, warm, hot 
 
 Geschtek, ripe,. cooked or done 
 
 Allowad, allohak, powerful, strong 
 
 Mequik, bloody 
 
 Mechek, large, great 
 
 Ktemaki, poor, miserable, infirm 
 
 Gunigischuk, daily 
 
 Esseni, stony, flinty ; from achsin, a stone. 
 
 DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 
 The Comparative is expressed by alloioiwi, more. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [or NOUNS.] 
 
 43 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Wulit, good 
 
 Comp. Allowiwi wulit, more good, better 
 
 Mohinqui, great 
 
 Comp. Allowiwi m'chek, greater 
 
 Wahhellemat, wide 
 
 Comp. Allowiwi wahhelleniat, wider 
 
 There are some exceptions, as, 
 Ika, yonder. Ikalissi, further. 
 
 The Superlative is expressed by eluwi, most or the most. 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 Eluwiwulik, the very best, the supremely good 
 Allowilen, eluwilek, that which is above every 
 
 thing 
 Elu wamowit, God above all 
 Eluwiahoalgussit, the beloved above all things 
 
 Eluwassit, the most powerful, the most majestic 
 Eluwitschi tanessit, the strongest of all 
 Eluwitschiechsit, the most holy 
 Eluwitakauwussit, the best, the supremely good 
 Eluwilissit, the most gracious one 
 
 OF GENDERS. 
 
 The genders in the Delaware are not divided as in our languages into 
 masculine and feminine, but into animate and inanimate. To the former 
 class belong trees and all plants of a large growth"; annual plants and 
 grasses to the latter. Adjectives of the former class generally end in t, 
 those of the latter in k. The masculine and feminine, where it is neceS' 
 sary to discriminate, are expressed in various ways. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Animate, masculine and feminine, weleit, the 
 
 best 
 Inanimate, welhik, the best 
 Animate, masculine and feminine, gunaxit, 
 
 great, long 
 Inanimate, gunaquot, great, long 
 ■Animate, geschiechsit, pure, holy 
 Inanimate, gescbiechek, pure, holy 
 Animate, pilsit, pure, chaste 
 Inanimate, pilhik, pure, clean 
 Animate, allauchsit, allowat, strong, mighty 
 Inanimate, allohak, strong, mighty 
 
 Animate, scheuchsit, weak 
 
 Inanimate, schawek, weak 
 
 Animate, metzil, bad, wicked 
 
 Inanimate, medhik, bad, wicked 
 
 Animate, wacheyekumuit, he who is the light 
 
 Inanimate, wacheyek, the light 
 
 Animate, pommauchsowaganit, he who is the 
 
 life, from pommauchsowagan, life 
 Animate, tenktitit, the little 
 Inanimate, tengetrik, the little. 
 
 Speaking of quadrupeds, the masculine is generally expressed by fon- 
 nowechum, which signifies the male of beasts, thus : 
 
 Lennowechum nenayunges, moccaneu, gosch- 1 And of fowls and birds, 
 
 gosch, the male of the horse, dog, hog j Lennowehelleu, the male of fowls, birds, 
 
 The feminine of the human species is expressed as follows ; 
 
 Ochqueu, a woman 
 Ochquewak, women 
 Ochquetschitsch, a girl 
 Ochdomus, a woman's cousin 
 Masc. Chans, the elder brother 
 Fern. Mis, the elder sister 
 Chesmus, the younger brother or sister, to which 
 is prefixed in the masculine, lenno, man, 
 
 11 
 
 and in the feminine, ochque ; from ochqueu, 
 
 woman 
 Masc. Muchomes, the grandfather 
 Fein. Ohum, the grandmother 
 Nohum, kohum, ohumall, my, thy, his or fcer 
 
 grandmother 
 Masc. Noschik, my uncle 
 Fern. Piwitak, the aunt. 
 
44 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [of nouns.] 
 
 The females of fowls and birds are called ochquehelleu, and those of 
 quadrupeds ochquechum : 
 Nunschetto, a doe | Nunseheach, a she bear. 
 
 OF NUMERALS. 
 Numerals may also be classed among adjectives, and are as follows : 
 
 Ngutti ... 
 
 1] 
 
 Nguttapachki attach newinachke 
 
 140 
 
 Nischa - 
 
 2 
 
 Nguttapachki attach palenach tchenachke 150 
 
 Nacha ... 
 
 3 
 
 Nguttapachki attach guttasch tchenachke 160 
 
 Newo 
 
 4 
 
 Nguttapachki attach nischasch tchenachke 170 
 
 Palenach ... 
 
 5 
 
 Nguttapachki attach chasch tchenachke 
 
 180 
 
 Guttasch 
 
 6 
 
 Nguttapachki attach peschkonk tchenachke 190 
 
 Nischasch ... 
 
 7 
 
 NischapachM 
 
 200 
 
 Chasch 
 
 8 
 
 Nachapachki 
 
 300 
 
 Peschkonk ... 
 
 9 
 
 Newopachki 
 
 400 
 
 Tellen - 
 
 10 
 
 Palenach tchapachki 
 
 500 
 
 Tellen attach* ngutti 
 
 11 
 
 Guttasch tchapachki 
 
 600 
 
 Tellen attach nischa 
 
 12 
 
 Nischasch tchapachki 
 
 700 
 
 Tellen attach nacha 
 
 13 
 
 Chasch tchapachki 
 
 800 
 
 Tellen attach newo - 
 
 14 
 
 Peschkonk tchapachki - 
 
 900 
 
 Tellen attach palenach 
 
 15 
 
 Tellen tchen tchapachki, or ngutti kitta 
 
 - 
 
 Tellen attach guttasch 
 
 16 
 
 pachki 
 
 1000 
 
 Tellen attach nischasch - 
 
 17 
 
 Nischen kittapachki 
 
 2000 
 
 Tellen attach chasch 
 
 18 
 
 Nachen kittapachki 
 
 3000 
 
 Tellen attach peschkonk 
 
 19 
 
 Newon kittapachki 
 
 4000 
 
 Nischinachke ■» 
 
 20 
 
 Palenach tchen kittapachki 
 
 5000 
 
 Nischinachke attach ngutti 
 
 21 
 
 Guttasch tchen kittapachki 
 
 6000 
 
 Nischinachke attach nischa 
 
 22 
 
 Nischasck tchen kittapachki 
 
 7000 
 
 Nischinachke attach nacha 
 
 23 
 
 Chasch tchen kittapachki 
 
 8000 
 
 Nischinachke attach newo 
 
 24 
 
 Peschkonk tchen kittapachki 
 
 9000 
 
 Nischinachke attach palenach 
 
 25 
 
 Tellen tchen kittapachki 
 
 10,000 
 
 Nischinachke attach guttasch 
 
 26 
 
 Nischinachk tchen kittapachki 
 
 20,000 
 
 Nischinachke attach nischasch 
 
 27 
 
 Nachenachk tchen kittapachki 
 
 30,000 
 
 Nischinachke attach chasch 
 
 28 
 
 Newinachk tchen kittapachki 
 
 40,000 
 
 Nischinachke attach peschkonk 
 
 29 
 
 Palenach tchenachk tc hen kittapachki 
 
 50,000 
 
 Nachenachke 
 
 30 
 
 Guttasch tchenachk tchen kittapachki 
 
 60,000 
 
 Nachenachke attach ngutti 
 
 And sq forth to 39 
 
 31 
 
 Nischasch tchenachk tchen kittapachki 
 
 70,000 
 
 
 Chasch tchenachk tchen kittapachki 
 
 80,000 
 
 Newinachke 
 
 40 
 
 Peschkonk tchenachk tchen kittapachki 
 
 90,000 
 
 Palenach tchenachke 
 
 50 
 
 Nguttapachki tchen kittapachki 
 
 100,000 
 
 Guttasch tchenachke 
 
 60 
 
 Nischapachki tchen kittapachki 
 
 200,000 
 
 Nischasch tchenachke 
 
 70 
 
 Nachapachki tchen kittapachki 
 
 300,000 
 
 Chasch tchenachke 
 
 80 
 
 Palenach tchapachki tchen kittapachki 
 
 500,000 
 
 Peschkonk tchenachke 
 
 90 
 
 Guttasch tchapachki tchen kittapaehki 
 
 600,000 
 
 Nguttapachki 
 
 100 
 
 Nischasch tchapachki tchen kittapachki 
 
 700,000 
 
 Nguttapachki attach gutti 
 
 101 
 
 Chasch tchapachki tchen kittapachki 
 
 800,000 
 
 Nguttapachki attach tellen 
 
 110 
 
 Peschonk tchapachki tchen kittapachki 
 
 900,000 
 
 Nguttapachki attach tellen wak ngutti 
 
 111 
 
 We may either say 
 
 
 Nguttapachki tellen wak nischa 
 
 112 
 
 Tellen tchapachki tchen kittapachki, 
 
 
 Nguttapachki tellen wak nacha 
 
 113 
 
 ten hundred times one thousand 1,000.000 
 
 Ngnttapachki tellen wak newo 
 
 114 
 
 or 
 
 
 And so forth to 119 
 
 
 Ngutti kittapachki tchen, kittapachki, 
 
 
 Nguttapachki attach nischinachke 
 
 120 
 
 one thousand times one thousand 1,000.000 
 
 Nguttapachki attach nachenachke 
 
 130 
 
 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — Attach means beyond, above (Zeisberger's Vocab.). So that tel- 
 len attach ngutti means ten and one over, beyond, above, more. 
 
OF THE L.ENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [of nouns.] 
 
 4 
 
 45 
 
 Abfc.- 
 dred. 
 
 Kittan, a great river 
 Kittahican, the great ocean 
 
 -Kittapachki, from kitta, great, properly means the great hun- 
 
 , I Kittoaltewall, the great ships 
 
 I Kittanittowit, the Great Almighty God. 
 And so, on in many other instances. 
 
 Note. — Although few of the Indians are accustomed to calculate, so far 
 as we have seen, and in genera! they do not trouble themselves much about 
 it, because they have no use for it, yet their language has the means of 
 doing it as well as ours. Since the Europeans have been among them, and 
 particularly since the wars, they have got more into the use of it, the 
 armies having afforded them more frequent opportunities. The number 
 of times is thus expressed : 
 
 Ngutten, once 
 Nischen, twice 
 Nachen, 3 times 
 Newen, 4 times 
 Palenach tchen, 5 times 
 Guttasch tchen, 6 times 
 Nischasch tchen, 7 times 
 Chasch tchen, 8 times 
 Peschkonk tchen, 9 times 
 Tellen tchen, 10 times 
 
 Tellen tchen attach gutti, 11 times 
 Tellen tchen attach nischa, 12 times, &.C 
 Nichinachk tchen, 20 times 
 Nachenachk tchen, 30 times 
 Newenachk tchen, 40 times 
 Palenach tchenachk tchen, SO times 
 Guttasch tchenachk tchen, 60 times 
 Nischasch tchenachk tchen, 70 times 
 Chasch tchenachk tchen, 90 times 
 Ngutta pachki tchen, 100 times, &c. 
 
 Speaking of inanimate things, as towns, rivers, houses, &c. they say ; 
 
 Mawat, ngutti, one, only one 
 
 And in the Plural 
 Nischenol, 2 
 (Nischenoll uteneyall, wikwahemall, tiposall, 
 
 wachtschawall, two towns, houses, 'rivers, 
 
 mountains, &c.) 
 Nachenol, 3 
 Newenol, 4 
 Palanach tchennol, 5 
 Guttasch tchennol, 6 
 
 Nischasch tchennol, 7 
 Chasch tchennol, 8 
 Peschkonk tchennol, 9 
 Tellen tchennol, 10 
 Tellen tchennol attach gutti, 11 
 Tellen tchennol attach nischa, 12 
 Tellen tchennol attach nacha, 13 
 Nischinachk tchennol, 20 
 Nachenachk tchennol, 30 
 Palenachtchennachk tchennol, 50 
 Nguttapachki tchennol, 100 
 
 When men, animals, or other things are spoken of, which among the 
 Indians are considered as belonging to the animated class of beings. 
 they say : 
 
 Mauchsa, mayauchsu, one person, or a person, 
 or living, being 
 It is truly incorrect to say, 
 Ngutti lenno, a man, ngutti ochqueu, a woman. 
 
 In the Plural they say .- 
 
 Nischowak lennowak, ochquewak, amemensak, 
 wdallemansak, tipasak, &c. two men, wo- 
 men, children, beasts, fowls, &c &c. 
 
 Nachoak, 3 
 
 Neyuwak, 4 
 
 Palenach tchoak, 5 
 
 Guttasch tchoak, 6 
 
 Nischascb tchoak, 7 
 Chasch tchoak, 8 
 Peschkonk tchoak, 9 
 Tellen tchoak, 10 
 Tellen tchoak attach gutti, 11 
 Tellen tchoak attach nischa, 12 
 Tellen tchoak attach nacha, 13 
 Nischinachk tchoak, 20 
 Nachenachk tchoak,' 30 
 Ngutapachabwak, 100 
 Nisehapachawak, 200 ' 
 Palenach tehapachawak, 500 
 Tellen tehapachawak, 1000 
 
46 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [of nouns.] 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 Netami, the first, (animate) 
 Netamiechen, the first, (inanimate) 
 Tacquak, the second 
 
 INechit, the third 
 Palenachtchit, the fourth 
 Palenachtchegit, the fifth, &c. 
 
 In the Preterite. 
 
 Mauchsop, mayauchsop, there was one 
 Nischdpanik, there were two 
 Nachopanik, there were three 
 Newopanik, there were four 
 Palenach tchopanik, there were five 
 Tellen tchopanik, there were ten 
 Nischinachk tchopanik, there were twenty 
 
 Nachenachk tchopanik, there Were thirty 
 Ngutta pachxopanik, there were a hundred 
 Palenach tchapachxopanik, there were five hun- 
 dred 
 Tellen tchapachxopanik, there were a thousand 
 of them. 
 
 OF THE COMPUTATION OF TIME. 
 
 The days among the Indians are reckoned by nights. It is, however, 
 not improper to say : 
 
 Ngutti gischque, one day 
 Nischa gischquewi, two days 
 
 I Nacha gischquewi, three days, &c. 
 
 But the most proper and usual mode of computing nights, is as fol- 
 lows: 
 
 Nguttokuni, one night 
 Kuktokuni, only one night 
 Nischogunak, two nights 
 Nachogunak, three nights 
 Newogunak, four nights 
 
 Palenach tchogunak, five nights 
 Guttasch tchogunak, six nights 
 Tellen tchogunak, ten nights 
 Nischinachk tchogunak, twenty nights 
 Newinachk tchogunak, forty nights, &c. 
 
 In the Preterite. 
 
 The preterite is always connected with the plural, as below. You 
 cannot say in the singular nguttokunakat, one night ago, as you say in 
 the plural.. You must say welaquik, last night, or wulaque, yesterday. 
 
 But speaking of several nights, you say : 
 
 Nischokunakat, two nights ago 
 Nachokunakat, three nights ago 
 Newokunakat, four nights ago 
 Palenach tchokunakat, five nights ago 
 Tellen tchokunakat, ten nights ago 
 
 Mischinachk tchokunakat, twenty nights ago 
 Newinaschk tchokunakat, forty nights ago 
 Palenach tchonachk tchokunakat, fifty nights 
 ago. 
 
 The Indians reckon their months by moons, from one new or full moon 
 to another : 
 
 Ngutti gischuch, one month 
 Nischa gischuchak, two months 
 
 (Nacha gischuchak, three months 
 Tellen tchi gischuchak, ten months. 
 
 Their reckoning of the year is from one spring, summer, autumn, or 
 winter, to another. They have properly no beginning of the year, ex- 
 cept that they have learned from the Europeans to distinguish New 
 
OF THE LENNI T.ENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [or PRONOUNS.] 
 
 47 
 
 Year's Day. They reckon commonly from one seeding time to another, 
 from the time when the deer are red in the Spring and grey in the Au- 
 tumn, when the corn is ripe or cut down and laid up in heaps, &c. and 
 so back again. The interval between is one year : 
 
 Newinachk tendchi 
 
 Ngutti gachtin, one year 
 
 Nischa gachtin, two years 
 
 Nacha gachtin, three years, &c. 
 
 Nischinachk ntendchi gachtinami, I am twenty 
 
 years old 
 Gachtinamichump (preterite), I was twenty 
 
 years old 
 
 years old 
 Newinachk tendchi 
 
 forty years old 
 Newinachk tendchi 
 
 forty years old 
 Newinachk tendchi 
 
 forty years old. 
 
 gachtinamo, he is forty 
 gachtinamiyenk, we are 
 gachtinamiyek, you are 
 gachtinamoak, they are 
 
 NAMES OF THE MONTHS. 
 
 Anixi gischuch (Squirrel month), January 
 Tsquafli gischuch (Frog month), February 
 M'choamowi gischuch (Shad month), March 
 Quitauweuhewi gischuch (Spring month), 
 
 April 
 Tauwinipen (Beginning of summer), May 
 Kitschinipeu (Summer), June 
 
 Yugatamoewi gischuch, July 
 Sakauweuhewi gischuch (Deer month,) August 
 Kitschitachquoak (Autumn month), September 
 Pooxit (Month of vermin), October 
 Wini gischuch (Snow month), November 
 M'chakhocque ( Cold month, the month when 
 the cold makes the trees crack ), December. 
 
 Note by the Translator. — For the above explanation of the names of 
 the months, the Translator is partly indebted to the Author's text, and 
 partly to some notes of the late Professor Barton, which have supplied 
 what was wanting in the original, except the meaning of the name of the 
 month of July, which neither has explained. Loskiel calls it the month 
 when the Indian com is gathered. 
 
 There is little to be said about this part of speech, of which a view has 
 already been given under the head of nouns. Personal pronouns are 
 either separable or inseparable, but are much more frequently used in 
 the latter form. 
 
 The Separable Pronouns are : 
 
 Kiluna or niluna, we 
 Kiluwa, you 
 Nekamawa, they. 
 
 Ni, I 
 
 Ki, thou 
 
 Neka or nekama, he or she 
 
 The inseparable pronouns are in both numbers n' for the first person, 
 &' in the second, to' in the third. When two pronouns are employed 
 
48 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [of vebbs.] 
 
 in verbs, the last or the pronoun governed is expressed by an inflection, 
 as in k'dahoalohhumo, I love you, K'dahoalineen, thou lovest us, Wdaho- 
 alawak, thou lovest them, as will be seen more fully under the head of 
 conjugations. 
 
 The possessive pronoun is the same as the personal, separable and 
 inseparable, which is employed in a possessive sense. No ambiguity 
 results from this similarity ; the meaning is always understood from the 
 context or the form or inflexion of the word with which the pronoun is 
 combined. 
 
 The various combinations of these pronouns must be gathered from 
 their connection with the other parts of speech, and cannot all be given 
 under this head. Thus the personal pronoun combines itself with the 
 conjunction also : 
 
 Nepe, I also 
 kepe, thou also 
 
 Nepena or kepena, we also, (as the word is used 
 in the general or particular plural) 
 
 Kepewo, you also 
 Kepoak, they also. 
 
 Note by the Translator. — The particular plural refers to a certain 
 description of persons, as we Delawares, we who are here together ; the 
 other has a more general application, and shews that no discrimination 
 is intended. In verbs, n prefixed (from niluna) indicates the particular 
 and k (from kiluna) the general plural, in the first person. See Hecke- 
 welder's Corresp. in Histor. Trans, p. 429. The author is silent on this 
 subject. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The modes of expressing these by various forms and combinations 
 with other parts of speech are so numerous, that a few examples can only 
 be given : 
 
 Auwen, who ? 
 
 Keku, la, koen, what ? 
 
 Auweni, who is he ? 
 
 Auwenikj who are they ? 
 
 Won, this 
 
 Na, nanne, nail, nan, that 
 
 Wentschim na lenno ! call that man ! 
 
 Na icka ni pawit, he that stands there 
 
 Nil, nellnill, yuk, yullick, these 
 
 Nik, nikik, those 
 Wemi, all 
 
 Wemi auween, every man 
 Alende, some 
 Alendemiyenk, some of us 
 Alendemiyeek, some of you 
 Alendeyuwak, some of them 
 Mamayauchsiyenk, each of us 
 Mamay auchsiyeek, each of you, &c . 
 
 The remainder must be learned by practice. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 49 
 
 XXX.— 0t Tetfbs. 
 
 There is a great variety of verbs in this language. To exhibit all 
 their compound forms would be an endless task. Every part of speech 
 may be compounded with the verb in many ways, as will be seen in the 
 course of this work. 
 
 The verbs to have and to be do not exist in he Delaware language, 
 either as auxiliaries, or in the abstract substantive sense which they pre- 
 sent to an European mind. The verb to have always conveys the idea 
 of possession, and to be that of a particular situation of the body or mind, 
 and they may be combined like other verbs with other accessary ideas. 
 Thus the verb to have or possess is combined with the substantive, or the 
 thing possessed, as follows : 
 
 N'damochol, I have a canoe 
 Wtamochol*, he has a canoe 
 Matta n'damocholiwi, I have no canoe 
 N'temahican, I have an axe 
 Nowikin, I have a house 
 Wiku, he has a house 
 
 Wikuwek, they have a house 
 N'dallemansin, I have cattle 
 Wdallemansu, he has cattle 
 N'pachksikan, I have a knife 
 N'peyakhikan, I have a gun. 
 
 The idea conveyed by the substantive verb to be is expressed by various 
 combinations with' other parts of speech, as for instance : 
 
 With the Substantive. 
 
 Ni n'damochol, it is my canoe 
 Ki k'damochol, it is thy canoe 
 Nekama w'damochol, it is his or her canoe 
 Kiluna n'damocholena, it is our canoe 
 Kiluwa n'damocholuwa, it is your canoe 
 
 Nekamawa w'damocho wa wall, it is their canoe 
 
 Ni n'dalloquepi, if is my hat 
 
 Ki k'dalloquepi, it is thy hat 
 
 Nekama w'dalloquepi, it is his or her hat 
 
 Ni n'dacquiwan, it is my blanket. 
 
 Ewenikia, who I am 
 Ewenikian, who thou art 
 E wenikit , who he is 
 
 With the Pronoun. 
 Auwen, who. 
 
 Plural. 
 Ewenikiyenk, who we are 
 
 Ewenikiyek, who you are 
 Ewenikichtit, who they are. 
 
 Alendemiyenk, some of us 
 Alendemiyek, some of you 
 
 Alende, some. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 I Alendemowak or alendemichtit, some of them. 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — The apostrophe between the inseparable pronoun and the noun or 
 verb indicates a sheva or mute vowel. Eliot, in his Massachusetts Grammar, indicates it by the 
 English short u .- he would write, for instance, nuttappin for n'dappin. This apostrophe is some- 
 times omitted in the course of this grammar, but is always to be understood. 
 
50 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [of verbs.] 
 
 The idea of the verb to be is also combined with adjectives and 
 adverbs, as will be seen under the heads of " adjective and adverbial 
 verbs." 
 
 OF THE CONJUGATIONS. 
 There are eight conjugations. 
 
 The first ends in in, as 
 
 Achpin, to be there, in a particular place | Mikemossin, to work. 
 
 The second ends in a, (Infinitive in an,) as 
 
 N'da, I am going | Paan, to come. 
 
 The third ends in elendam, and indicates a disposition of the mind, as 
 
 Schiwelendam, to be sorry | Wulelendam, to be glad. 
 
 The fourth ends in men, as 
 
 N'gattamen, I request | N'pendainen, I hear. 
 
 The fifth ends in an, as 
 
 Ahoalan, to love. 
 
 The sixth ends in c or we (infinitive en), as 
 
 N'dellowe, I say | Infin. Luen, to say. 
 
 The seventh ends in in. It has no simple active or passive voice, and 
 is only conjugated through the personal forms or transitions, as 
 
 Mil tin, to give. 
 
 The eighth ends in ton — has the simple active, but not the passive 
 form, and has the personal indicative and subjunctive transitions, as 
 Peton, to bring | N'peton, I bring. 
 
 The same inseparable pronouns are used with the verbs as with the 
 substantives. The letters which indicate the pronoun, and are prefixed 
 to the verb, are n, k, and w or o. They must be pronounced, with a 
 short interval, when followed by a consonant. 
 
OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 51 
 
 [of verbs.] 
 
 jFtrst ©onjusattow. 
 
 No. I. 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Achpin, to be there, in a particular place. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 — b jlar. . Plural* 
 
 Epit*, he who is there, being there | Epitschik, those being there. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N'dappin,I am there (Lat adsum) 
 K'dappin, thou art there 
 Wdappin or achpin, he is there 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'dappineen or n'dappihheno, we are theref 
 K'dappihhi mo, you are there 
 W'dappinewoj ( they are there. 
 
 Note. — The plural is formed by suffixes as in the substantives, and the 
 prefixes are preserved. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'dappineep or n'dappihump, I was there 
 
 K'dappineep or k'dappihump, thou wert there 
 W'dappineep or achpop, he was there 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dappihhenap, vge were there 
 K'dappihimoap, ye were there 
 Achpopannik, they were there. 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — Epit is used in the sense of the preposition at. Philadelphia epit, 
 at Philadelphia, or being at Philadelphia. — Heckew. Corresp. p. 425. 
 
 t JVote trfthe Translator.— Tins is the particular plur al above mentioned, and is restricted 
 ' to persons who are specially spoken of; when a more general idea is meant to be conveyed, 
 another form is made use of, and the inseparable pronoun k is prefixed instead of the pro- 
 noun n . Thus n'penameen, we see, and n'pendanieen, we hear, means, we who are here assembled 
 see or hear ; but if the plural is used in a general sense, it should be k'penameen, k'pendameen. 
 See Heckew. Corresp. in 1 Hist. Trans. 428. The author makes no mention in this Grammar 
 of these two plurals, which is, however, a remarkable peculiarity in the Indian languages. As has 
 been observed in the preface, Mr Zeisberger did not write for Philologists and has left many curi- 
 ous facts respecting the forms of this language entirely unnoticed, and to be acquired by practice. 
 Those who wish for more information on these interesting subjects are referred to the above cited 
 correspondence of Mr Heckewelder, where they will find enough to satisfy their curiosity. 
 
 The reader will also observe that the author gives two different forms n'dappineen m,n'.dappi- 
 henno, to express the words, we are there, and he does the same in many places throughout these 
 conjugations. This Mr Heckewelder said, was in order to shew the inflections of the Delaware 
 verbs in the Unami and the Minsi dialects, and he promised to point out to the Translator, which 
 belonged to the one and which to the other. But he died before he could fulfil his promise. 
 
 13 
 
52 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 Future. 
 
 The future is characterized by tsch; it is to be observed that when the 
 verb is preceded by an adverb, preposition, or inseparable pronoun, it is 
 frequently added to it. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Singular. 
 Ikatsch n'dappin, I shall or will be there 
 Kepe sch k'dappin, thou shalt or wilt be there 
 Nekamatsch w'dappin, he shall or will be there 
 
 Plural. 
 Kepenatsch n'dappineen.weshall orwiWbe there 
 Witschitsch k'dappihhimo, ye shall or will be 
 
 there 
 Nekamawaktsch w'dappinewo, they shall or will 
 
 be there. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Achpil, be or stay thou there 
 
 Achpitetsch, let him or he shall or must be or 
 
 stay there 
 Achpitam, do thou let us be or stay there 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Aclipik.be or stay ye there 
 
 Achpititetsch, let them or they shall or must be 
 
 or stay there 
 Achpitamook, do ye let us be or stay there. 
 
 Note by the Translator. — There is such a compound mixture of per- 
 sons and numbers in this mood, that it is impossible to designate either 
 by marginal annotations. It is not one of the least remarkable particu- 
 larities of this singular language. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Singular. ■ Plural. 
 
 Achpiya, when or if I am there I Achpiyenke, when or if we are there 
 
 Achpiyane, when or if thou art there I Achpiyeque, when or if ye are there 
 
 Achpite, when or if he is there | Achpichtite, when or if they are there. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Achpiyakup, as or when I was there 
 Achpiyanup,' as or when thou wast there 
 Achpitup, as or when he was there 
 
 Achpiatpanne, if I had been there 
 Achpianpanne, if thou hadst been there 
 Achpitpanne, if he had been there 
 
 Plural. 
 Achpiyenkup, as or when we were* there 
 Achpiyekup, as or when ye were there 
 Achpichtitup, as or when they were' there. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 Achpiyenkpanne, if we had been there 
 Achpiyekpanne, if ye had been there 
 Achpichtitpanne, if they had been there. 
 
 Note. — The subjunctive has only a pluperfect in the active and passive 
 voices, but not otherwise. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 33 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Achpiyaktsch, if or when I am or shall be there 
 Achpiyanetsch, if or when thou art or shalt be 
 
 there 
 Achpitetsch, if or when he is or shall be there 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Achpiyenketsch, if or when we are or shall be 
 
 >• i there 
 Achpiyequetsch, if. or when ye are or shall be 
 
 ■ there 
 Achpichtitetsch, if or when they are or shall be 
 there. 
 
 Another form of this verb which may be called Adverbial. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Epia, where I am 
 Epian, where thou art 
 Epit, where he is 
 
 Singular. 
 Epiakup, where I was 
 Epiyannup, where thou wast 
 Epitup, where he was 
 
 Tatschta epia, where I shall be 
 Tatschta epian, where thou shalt be 
 Tatschta epit, where he shall be 
 
 Plural. 
 Epiyenk, where we are 
 Epiyeek, where ye are 
 Epichtit, where they are. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Epiyenkup, where we were 
 Epiyekup, where ye were 
 Epichtitup, where they were. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 I Tatschta epiyenk, where we shall be 
 I Tatschta epiyeek, where ye shall be 
 I Tatschta epichtit, where they shall be. 
 
 NEGATIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 (Not given.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta n'dappiwi, I am not there 
 Matta k'dappiwi, thou art not there 
 Matta w'dappiwi, he is not there 
 
 Matta n'dappiwip, I was not there 
 Matta k'dappiwip, thou wast not there 
 Matta w'dappiwip, he was not there 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Matta n'dappi wuneen, we are not there 
 Matta k'dappiwihhimo, ye are not there 
 Matta achpiwiwak, they are not there. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Matta n'dappiwunenap, we were not there 
 Matta k'dappiwihhimoap, ye were not there 
 Matta achpiwipannik, they were not there. 
 
54 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 Future. 
 
 Matta n'dappiwitsch, I shall or will not be there 
 Matta k'dappiwitsch, thou shalt or wilt not be 
 
 there 
 Matta w'dappiwitsch, he shall or will not be 
 
 there 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta n'dappiwuneentsch, we shall or will not 
 
 be there 
 Matta k'dappiwihhimotsch, ye shall or will not 
 
 be there 
 Matta achpiwiwaktsch, they shall or will not be 
 
 there. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta achpiwake, when or if I am not there 
 Matta achpiwonne, when or if thou art not there 
 Matta achpique, when or if he is not there 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Matta achpiwenke, when or if we are not there 
 
 Matta achpiweque, when or if ye are not there 
 
 Matta achpichtique, when or if they are not 
 
 there. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Matta achpiwakup, when or if I was not there 
 Matta achpiwonnup, when or if thou wast not 
 
 there 
 Matta achpikup, when or if he was not there 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta achpiwenkup, when or if we were not 
 
 there 
 Matta achpiwekup, when or if ye were not there 
 Matta achpichtitup, when or if they were not 
 
 there. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Matta achpiwakpanne, if I had not been there 
 Matta achsiwonpanne, if thou hadst not been 
 
 there 
 Matta achpikpanne, if he had not been there 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Matta achpiwenkpanne, if we had not been there 
 Matta achpiwekpanne, if ye had not been there 
 Matta achpichtikpanne, if they had not been 
 there. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta achpiwaktsch*, when or if I shall not be 
 
 there 
 Matta achpiwonne tsch, when or if thou shalt not 
 
 be there 
 Matta achpiquetsch, when or if he shall not be 
 
 there 
 
 Plural. 
 Mattatsch achpiwenque, when or if we shall 
 
 not be there 
 Mattatsch achpiweke, when or if ye shall not 
 
 be there 
 Mattatsch achpichtique, when or if they shall 
 
 not be there. 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — It will be observed that tsch, the sign of the future, is here affixed 
 in the singular to the adverb, and in the plural the verb is inflected Dy it. It will be found, in the 
 preceding page, combined in both numbers with the adverb ta, which signifies, where. I have 
 been informed by Mr Heckewelder, that either form may be adopted, whether in the singular or 
 plural, and that the ear is the best guide in such cases. So the negative may be expressed by 
 atta or matta, as the ear directs. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 55 
 
 No. II. 
 
 Lissiir, to be or do so, to be so situated, disposed, or acting. 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Present. I Preterite. 
 
 Lissin, to be or do so 
 
 I Lissineep, to have been, or done so 
 
 Future. 
 
 Lissinitsch, to be or to do so at a future time. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'dellsin, I am or do so 
 K'dellsin, thou art or dost so 
 W'dellsin, he is or does so 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N'dellsineep, I was or did so 
 K'dellsineep, thou wert or didst so 
 Wdellsineep, he was or did so 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'dellsineen, we are or do so 
 K'dellsihhimo, ye are or do so 
 Wdellsinewo, they are or do so*. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'dellsihhenap, we were or did so 
 K'dellsihhimoap, ye were or did so 
 Wdellsinewoap, they were or did so. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Nantsch n'dellsin, I shall or will be or do so 
 Nantsch k'dellsin, thou shalt or wilt be or do so 
 Nantsch w'dellsin, he shall or will be or do so 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nantsch n'dellsineen, we shall or will be or do b° 
 Nantsch k'dellsihhimo, ye shall or will be or 
 
 do so 
 Nantsch w'dellsinewo, they shall or will be or 
 
 do so. 
 
 Another form of the Future. 
 
 N'dellsintchi, I shall be or do so 
 K'dellsintchi , thou shalt be or do so 
 W'dellsintchi, he shall be or do so 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'dellsineentsch, we shall be or do so 
 K'dellsinewotsch, ye shall be or do so 
 W'dellsinewotsch, they shall be or do so. 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — The verbs ending in si and in are conjugated according to this rule, 
 and have generally, though not always, w prefixed and u or o suffixed to the third person of the 
 singular. Examples : achjiin, to be there — w'dappin or achpo he is there ; palsin to be sick — 
 palm, he is sick; mikemossin, to work — mikemossu, he works, &c. &c. 
 
 14 
 
56 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Lissil, be or do thou so 
 
 Singular with Plural. 
 Lissitam, do thou let us be or do so 
 
 Singular. 
 Lissititsch, be or do he so ; he shall be or do so 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Lissik, be or do ye so 
 
 Double Plural. 
 Lissitamook, do you let us be or do so 
 Plural. 
 
 Lissichtititsch, let them be or do so ; they shall 
 be or do so. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Lissiye, if I am or do so 
 Lissiyanne, if thou art or doest so 
 Lissite, if he is or does so 
 
 Plural. 
 Lissiyenke, if we are or do so 
 Lissiyeque, if ye are or do so 
 Lissichtite, if they are or do so. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 -Lissiyakup, if I was or did so 
 Lissiyannup, if thou wert or didst so 
 Lissitup, if he was or did so 
 
 Plural. 
 Lissiyenkup, if we were or did so 
 Lissiyekup, if ye were or did so 
 Lissichtitup, if they were or did so. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Lissiakpanne, if I had been or done so 
 Lissiy a npanne, if thou hadst been or done so 
 Lissitpanne, if he had been or done so 
 
 Plural. 
 Lissiyenkpanne, if we had been or done so 
 Lissiyekpanne, if ye had been or done so 
 Lissichtitpanne, if they had been or done so. 
 
 Singular. 
 Lissiyaktsch, I shall be or do so 
 Lissiyantsch, if thou shalt be or do so 
 Lissitsch, if he shall be or do so 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 Lissiy enkelsch, if we shall be or do so 
 Lissiyeketsch, if ye shall be or do so 
 Lissichtitetsch, if they shall be or do so. 
 
 Singular. 
 Elsiya, as I am or do 
 Elsiyan, as thou art or dost 
 Elsit, as he is or does 
 
 Another form of the same verb. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 Elsiyenk, as we are or do 
 Elsiyek, as ye are or do 
 Elsichtit, as they are or do. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Elsiyakup, as I was or did 
 Elsiyanup, as thou wert or didst 
 Elsitup, as he was or did 
 
 Plural. 
 Elsiyenkup, as we were or did 
 Elsiyekup, as ye were or did 
 Elsichtitup, as they were or did. 
 
OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 57 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Tatsch* elsiya, as I shall or will be or do 
 Tatsch elsiyan, as thou shalt or wilt be or do 
 Tatsch elsit, as he shall or will be or do 
 
 Plural. 
 Tatsch elsiyenk, as we shall or will be or do 
 Tatsch elsiyeek, as ye shall or will be" or do 
 Tatsch elsich tit, as they shall or will be or do. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Elsiyake, if I am or do so 
 Elsiyanne, if thou art or dost so 
 Elsite, if he is or does so 
 
 Singular. 
 Elsiyakup, if I was or did so 
 Elsiyanmip, if thou wert or didst so 
 Elsitup, if he was or did so 
 
 Singular. 
 Elsiyakpanne, if I had been or done so 
 Elsiyanpanne, if thou hadst been or done so 
 Elsitpanne, if he had been or done so 
 
 Plural. 
 Elsiyenke, if we are or do so 
 Elsiyeque, if ye are or do so 
 Elsichtite, if they are or do so. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Elsiyenkup, if we were or did so 
 Elsiyeekup, if ye were or did so 
 Elsichtitup, if they were or did so. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 Elsiyenkpanne, if we had been or done so 
 Elsiyekpanne, if ye had been or done so 
 Elsich titpanne, if they had been or done so. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Elsiyatsch, if I shall be or do so 
 Elsiyannetsch, if thou shalt be or do so 
 Elsitetsch, if he shall be or do so 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Elsiyenketsch, if we shall be or do so 
 Elsiyequetsch, if ye shall or will do so 
 Elsichtitetsch, if they shall or will do so. 
 
 Impersonal Forms. 
 
 Elek, as it is 
 Elekup, as it was 
 Tatsch elek, as it will be 
 Leu, it is so ; it is true 
 
 Leep, it was so 
 
 Atta ne lewi , it is not so 
 
 Atta ne lewip, it was not so., 
 
 NEGATIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Lissiwi, not to be or do so. 
 
 * Note by the Translator.— -This word tatsch is compounded of ta, which here is an adverb 
 of similitude, and of tsch, the usual indication of the future, which Is sometimes affixed to the ad- 
 verb and sometimes to the verb, as has before been observed. 
 
58 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I Plural. 
 
 Malta n'dellsiwuneen, we are not or do not so 
 Matta k'dellsiwunewo, ye are not or do not so 
 I Matta w'dellsiwiwak, they are not or do not so. 
 
 Matta n'dellsiwi, I am not or do not so 
 Matta k'dellsiwi, thou art not or dost not so 
 Matta w'dellsiwi, he is not or does not so 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta n'dellsiwip, I was not or did not so 
 Matta k'dellsiwip, thou wert not or didst not so 
 Matta w'dellsiwip, he was not or did not so 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta n'dellsiwuneenalflip, we were not or did 
 
 not so 
 Matta k'dellsiwunewakup, ye were not or did 
 
 not so 
 Matta w'dellsiwipannik, they were not or did 
 
 not so. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Mattatsch n'dellsiwi, I shall or will not be or 
 
 do so 
 Mattatsch k'dellsiwi, thou shalt or wilt not be 
 
 or do so 
 Mattatsch w'dellsiwi, he shall or will not be or 
 
 do so 
 
 Plural. 
 
 As in the Present tense, with mattatsch pre- 
 fixed. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Katschi lissiham, do not thou do so 
 
 Plural. 
 Katschi lissihek, do not ye do so. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Matta n'lissiwake, if or when I am or do not so 
 Matta lissiwonne, if or when thou art or dost 
 
 not so 
 Matta lissique, if or when he is or does not so 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta lissiwenke, if or when we are or do not 
 
 so 
 Matta lissiweque, if or when ye are or do not 
 
 so 
 Matta lissichtique, if or when they are or do 
 
 not so. 
 
 Preterite 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta n'lissiwakup, if or when I was or did not 
 
 so 
 Matta lissiwonnup, if or when thou wert or 
 
 didst not so 
 Matta lissitup, if or when he was or did not so 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta lissiwenkup, if or when we were or did 
 
 not so 
 Matta lissiwekup, if or when ye were or did 
 
 not so 
 Matta lissich ti tup, if or when ' they were or did 
 
 not so. 
 
 The future is formed from the present tense, by affixing tsch to the 
 adverb matta, as mattatsch rilissiwake, &c. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 59 
 
 No. III. 
 
 Mikemossin, to work. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Mikemossin, to work 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 I Preterite. 
 
 I Mikemossinep, to have worked. 
 
 Present 
 
 Mikemossit, working 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Mikemossitschik, having worked 
 
 Future. 
 
 Mikemossintsch, being to work, having work to do. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'mikemossi, I work 
 K'mikemossi, thou workest 
 Mikemossu, he works - 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N'mikemossihump, I worked 
 K'mikemossihump, thou workedst 
 Mikemossop, he worked 
 
 Singular. 
 N'mikemossitsch, I shall or will work 
 K'mikemossitsch, thou shalt or wilt work 
 Mikemossutsch, he shall or will work 
 
 Plural. 
 Mikemossihhena*, we work 
 K'mikemossihhimo, ye work 
 Mikemossuwak, they work. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Mikemossihhenap, we worked 
 K'mikemossihhimoap, ye worked 
 Mikemossopannik, they worked. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 Mikemossihhenatsch, we shall or will work 
 K'mikemossihhimotsch, ye shall or will work 
 Mikemossuwatsch, they shall or will work. 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — This is a contraction of mikemossihhummena, and is often used 
 for the sake of euphony. The double A has not a guttural sound ; it merely shews that the prece- 
 ding vowel is short. 
 
 15 
 
60 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [.FIRST CONJUGATION.] 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Mikemossil, work thou 
 Mikemossitetsch, let him work, he shall work 
 
 Singular with Plural. 
 Mikemossitam, do thou let us work 
 
 Plural. 
 Mikemossik, work ye 
 
 Mikemossichtitetsch, let them work, they shall 
 work 
 
 Double Plural. 
 Mikemossitamoak, do ye let us work. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Mikemossiya, when or if I work 
 K'mikemossiyan or yanne, when or if thou work 
 
 est 
 Mikemossit, when or if he works 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 Mikemossiyenk, when or if we work 
 Mikemossiyek, when or if ye work 
 Mikemossichtit, when or if they work. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Mikemossiyakup, when or if I worked 
 Mik em ossiyannup, when or if thou workedst 
 Mikemossitup, when or if he worked 
 
 Plural. 
 Mikemossiyenkup, when or if we worked 
 Mikemossiyekup, when or if ye worked 
 Mikemossichtitup, when or if they worked. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 Mikemossiyakpanne, when or if I had worked 
 Mikemossiyanpanne, when or if thou hadst 
 
 worked 
 Mikemossitpannc, when or if he had worked 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Mikemossiyenkpanne, when or if we had worked 
 
 Mikemossiyekpanne, when or if ye had worked 
 
 Mikemossichtitpanne, when or if they had 
 
 worked. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Mikemossiyatsch, when or if I shall work 
 Mikemossiyanetsch, when or if thou shalt work 
 Mikemossitetsch, when or if he shall work 
 
 Plural. 
 Mikemossiyenketsch, when or if we shall work 
 Mikemossiyequetsch, when or if ye shall work 
 Mikemossichtitsch, when or if they shall work. 
 
 NEGATIVE FORM. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Atta n'mikemossiwi, I do not work 
 Atta k'tnikemossiwi, thou dost not work 
 Attta mikemossuwi,he does not work 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta n'mikemossuwune or mikemossuwuneen, 
 
 we have not worked 
 Atta k'mikemossihhimowi, ye have not worked 
 Atta mikemossiwiwak, they have not worked. 
 
OF THE LENNI IiBNAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 61 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta n'mikiraossiwip, I did not work or have not 
 
 worked 
 Atta k'mikemossiwi, thou didst not work or 
 
 hast not worked 
 Atta mikemossuwik, he did not work or has not 
 
 worked 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta n'mikemossiwunap, we did not work or 
 
 have not worked 
 Atta k'mikemossiwihhimoap, ye did not work 
 
 or have not worked 
 Atta mikemossiwipannik, they did work or have 
 
 not worked. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta n'mikemossiwitsch, I shall not work 
 Atta k'mikemossiwitsch, thou shalt not work 
 Atta mikemossuwitsch, lie shall not work 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Atta mikemossiwunatsch, we shall not work 
 Atta k'mikemossiwihhimatsch, ye shall not work 
 Atta mikemossuwiwaktsch, they shall not work. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Katschi mikemossihon, work not thou 
 
 Plural. 
 Katschi mikemossihek, work ye not. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta mikemossiwa, when or if I do not work 
 Matta mikemossiwonne, when or if thou dost 
 
 not work 
 Matta mikemossique, when or if he does not 
 
 work 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta mikemossiwenk, when or if we do not 
 
 work 
 Matta mikemossiwek, when or if ye do not work 
 Matta mikemossichtik, when or if they do not 
 
 work. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Matta mikemossiwakup, when or if I did not 
 
 work 
 Matta mikemossiwonnup, when or if thou didst 
 
 not work 
 Matta mikemossikup, when or if he did not work 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta mikemossiwenkup, when or if we did not 
 
 work 
 Matta mikemossiwekup, when or if ye did not 
 
 work 
 Matta mikemossichtitup, when or if they did not 
 
 work. 
 
 Future, 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta mikemossiwatsch, when or if I shall not 
 
 work 
 Atta roikemossiwonnetsch, when or if thou shalt 
 
 not work 
 Atta mikemossiketsch, when or if he shall not 
 
 work 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta mikemossiwenketsch, when or if we shall 
 
 not work 
 Atta mikemossi weketsch, when or if ye shall not 
 
 work 
 Atta mikemossichtiktsch, when or if they shall 
 
 not work. 
 
S9 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 Present. 
 
 Mitzin, to eat 
 
 Singular. 
 Mitzit, he who is eating there 
 
 N'mitzi, I eat 
 K'mitzi, thou eatest 
 Mitzu, he eats 
 
 Singular. 
 
 No. IV. 
 
 Mitzin, to eat. 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Mitzineep or mitzihump, to have eaten. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Plural. 
 Mitzichtit, they who are eating there. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'mitzineen or mitzihhenna, we eat 
 K'mitzihhimo, ye eat 
 Mitzowak, they eat. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'mitzineep or n'mitzihump, I have eaten 
 K'mitzineep or k' mitzihump, thou hast eaten 
 Mitzoop, he has eaten 
 
 Plural. 
 N'ruitzihhenakup, we have eaten 
 K'mitzihhimoakup, ye have eaten 
 Mitzopannik, they have eaten. 
 
 Future. 
 (Not given.) 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Mitzil, eat thou 
 Mitzitetsch, let him eat 
 
 Singular with Plural. 
 Mitzitam , do thou let us eat 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Mitzik, eat ye 
 Mitzichtitetsch, let them eat 
 
 Double Plural. 
 Mitzitamoak, do you let us eat. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 N'mitzianne, when or if i eat 
 K'mitzianne, when or if thou eatest 
 Mitzite, when or if he eats 
 
 Plural. 
 Mitziyenke, when or if we eat 
 Mitziyeque, when or if ye eat 
 Mitzichtite, when or if they eat. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 63 
 
 N'mitziyannup , when or if I did eat or have eaten 
 E'mitziyannup, when or if thou didst eat or hast 
 
 eaten 
 Mitzite, when or if he did eat or has eaten 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plwal. 
 N'mitziyenkup, when or if we did eat or have 
 
 eaten 
 Mitziyekup, when or if ye did eat or have eaten 
 Mitzichtitup, when or if they did eat or have 
 
 eaten. 
 
 The Future 
 Is conjugated like the.present tense, n'mitziyanetsch, when or if I shall 
 have eaten, &c. 
 
 The preterite is often joined to or preceded by the adverb metschi 
 (already), as for instance, metschi mitziyanne, when or if I shall have 
 eaten, metschi mitzite, when or if he shall have eaten. 
 
 No. V. 
 
 Pommissin, to go, to walk. 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Present. i Preterite. 
 
 Pommissin, to go | Pommissineep, to have gone. 
 
 Singular. 
 Pemsit, one who is going 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Plural. 
 Pemsitschik, those who are going, (euntes, am- 
 bulantes) 
 
 N'pomsi, I go 
 K'pomsi, thou goest 
 Pomsu, he goes 
 
 N'pomsineep, I went 
 K'pomsineep, thou didst go 
 Pommissop, he went 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'pommissineen, we go 
 Pomsihhimo, ye go 
 Pommissowak, they go. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 (Plural. 
 Pommissihhenakup, we went 
 Pommissihhimoakup, ye went 
 Pommissopannik, they went. 
 
 16 
 
64 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 The Future 
 Is conjugated like the present, with tsch suffixed : 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Ifpomsitsch N'pommisslneentsch 
 
 K'pomsitch Pomraissihhimotsch or pomsihhimotsch 
 
 Pommissutsch or pomsutch 
 
 Pommissowaktsch. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pommissil, got thou 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Pommissik, go ye, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Pommlssiyane, when or if I go 
 K'pommissiyane, when or if thou goest 
 Pommissi te, when or if he goes 
 
 Plural. 
 Pommissiyenke,when or if we go 
 Pommissiyeque, when or if ye go 
 Pommissichtitc, when or if they go. 
 
 Preterite.. 
 
 Singular. 
 Pommissiyannup, when or if I went 
 K'pommissiyannup, when or if thou didst go 
 Pommissitup, when or if he went 
 
 Plural. 
 Pommissiyenkup, when or if we went 
 PoniDHssiyekup, when or if ye went 
 Pommissichtitup, when or if they went. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Pommissiyanetsch, when or if I shall go 
 K'pommissiyanetsch, when or if thou shalt go 
 Pommissitetsch, when or if he shall go 
 
 Plural. 
 Ppmmissiyenketsch, when or if we shall go 
 Pommissiyequetsch, when or if ye shall go 
 Pommissichtitetsch, when or if they shall go. 
 
 JVote.-WThis verb is not used in the sense of " going to or away from a 
 particular place." In this case aan, to go, and allumsin, to go away, are 
 used. 
 
 No. VI. 
 
 GAtrwra, to sleep. 
 
 POSITIVE FORM, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Present. j Preterite. 
 
 Gauwin, to sleep I Gauwineep, to have slept 
 
OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 m 
 
 Future. 
 
 Gauwintschi, to be about to sleep (dormiturus esse). 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Gewi, he who sleeps, (dormiens) 
 
 Gewitup, he or one who has slept 
 
 Plural. 
 Gewitschik, they who sleep, (dormientes) 
 
 Preterite. ' 
 
 I Plural. 
 
 Ge witpannik, they who have slept. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 JPgauwi, I sleep 
 K'gauwi, thou sleepest 
 Gauwiu, he sleeps 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N'gauwineep, I slept 
 K'gauwineep, thou didst sleep 
 Gauwip, he slept 
 
 Singular. 
 N'gauwintschi, I shall or will sleep 
 K'gauwintschi, thou shalt or wilt sleep 
 Gauwiuchtsch, he shall or will sleep 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Gauwineen, we sleep 
 Gau wihhimo, ye sleep 
 Gauwiwak, they sleep. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Gauwihhenakup, we slept 
 Gauwihhiinoakup, ye slept 
 Gauwipannik, they slept. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 Gauwihhenatsch, we shall or will sleep 
 Gauwihhimotsch, ye shall or will sleep 
 Gauwiwaktsch, they sfiallflr will sleep. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Gauwil, sleep thou 
 
 Gauwiwetsch, let him or he shall sleep 
 
 Singular with Plural. 
 
 Gauwitam, do thou let us sleep 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Gauwik, sleep ye 
 Gauwichtitetsch, they shall sleep 
 
 Double Phiral. 
 
 Gauwitamook, do ye Jet. us sleep. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 (Not given.) 
 
 Note. — Gauwoheen, to lie down to sleep. 
 
66 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [riRST CONJUGATION.] 
 
 No. VII. 
 
 Pommauchsiw, to live. 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pommauchsin, to live 
 Pommauchsineep, to have lived 
 
 I Pommauchsintsch, vieturus esse. The idea 
 ; cannot be expressed in English. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Pemauchsit, living 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pemauchsitpannik, he who lived 
 
 Future. 
 
 Pemauchsitschick, he who shall live. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pommauchsi, I live 
 K'pommauchsi, thou livest 
 PommauchsUjhe liveth 
 
 Singular. 
 
 JJ'pommauchsineep, I lived 
 K'pommauchsineep, thou livedst 
 Pommauchsop, he lived 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pomnftuchsitsch, I shall live 
 K'pommauchsitsch, thou shalt live 
 Pommauchsutsch, he shall live 
 
 Plural. 
 N'pommauchsihummena, we live 
 K'pommauchsihhimo, ye live 
 Pommauchsowak, they live. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'pommauchsihummenakup, we lived 
 K'pommauchsik, ye lived 
 Pommauchsopannik, they lived. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'pommauchsihummenatsch, we shall live 
 K'pommauchsihhimotsch, ye shall live 
 Pommauchso waktsch, they shall live 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Pommauchsil, live thou 
 
 Future Singular. 
 Potwiiauchsitetseh, he shall live 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Pommauchsik, live ye 
 
 Future Plural.' 
 Pommauchsichtitetsch, they shall live. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 67 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 N'pommauchsiyanne, if or when I live 
 K'pommauchsi yanne, if or when thou livest 
 Poimnauchsite, if or when he lives 
 
 Plural. 
 Pommauchsiyenke, if or when we live 
 Pomrnauchsiyeque, if or when ye live 
 Pommauchsichtite, if or when they live. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pommauchsiyannup, if or when I have lived 
 K'pommauchsiyannup, if or when thou hast lived 
 Pommauchsitup, if or when he has lived 
 
 Plural. 
 Pommauchsiyenkup, if or when we have lived 
 Pommauchsiyekup, if or when ye have lived 
 Pommauchsichtitup, if or when they have lived 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pommauchsiyanpanne, if or when I had lived 
 K'pommauchsiyanpanne, if or when thou hadst 
 
 lived 
 Pommauchsitpanne, if or when he had lived 
 
 Plural. 
 Pommauchsiyenkpanne, if or when we had 
 
 lived 
 Pommauchsiyekpanne, if or when ye had lived 
 Pommauchsichtitpanne, if or when they had 
 
 lived. 
 
 The Future 
 
 Is like the present with only tsch suffixed : 
 netsch, k'pommauchsiyannetsch, &c. 
 
 thus n'pommauchsiyan- 
 
 JVEGATIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Matta n'pommauchsiwi, I do not live 
 Matta k'pommauchsi wi, thou dost not live 
 Matta pommauchsiwi, he does not live 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta n'pommauchsiwip, I have not lived 
 Matta k'pommauchsiwip, thou hast not lived 
 Matta pommauchsi wip, he has not lived 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta n'pommauchsiwuneen or n'pommauchsi- 
 
 wenk, we do not live 
 Matta k'pommauchsi wunevo or k'pommauchsi- 
 
 week, ye do not live 
 Matta pommauchsiwiwak, they do not live. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta n'ppmmauchsiwenkup, we have not lived 
 Matta k'pommauchsiwekup, ye have not lived 
 
 Matta pommauchsi wipannik, they have not lived. 
 
 17 
 
68 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 The Future 
 Is like the present with tsch suffixed. * 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta n'pommauchsiwonne, if I do not live 
 Matta k'pommauchsiwonne, if thou dost not live 
 Matta pommauchsique, if he does not live 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta pommauchsiwenke, if we do not live 
 Matta pommauchsiweque, if ye do not live 
 Matta pommauchsichtique, if they do not live. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 ar. ; Plural. 
 
 Matta n'pommauchsiwonnup, if or when I did J Matta pommauchsi wenkup, if or when we did 
 
 not live not live 
 
 Matta k'pommauchsiwonnup, if or when thou Matta pommauchsiwekup, if or when ye did not 
 
 didst not live live 
 
 Matta pommauchsitup, if or when he did not. Matta pommauchsichtitup, if or when they did 
 
 live I not live. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta n'pommauchsiwipanne, if or when I had 
 
 not lived 
 Matta k'pommauchsiwonpanne, if or when thou 
 
 hadst not lived 
 Matta pommauchsiwipanne, if or when he had 
 
 not lived 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta pommauchsiwenkpanne, if or when we 
 
 had not lived 
 Matta pommauchsiwekpanne, if or when ye had 
 
 not lived 
 Matta pommauchsuwiwakpanne, if or when they 
 
 had not lived. 
 
 The Future 
 Is formed from the present, as is said above, by adding tsch. 
 
 CAUSATIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD 
 
 Pommauchsoheen, to make to live. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Pemauchsohaluwed, he who makes to live 
 Pemauchsohalid, he who makes me live 
 Pemauchsohalquon, he who makes thee live 
 Pemauchsobalat, he who makes him live 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Pemauchsohalquenk, he who makes us live 
 Pemauchsohalqueek, he who mafies you live 
 PemauchsohalquichUt, he who makes them live. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 69 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Pemauchsohalitup, he who made me live. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N'pommauchsohalgun or n'pommauchsohaluk, 
 
 he makes me live 
 K'pommauchsohalgun, he makes Ihee live 
 Pommauchsohalal or pommauchsohalgol, he 
 
 makes him live 
 
 Plural. 
 Pommauchsohalguna or pommauchsohalquenk, 
 
 he makes us live 
 K'pommauchsohalguwa, he makes you live 
 Pommauchsohalawak, he makes them live. 
 
 Preterite 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pommauchsohalguneep, he made me live 
 K'pommauchsohalguneep, he made thee live 
 Pommauchsohalap, he made him live 
 
 Plural. 
 Pommauchsohalquenkup, he made us live 
 Pommauchsohalquekup, he made you live 
 Pommauchsohalapannit, he made them live. 
 
 Future 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pommauchsohalaktsch, he shall or will make 
 
 me live 
 K'pommauchsohalaktsch, he shall or will make 
 
 thee live 
 Pommauchsohaluchtsch, he shall or will make 
 
 him live 
 
 Plural. 
 N'pommauchsohalgunatsch, he shall or will 
 
 make us live 
 K'pommauchsohalguwaktsch, he shall or will 
 
 make you live 
 Pommauchsohalawaktsch, he shall or will make 
 
 them live. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Pommauchsohalil, make me live 
 
 | Plural. 
 
 Pommauchsohalineen, make us live. 
 
 NEGATIVE FORM. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Matta n'pommauchsohalgowi, he does not make 
 
 me live 
 Matta k'pommauchsohalgowi, he does not make 
 
 thee live 
 Matta pommauchsohalawi, he does not make him 
 
 live 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta pommauchsohalguwuneen, he does not 
 
 make us live 
 Matta k'pommauchsohalguweek, he does not 
 
 make you live 
 Matta pommauchsohalawiwak, he does not make 
 
 them live. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Matta pommauchsohalgowip, he did not make 
 
 me live 
 Matta k'pommauchsohalgowip, he did not make 
 
 thee live 
 Matta pommauchsohalawip, he did not make him 
 
 live 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta pommauchsohalguwenkup, he did not 
 
 make us live 
 Matta pommauchsohalgawekup, he did not make 
 
 you live 
 Matta pommauchsohalawipannit, he did not make 
 
 them live. 
 
70 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [firs.t conjugation.] 
 
 The Future. 
 May be formed from the present tense, as has been already shewn. 
 
 Note. — From the verb pommauchsin is also formed petauchsin, to live so 
 long, till now, to this time, and is conjugated through all the moods and 
 tenses of the radical verb. When we say petauchsohalgun, it is as much as 
 to say " he" (the Saviour) " has preserved our lives or kept (keeps) us living 
 until this time." In this sense, it can only be said of the Deity and of 
 no one else. It is, as one might say, a religious verb. 
 
 No. IX. 
 
 Lauchsin, to live, to walk. 
 
 This verb is derived from pommauchsin above conjugated*. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Lauchsin, to live, walk. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'dellauchsin, I live or walk 
 K'dellauchsin, thou livest or walkest 
 W'dellauchsin or lauchsu, he lives or walks 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dellauchsineen or n'dellauchsihummena, we 
 
 live or walk 
 K'dellauchsihhimo, ye live or walk 
 W'dellauchsinewo or lauchsowak, they live or 
 
 walk. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'dellauchsineep or n'dellauchsihump, I lived 
 
 or walked 
 K'dellauchsineep or k'dellauchsihump, thou 
 
 livedst or walkedst 
 Wdellauchsineep or lauchsop, he lived or walked 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dellauchsihummenakup, we lived or walked 
 K'dellauchsihimoakup, ye lived or walked 
 W'dellauchsinewo or lauchsopannik, they lived 
 or walked. 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — The author does not explain himself further, but I have been in- 
 formed by Mr Heckewelder that the Delawares have various verbs in which they combine the 
 idea of life with actions of living men. Thus a person who has been sick, being asked how he is, 
 will answer, I live, I walk, I am on my feet, I am lively, able to walk about. In other circumstances, 
 the answer to such a question will be given by a different verb. The author, in his copious Dela- 
 ware Vocabulary, in the form of a spelling book, has neither lauchsin nor pommauchsin, he has 
 pommissin, to walk, pommixin, to creep. These shades of language can only be acquired by 
 practice. 
 
OF TfiE IiENNI liENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 71 
 
 Singular. 
 N'dellauchsintsch, I shall live or walk 
 K'dellauchsintsch, thou shalt live or walk 
 Lauchsutsch, he shall live or walk 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'dellauchsihummenatsch, we shall live or walk 
 K'dellauchsihimmotsch, you shall live or walk 
 Wdellauchsowaktsch, they shall live or walk. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Lauchsil, live thou or walk 
 
 Plural. 
 Lauchsik, live ye 
 Lauchsitam, let us live. 
 
 More of this mood is not given. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Lauchsiya, if I live or walk 
 Lauchsiyanne, if thou livest or walkest 
 Lauchsite, if he Uves or walks 
 
 Singular. 
 Lauchsiyakup, if I lived 
 K'dellauchsiyannup, if thou livedst 
 Lauchsitup, if he lived 
 
 Singular. 
 Lauchsiyanpanne, if 1 had lived 
 K'dellauchsiyanpanne, if thou hadst lived 
 Lauchsitpanne, if he had lived 
 
 Plural. 
 Lauchsiyenke, if we live or walk 
 Lauchsiyeque, if ye live or walk 
 Lauchsichtite, if they live or walk. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Lauchsiyannetsch, if I shall live 
 K'dellauchsiyannetsch, if thou shalt live 
 Lauchsitetsch, if he shall live 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Lauchsiyenkup, if we lived 
 Lauchsiyekup, if ye lived 
 Lauchsichtitup, if they lived. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 Lauchsiyenkpanne, if we had lived 
 Lauchsiy ekpanne, if ye had lived 
 Lauchsichti tpanne, if they had lived. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 Lauchsiyenketsch, if we shall live 
 Lauchsiyequetsch, if ye shall live 
 Lauchsichti tetsch, if they shall live. 
 
 CAUSATIVE FORM. 
 
 Lauchsoheen, to cause or make one to live, walk, be lively, happy. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Lauchsoheen, to make one live (in the sense above mentioned). 
 
 18 
 
72 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Singular. | Plural. 
 
 Lauchsohalid, he who makes me live I Lauchsohalquenk, he who makes us live. 
 
 Lauchsohalitup, he who made me live I 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dellunchsohalguneen, he who makes us live 
 K'dellauchsohalguwa, he who make9 you live 
 Lauchsohalawak, he who makes them live. 
 
 N'dellauchsohalgun, he who makes me live 
 Lauchsohalquon, he who makes thee live 
 Lauchsohalgol, he who makes him live 
 
 Singular. 
 N'dellauchsohalguneep, he made me live 
 K'deilauchsohalguneep, he made thee live 
 Lauchsohalgop, he made him live 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Lauchsohalquenkup, he made us live 
 Lauchsohalquekup, he made you live 
 Lauchsohalapahnit, he made them live. 
 
 Nekamatsch n'dellauchsohalgun, he will make 
 
 me live 
 Nekamatsch k'dellauchsohalgun, he will make 
 
 thee live 
 Nekamatsch lauchsohalgol, he will make him 
 
 five 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dellauchsohalgunatsch, he will make us live 
 K'dellauchsohalguwatsch, he will make you live 
 Lauchsohalawatsch, he will make them live. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. I Plural. 
 
 Lauchsohalil, make me live I Lauchsohalineen, make us live. 
 
 No more of this verb is given. 
 
 No. X. 
 
 Wiri,AMAi.Lsijy, to be well, happy. 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Wulamallsin, to be well, happy. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 73 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nulamallsi, I am well 
 Kulamallsi, thou art well 
 Wulamallsi, he is well 
 
 Singular. 
 Nulamallsihump, I was well 
 Kulamallsihump, thou wast well 
 Wulamalessop, he was well 
 
 Singular. 
 Nulalmalsitsch, I shall or will be well 
 Kulamallsitsch, thou shalt or wilt be well 
 Wulamallessutsch, he shall or will be well 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nulamallsihhummena, or shorter, nulamallsih- 
 
 hena, we are well 
 Kulamallsihhimo, ye are well 
 Wulainallsowak, they are well. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Nulamallsihhummenakup, we were well 
 Kulamallsihhimoakup, ye were well 
 Wulamallsopannik, they were well. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 Nulamallsihhenatsch, we shall or will be well 
 Kulamallsihhimo tsch , ye shall or will be well 
 Wulamallso waktsch, they shall or will be well. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 {Not given.) 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nulamallsiyanne, if or when I am well 
 Eulamallsiyanne, if or when thou art well 
 Wulamallsite, if or when he is well 
 
 Singular. 
 Nulamallsiyannup, if or when I was well 
 Kulamallsiannup, if or when thou wert well 
 Wulamallsitup, if or when he was well 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 Wulamallsiyenke, if or when we are well 
 Wulamallsiyeque, if or when ye are well 
 Wulamallsichtite, if or when they are well. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Nulamallsyenkup, if or when we were well 
 Kulamallsiyekup, if or when ye were well 
 Wulamallsichtitup, if or when they were well. 
 
 Nulamallsiyanparme, if or when I had been well 
 Kulamallsiyanpanne, if or when thou hadst been 
 
 well 
 Wulamallessitpanne, if or when he had been well 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 Wulamallsiyenkpanne, if or when we had been 
 
 well 
 Wulamallsiyekpanne, if or when ye had been 
 
 well 
 Wulamallsichtitpanne, if or when they had been 
 
 well. 
 
74 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nulamallsiyannetsch, if or when I shall or will 
 
 be well 
 Kulamallsiyannetsch, if or when thou shalt or 
 
 wilt be well 
 Wulamallsitetsch, if or when he shall or will be 
 
 well 
 
 Plural. 
 Wulamallsiyenketsch, when or if we shall or 
 
 will be well 
 Wulamallsiyequetsch, when or if ye shall or will 
 
 be well 
 Wulamallsichtitetsch, when or if they shall or 
 
 will be well. 
 
 NEGATIVE FORM. 
 
 Singular. 
 Malta nulamallsiwi, I am not well 
 Matta kulamallsiwi, thou art not well 
 Matta wulamallsiwi, he is not well 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta nulamallsiwuneen, we are not well 
 Matta kulamalliwihhimo, ye are not well 
 Matta wulamallsiwiwak, they are not well. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta nulamallsiwip, I have not been well 
 Matta kulamallsiwip, thou hast not been well 
 Matta wulamallsiwi, he has not been well 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta nulamallsiwenkup, we have not been well 
 Matta kulamallsiwekup, ye have not been well 
 Matta wulamallsiwipannik, they have not been 
 well. 
 
 The remainder may be easily conjugated by following the negative 
 form of pommauchsin, to live, above given. 
 
 CONTINUOUS FORM. 
 
 To be conjugated as the preceding with wa prefixed. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Wawulamallsin, to be always well or happy, 
 Singular. 
 N'wawulamallsi, I am always well 
 K'wawulamallsi, thou art always well 
 Wawulamallsu, he is always well 
 
 Plural. 
 Wawulamallsihhummena, we are always well 
 K'wawulamallsihhimo, ye are always well 
 Wawulamallsowak, they are always well, &c. 
 
 CAUSATIVE FORM. 
 
 Wulamallesscheen, to make or cause a person to be well or happy. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Wulamallesscheen, to make one happy. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 75 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Wulamallessohaluwed, he who makes one happy 
 Wulamallessohalid, he who makes me happy 
 Wulamallessohalian (vocative), O thou who ma- 
 
 kest me happy ! 
 Wiilamallessohalquon, he who makes thee happy 
 
 Wttlamallessohalat, he who makes him happy 
 Wulamallessohalquenk, he who makes us happy 
 Wulamallessohalqueek, he who makes youliappy 
 Wulamallessohalquichtit, he who makes them 
 happy. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nulamallsohalgun, he makes me happy 
 Kulamallsohalgun, he makes thee happy 
 Wulamallsohalgol, he makes him happy ' 
 
 Plural. 
 
 WulamaTfebnalguha, he makes us happy 
 Wulainallsohalguwa, he makes you happy 
 Wulaniallsohalawak, he makes them happy. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nulamallsohalguneep, he made me happy 
 Kulamallsohalguneep, he made thee happy 
 Wulamallsohalap, he made him happy 
 
 Plural. 
 Wiilamallsohalgunap, he made us happy 
 Wulamallsohalguwoap, he made you happy 
 Wulamallsohalapannik, he made them happy. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nulamallsohaluktsch, he shall make me happy 
 Kulamallsohaluktsch, he shall make thee happy 
 Wulamallsohalaucbtsch, he shall make him happy 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Wulamallsohalgunatscli, he shall make us happy 
 
 Wulamallsohalguwatsch, he shall make you happy 
 
 Wulamallsohalawaktsch, he shall make them 
 
 happy. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Wulamallsohalil, make me happy 
 
 | Plural. 
 
 I Wulamallsohalineen, make us happy. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Wulamalbohalite, if or when he makes me 
 happy 
 
 Wulamallsohalquonne, if or when he makes thee 
 
 happy 
 Wulamallsohalate, if or when he makes him 
 
 happy 
 
 Plural. 
 Wulamallsohalquenke, if or when he makes us 
 
 happy 
 Wulamallessohalqueque, if or when he makes 
 
 you happy 
 Wulamallsohalquichtite, if or when he makes 
 
 them happy. 
 
 Preterite, 
 
 Singular. 
 Wulamallsohalitup, if or when he made, me 
 
 happy 
 Wulamallsohalquonnup, if or when he made thee 
 
 happy 
 Wulainallsohalatup, if at when M liiade him 
 
 happy 
 
 19 
 
 Plural. 
 Wulamallsohalquenkup, if or when he made us 
 
 happy 
 Wulamallsohalquekup, if or when he made you 
 
 happy 
 WulamalfedhalqniGhtup, if df when he made 
 
 them happy. 
 
GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 Future. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
 Note. — The proper orthography of this verb is wulamallessin, wulam- 
 allesscheen, wulamallessi, &c. ; but the e is frequently left out for brevity's 
 sake, both in speaking and writing, therefore in this conjugation the two 
 modes of spelling are indifferently used. 
 
 No. XI. 
 
 Nihillapewin, to be one's own master, to be free. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Nihillapewin, to be free. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillapewid, he who is free 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillapewitschik, they who are free. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Nihillapewi, I am free 
 K'nihillapewi, thou art free 
 Nihillapeu, he is free 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillapewineen, nihillapewiyenk, nihillapewi- 
 
 hummena, we are free 
 Nihillapewihhimo, nihillapewiyek, ye are free 
 NihiUapewak, they are free. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Nihillapewihump, I was free 
 K'nihillapewihump, thou wast free 
 Nihillapewip, he was free 
 
 Plural. 
 NihiHapewihummenakup, we were free 
 K'nihillapewihummoakup, ye were free 
 Nihillapewapannik, they were free. 
 
 The Future 
 Is as usual formed from the present by means of the suffix tsch. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 (Not given.) 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillapewiyake, when or if I am free 
 K'nihillapewiyane, when or if thou art free 
 Nihillapewite, when or if he is free 
 
 Plural. 
 NihiUapewiyenke, when or if we are free 
 Nihillapewiyeque, when or if ye are free 
 iNihillapewichtite, when or if they are free. 
 
OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [FIRST CONJUGVJ.ION.] 
 
 77 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillapewiyannup, when or if I was free 
 K'nihillapewiyannup, when or if thou wert free 
 Nihillapewitup, when or if he was free 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillapewiyenkup, when or if we were free 
 Nihillapewiyekup, when or if ye were free 
 Nihillapewichtitup, when or if they were free. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillapewiyanpanne, when or if I had been free 
 K'nihillapewiyanpanne, when or if thou hadsl 
 
 been free 
 Nihillape wipanne, when or if he had been free 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillapewiyenkpanhe, when or we had been 
 
 free 
 Nihillapewiyekpanne, when or if ye had been free 
 Nihillapewichtitpanne, when or if they had been 
 
 free. 
 
 Future. 
 (Not given.) 
 
 Note. — As this verb has the syllable wi, which in general indicates a 
 negative form, its negative has wiwi. 
 
 CAUSATIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Nihillapucheen, to liberate or make free 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillapeuhoalid, he who makes me free, my de- 
 
 liverer 
 
 Nihillapeuhalquon, he who makes thee free, thy 
 deliverer 
 
 Nihillapeuhoalat, he who makes him free, his de- 
 liverer 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillapeuhoalquenk, he who makes us free, our 
 
 deliverer 
 Nihillapeuhoalqueek, he who makes you free, 
 
 your deliverer 
 Nihillapeuhoalquichtit, he who makes them free, 
 
 their deliverer. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Nihillapeuhoalitup, he who made me free, &c. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillapeuhalgun, he or one* makes me free 
 K'nihillapeuhoalgun, he or one makes thee free 
 Nihillapeuhoalgol, he or one makes him free 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillapeuhoalguna or nihillapeuhalquenk, he or 
 
 one makes us free 
 Nihillapeuhoalguwa or nihillapeuhoalqueek, he 
 
 or one makes you free 
 .Nihillapeuhoalgook or nihillapeuhoalawak, he or 
 
 one makes them free. 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — One answers here to the French particle on : on me delivre. 
 
78 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillapeuhoalgoap, he made me free 
 K'nihillapeuhoalgop, he made thee free 
 Wnihillapeuhoalap, he made him free 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillapeuhoalgunakup, he made us free 
 Nihillapeuhoalguwoakup, he made you free 
 W'nipihillapeuhoalapannik, he made them free. 
 
 The Future. 
 Is formed from the present, by means of the suffix tsch. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. j Plural. 
 
 Nihillapeuhoalil, make me free I Nihillapeuhoalineen, make us free. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillapeuhoalite, if or when he makes me free 
 Nihillapeuhoalquonne, if or when he makes thee 
 
 free 
 Wnihillapeuhoalatej if or when he makes him 
 
 free 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillapeuhoalquenke, if or when he makes us 
 
 free 
 Nihillapeuhoalqueque, if or when he makes you 
 
 free 
 Nihillapeuhoalquichtite, if or when he makes 
 
 them free. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. I Plural. 
 
 Nihillapeuboalitup, if or when he made me free Nihillapeuhoalquenkup, if or when he made us 
 Nihillapeuhdalquonnup, if or when he made thee , * free 
 
 free ; Nihillapeuhoalquekup, if or when he made you 
 
 Nihillapeuhoalatup, if or when he made him free ; free 
 
 NihillapeuhoaJquichtitup, if or when he made 
 I them free. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillapeuhoalitpanne, if or when he had made 
 
 me free 
 Nihillapeuhoalatquonpanne, if or when he had 
 
 made thee free 
 Nihillapeuhoalatpanne, if or when he had made 
 
 him free 
 
 Plural. 
 Nrhillapeuhoalquenkpanne, if or when he had 
 
 made us free 
 Nihillapeuhoalqueekpanne, if or when he had 
 
 made you free 
 Nihillapeuhoalquichtitpanne, if or when he had 
 
 made them free. 
 
 Future. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [first conjugation.] 
 
 79 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Nihillapenhoalgussia, if or when I am made free 
 K'nihillapeuhoalgussiyane, if or when thou art 
 
 made free 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussite, if or when he is made free 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussiyenque, if or when we are 
 
 made free 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussiyeque, if or when ye are made 
 
 free 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussichtite, if or when they are 
 
 made free. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussiyakup, if or when I was made 
 
 free 
 K'nihillape uhoalgnssiy anup, if or when thou wert 
 
 made free 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussitup, if or when he was made 
 
 free 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussiyenkup, if or when we were 
 
 made free 
 K'nihillapeuhoalgussiyekup, if or when ye were 
 
 made free 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussichtitup, if or when they were 
 
 made free. 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussiyakpanne, if or when I had 
 
 been made free 
 K'nihillapeuhoalgussiyanpanne, if or when thou 
 
 hadst been made free 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussitpanne, if or when he had 
 
 been made free 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussiyenkpanne, if or when we 
 
 had been made free 
 K'nihillapeuhoalgussiyekpanne, if or when ye 
 
 had been made free 
 Nihillapenhoalgussichtitpanne, if or when they 
 
 had been made free. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussitsch, if or when I shall be 
 
 made free 
 E'nihillapeuhoalgussitscb, if or when thou shalt 
 
 be made free 
 Nihillapeuahoalgussutsch, if or when he shall 
 
 be made free 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussihummenatsch, if or when we 
 
 shall be made free 
 K'nihillapeuhoalgussihimatsch, if or when ye 
 
 shall be made free 
 Nihillapeuhoalgussowaktsch*, if or when they 
 
 shall be made free. 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — This verb in its various forms is derived from, or at least con- 
 nected with nihillatamen, I own, I am master of, and to that class belong words which may be 
 used as substantives, signifying lord or master, or as participles, in their personal forms, as he who 
 owns me, thee, him, &c. See the 4th conjugation, No. III. to which that verb belongs. 
 
 With this family of verbs and substantives is connected the verb, nihilla, I kill, or strike dead, 
 and its forms, knihillall, I kill thee, strike thee dead ; and nilchgussiani, (used only in the subjunc- 
 tive mood) if or when I am killed or struck dead. It is very curious to observe the chains of 
 ideas which different nations pursue in the formation of their languages. Here we find right, power, 
 and force confounded together, as if there was no difference between them — I am owner, mas- 
 ter, lord ; I strike, kill, destroy ; all — words derived from the same root produced under different 
 forms, and this will, no doubt, be ascribed to the barbarity of American Indians. But may not 
 similar connections and derivations be found in the languages of civilized nations ? For instance 
 the Italian cattivo, wicked, from captivus, a prisoner, whence the English word caitiff is derived ; 
 the French gueux, a scoundrel, which signifies also a beggar ; thus 1 stigmatizing misfortune with 
 the imputation of baseness and crime ; and in almost all European languages, the words wretch, 
 malheureux, miserable, &c. used to express the highest degree of defamation and contempt. 
 " Take physic, pomp !" — Let us learn first to know ourselves, before we pass too severe a judg- 
 ment on other nations. 
 
 20 
 
80 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [of verbs.] 
 
 Second ffioufugatton. 
 No. I. 
 
 Aan, to go (thither, to a place.) 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Eyat, going 
 Ahek, gone 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Aan, to go. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Eyatschik 
 Ahektschik. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'da, I go 
 K'da, thou goest 
 Eu or waeu, he goes 
 
 Singular. 
 N'dahump, n'danep, I went 
 K'dahump, k'danep, thou didst go 
 Eep, w'danep, he went 
 
 Singular. 
 N'dantsch, I shall or will go 
 K'dantsch; thou shalt or wilt go 
 Euchtsch, he shall or will go 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'daneen or n'dahhena, we go 
 K'dahhimo, ye go 
 Ewak, waewak, or w'danewo, they go. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dahhenap or n'dahhenakup, we went 
 K'dahhimoakup, ye went 
 Epannik, they went. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dahhenatsch, we shall or will go 
 K'dahhimotsch, ye shall or will go 
 Ewaktsch, they shall or will go. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Aal, go thou 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Atam let us go 
 Aak, go ye. 
 
 Plural. 
 
OF THE IiENNI I.ENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [second conjugation.] 
 
 81 
 
 Atetsch, he shall go 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Future. 
 
 I Plural. 
 
 Achtjtetsch, they shall go. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Aane, when or if I go . 
 Ayane, when or if thou goest 
 Ate, when or if he goes 
 
 Singular. 
 Aanup, when or if I went 
 Ayanup, when or if thou didst go 
 Atup, when or if he went 
 
 Singular. 
 Aanpanne, when or if I had gone 
 Ayanpanne, when or if thou hadst gone 
 Atpanne, when or if he had gone 
 
 Singular. 
 Aanetsch, when or if I shall go 
 Ayanetsch, when or if thou shalt go 
 Aktich, when or if he shall go 
 
 Plural. 
 Ayenke, when or if we go 
 Ayeque, when or if ye go 
 Aachtite, when or if they go. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ayenkup, when or if we went 
 Ayekup, when or if ye went 
 Aachtitup, when or if they went. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 Ayenkpanne, when or if we had gone 
 Ay ekpanne, when or if ye had gone 
 I Achtitpanne, when or if they had gone. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ayenketsch, when or if we shall go 
 Ayequetsch, when or if ye shall go 
 Aachtitetsch, when or if they shall go. 
 
 LOCAL RELATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Eyaya, where or whither I go 
 Eyayan, where or whither thou goest 
 Eyat, where or whither he goes 
 
 Plural. 
 Eyayenk, where or whither we go 
 Eyayek, where or whither ye go 
 Eyachtit, where or whither they go. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Eyayakup, where or whither I went 
 Eyayanup, where or whither thou didst go 
 Eyatup, where or whither he went 
 
 Plural. 
 Eyayenkup, where or whither we went 
 Eyayekup, where or whither ye went 
 Eyachtitup, where or whither they went. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Eyayatsch, where or whither I shall or will go 
 Eyayannetsch, where or whither thou shalt or 
 
 wilt go 
 Eyatsch, where or whither he shall or will go 
 
 Plural. 
 Eyayenktsch, where or whither we shall or will 
 
 go 
 Eyayektsch, where or whither ye shall or will go 
 Eyaktitsch, where or whither they shall or will go . 
 
8S 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [second conjugation.] 
 
 NEGATIVE FORM. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta n'dawi, I do not go 
 Matta k'dawi, thou dost not go 
 Matta ewi, he does not go 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta n'dawip, I did not go 
 Matta k'dawip, thou didst not go 
 Matta ewip, he did not go 
 
 Singular. 
 Mattatsch n'dawi, I shall not go 
 Mattatsch k'dawi, thou shalt not go 
 Mattatsch w'dawi or ewi, he shall not go 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta n'dawuneen, we do not go 
 Matta k'dawunewo, ye do not go 
 Matta ewiwak, they do not go. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Matta n'dawunenap, we did not go 
 
 Matta k'dawihhimoap or k'dawunewoap, ye did 
 
 not go 
 Matta w'dawunewoap or ewipannik, they did 
 
 not go. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 Mattatsch n'dawuneen, we shall not go 
 Mattatsch k'dawunewo, ye shall not go 
 Mattatsch ewiwak, they shall not go. 
 
 Katschi ta ahan, do not go 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Plural. 
 Katschi ta ahek, go ye not. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Matta n'dawonne, when or if I do not go 
 Matta awonne, when or if thou dost not go 
 Matta aque, when or if he does not go 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta awenke, when or if we do not go 
 Matta aweque, when or if ye do not go 
 Matta achtite, when or if they do not go. 
 
 The other tenses of this verb in the subjunctive mood are not given. 
 
 SOCIAL FORM. 
 
 Witeen*, to go with 
 
 To go with some body. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 | Witeneep, to have gone with. 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — The derivation of this w^rd witeen from n'da, I go, does not 
 immediately appear. In the first place it must be observed, that the author frequently con- 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [second conjugatiqn.] 
 
 83 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Witetschik, he who goes with his companion. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'wite, I go with 
 K'wite, thou goest with 
 Witeu, he goes with 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'witeneep, I went with 
 K'witeneep, thou didst go with 
 Witeep, he went with 
 
 Singular. 
 N'witetsch, I shall go with 
 K'witetsch, thou shalt go with 
 Witeuchtsch, he shall go with 
 
 Plural. 
 N'witeneen, we go with 
 K'witenewo, ye go with 
 Witewak, they go with. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'witenenakup, we went with 
 K'witene woakup, ye went with 
 Witepannik, they went with. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'witeneentsch, we shall go with 
 K'witenewotsch, ye shall go with 
 Witewaktsch, they shall go with. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Witel, go thou with 
 Witscheewil, go thou with me 
 
 Plural. 
 Witek, go ye with 
 Witscheewik, go ye with me. 
 
 TBJUVSITIOJVS.— FIRST TRjVVSITIOJV. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 K'witsche wulanne or k'witschewulen, I go with 
 
 thee 
 N'witschewan, I go with him 
 
 Preterite 
 
 Singular. 
 K'witschewulleneep, I went with thee 
 N'witschewoap, I went with him 
 
 Plural. 
 K'witschewullohhumo, I go with you 
 N'witschewawak, I go with them. 
 
 Plural. 
 K'witschewullohhumoap or k'witschewullenne- 
 
 woap, I went with you 
 N'witsche woapannik, I went with them. 
 
 founds the sounds d and t, which to a German untutored ear appear to be the same ; therefore if 
 we write wideen, the etymology becomes at once apparent. W is the inseparable pronoun of the 
 third person he or she, him or her ; i is interposed for euphony's sake, and deen or teen is a form 
 of the verb aan, to go, as n'da or n'ta is another. We should be very careful how we ascribe a 
 want of analogy to Indian derivations ; although it may not be always observable at first sight, it 
 will be discovered by those who investigate the subject with the necessary attention. 
 
 21 
 
84 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 [second conjugation.] 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 yf yA Present. 
 
 Witschewane, when I go with him | 
 
 No more of this tense is given, nor of the subjunctive mood through- 
 out these transitions, except two persons in the second, and two in the 
 third. 
 
 SECOND TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD, 
 Present. 
 
 K'witschewi, thou goest with me 
 K'witschewan, thou goest with him 
 
 K'witschewip, thou didst go with me 
 K' witsche woap , thou didst go with him 
 
 Plural. 
 
 K'witschewineen or k'witschewihhena, thou go- 
 est with us 
 K'witschewawak, thougpest with them. 
 
 Plural. 
 K'witschewihummeneep, (or abridged, k'wite- 
 
 chewimeneep,) thou didst go with us 
 K'witschewoapannik, thou didst go with them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 K'witschewianne, when thou goest with me | E'witschewanne, when thou goest with him. 
 
 THIRD TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 N'witscheyuk, he goes with me 
 K'witscheyuk, he goes with thee 
 Witsehewawall, he goes with him 
 
 N'witscheuchkup, he went with me 
 K'witscheuchkup, he went with thee 
 Witschewoap, he went with him 
 
 Plural. 
 Witscheuchguna, he goes with us 
 Witscheuchguwa, he goes with you 
 Witsche wawak, he goes with them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Witscheuchgunap, he went with us 
 Witscheuchguwoap, he went with you 
 Witschewoapannik, he went with them. 
 
OF THE LENNI ^ENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [second conjugation,.] 
 
 85 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 N'witschewite,[w hen or if he goes with me | K' witsche, when or, it, he goes with thee 
 
 FOURTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 K'witschewuleneen, we go with thee 
 N'witschewaneen, we go with him 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 ■ K'witschewullohhena, we go with you 
 N'witschewawuna, we go with them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 K' witsche wullohhenap , we went with thee 
 N' witsche wawunap or n' witsche waneenakup, 
 we went with hun 
 
 Plural. 
 N'witachewullohhenakup, we went with you 
 N'witschewawunap, we went with them. 
 
 FWTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 K'witschewihhimo, you go with me 
 K' witsche wane wo, you go with him 
 
 Present. 
 
 Phural. 
 
 K' witschewineen or k' witschewihhummena, you 
 
 go with us 
 K'witschewawawall, you go with them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'witschewihhimoakup, you went with me 
 K'witschewanewoakup, you went with him 
 
 Plural. 
 K'witschewihummenakup, you went with us 
 K'witschewawapannik, you went with them. 
 
 SIXTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MQQD. 
 
 N' witscheuchgook, they go with me 
 K'witscheuchgook, they go with thee 
 WitscheucbgoT, they go with him 
 
 Plwah 
 Witscheuchgunanak, they go with us 
 Witscheuchguwawak, they go with you 
 Witscheuchgook, they go with them. 
 
86 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [second conjugation.] 
 
 N'witscheuchgokpannik, they went with me 
 K'witscheuchgopannik, they went with thee 
 Witscheuchgopannik, (hey went with him 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Witscheuchgunapannik, they went with us 
 Witscheuchguwapannik, they went with you 
 Witscheucbgokpannik, they went with them. 
 
 No. II. 
 
 Paan, to come. 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Paan, to come. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Singular. 
 Payat, he who comes or is coming 
 
 Plural. 
 Payatchik, they who come or are coming. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pa, I come 
 K'pa, thou comest 
 Peu or peyeya, he comes 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pahump or n'paneep, I came 
 K'pahump or k'paneep, thon earnest 
 Peep, panep, or peuchsa, he came 
 
 Plural. 
 N'paneen or n'pahhena, we come 
 K'pahhimo or k'panewo, ye come 
 Pewak, penewo, they come. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'pahhenap or n'pakup, we came 
 K'pahhimoap or k'pahhimoakup, ye came 
 Pepannik or pannewoakup, they came. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'patsch, I shall or will come 
 K'patsch, thou shalt or wilt come 
 Peuchtsch, he shall or will come 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'pahhenatsch, we shall or will come 
 K'pahhenatsch, ye shall or will come 
 Pewaktsch, they shall or will come. 
 
 Pal, come thou 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 ' Paak, come ye. 
 
 Plural. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [second conjugation.] 
 
 87 
 
 Patetsch, he shall come 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 | Pachtitetsch, they shall come. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Paane, paya, if or when I come 
 Payane, if or when thou comest 
 Pate, if or when he comes 
 
 Singular. 
 Payakup, if or when I came 
 Payanup, if or when thou earnest 
 Patup, peyatup, if or when he came 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 Payenk, payenke, if or when we come 
 Payeque, if or when ye come 
 Pachtit, pachtite, if or when they come. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Payenkup, if or when we came 
 Payekup, if or when ye came 
 Pachtitup, if or when they came. 
 
 Singular. 
 Payakpanne, if or when I had come 
 Payanpanne, if or when thou hadst come 
 Patpanne, if or when he had come 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Payenkpanne, if or when we had come 
 Payekpanne, if or when ye had come 
 Pachtitpanne, if or when they had come. 
 
 The Future 
 Is formed from the present as above mentioned. 
 
 NEGATIVE FORM. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Matta n'pawi, I do not come 
 Matta k'pawi, thou dost not come 
 Matta pewi, he does not come 
 
 Matta n'pawip, I did not come 
 Matta k'pawip, thou didst not come 
 Matta pewip, he did not come 
 
 Plural. 
 N'pawuneen, we do not come 
 K'pawunewo, ye do not come 
 Pewiwak, pewichtik, or pachtique, they do not 
 come. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta n'pawihhenap, we did not come 
 Matta k'pawihhimoap, ye did not come 
 Matta pewipanik, they did not come. 
 
 Mattatsch n'pawi, fyc. 
 
 Future. 
 Like the present tense. 
 
88 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [second conjugation.] 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. | Plural. 
 
 Katsehi pahan, come thou not I Eatscbi pahik, come ye not. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Katsehi pahitsch, he shall or must not come | Katsehi pachtitetsch, they shall ormust not come. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta pawiyak, if or when I do not come 
 Matta k'pawonne, if or when thou dost not come 
 Matta paque or pewite, if or when he does not 
 come 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta pawenke, if ar when we do not come 
 Matta paweque, if or when ye do not come 
 Matta pachtite, if or when they do not come. 
 
 Matta pawiyakup, if or when I did not come 
 Matta k'pawonnup, if or when thou didst not 
 
 come 
 Matta pakup or pewitup, if or when he did not 
 
 come 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta pawenkup, if or when we did not come 
 Matta pawekup, if or when ye did not come 
 Matta pachtitup, if or when they did not come. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta payakpanne, if or when I had not come 
 Matta pawonpanne, if or when thou hadst not 
 
 come 
 Matta pakpanne, if or when he had not come 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta pawenkpanne, if or when we had not 
 
 come 
 Matta pawekpanne, if or when ye had not come 
 Matta pachtitpanne, if or when they had not 
 
 come. 
 
 Future. 
 The future is like the present. Mattatsch pawiyak, k'pawonne, paque, 
 
 Another form of the Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta n'pawiyatsch, if or when I shall not come 
 Atta k'pawonnetsch, if or when thou shalt not 
 
 come 
 Atta pewitetsch, if or when he shall not come 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Atta pawenketsch, if or when we shall not come 
 
 Atta pawequetsch, if or when ye shall not come 
 
 Atta pewichtitetsch or pauchtitetsch, if or when 
 
 they shall not come. 
 
OF THE LENNI &ENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [of verbs.} 
 
 89 
 
 The third conjugation ends in elendam, and all the verbs with this ter- 
 mination express a disposition, situation, or operation of the mind. 
 
 No. I. 
 
 Schiwelendam, to be melancholy or sad. 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'schiwelendam, I am sad 
 
 K'schiwelendam, thou art sad 
 Schiwelendam, he is sad 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Schiwelendam, to be sad. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Schiwelendamenep, to have been sad. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 * Plural. 
 
 Schiwelendameneen, we are sad 
 Schiwelendamohhumo, ye are sad 
 Schiwelendamoak, they are sad. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N'schiwelendamenep, I was sad 
 K'schiwelendamenep, thou wast sad 
 Schiwelendamenep, he was sad 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Schiwelendamenenap, we were sad 
 Schiwelendamohhumoap, ye were sad 
 Schiwelendamopannik, they were sad. 
 
 The Future 
 Is conjugated like the present, with tsch suffixed. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Schiwelendama, if or when I am sad 
 K'schiwelendamane, if or when thou art sad 
 Schiwelendanke, if or when he is sad 
 
 Plural. 
 Schiwelendamenke, if or when we are sad 
 Schiwelendameque, if or when ye are sad 
 Schiweleudamichtite, if or when they are sa 
 
90 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [third conjugation.] 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Schiwelendamakup, if or when I was sad 
 Schiwelendankup, if or when thou wert sad 
 Schiwelendankup, if'or when he was sad 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Shiwelendamenkup, if or when we were sad 
 Shiwelendamekup, if or when ye were sad 
 Shiwelendamichtitup, if or when they were sad. 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Singular. 
 Schiwelendamakpanne, if or when I had been 
 
 Schiwelendamanpanne, if or when thou hadst 
 
 been sad 
 Schiwelendankpanne, if or when he had been 
 
 sad 
 
 Plural. 
 Schiwelendamenkpanne, if or when we had been 
 
 sad 
 Schiwelendamekpanne, if or when ye had been 
 
 , sad 
 Schiwelendamichtitpanne, if or when they had 
 been sad. 
 
 Schiwelendamaktsch, if or when I shall or will 
 
 be sad 
 Schiwelendamantsch, if or when thou shalt or 
 
 wilt be sad 
 Schiwelendanktsch, if or when he shall or will 
 
 be sad 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 Schiwelendamenketsch, if or when we shall or 
 
 will be sad 
 Schiwelendamequetsch, if or when ye shall or 
 
 will be sad 
 Schiwelendamichtitetsch, if or when they shall 
 or will be sad. 
 
 NEGATIVE FORM. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta n'schiwelendamowi, I am not sad 
 Atta k'schiwelendamowi, thou art not sad 
 Atta schiwelendamowi, he is not sad 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta schiwelendamowuneen, we are not sad 
 Atta k'schiwelendamohhumo, ye are not sad 
 Atta schiwelendamowunewo, they are not sad. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta n'schiwelendamowip, I was not sad 
 Atta k'schiwelendamowip, thou wast not sad 
 Atta schiwelendamowip, he was not sad 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta schiwelendamowuneen, we were not sad 
 Atta schiwelendainowihhimoap, ye were not sad 
 Atta schiwelendamowipannik, they were not sad . 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Mattatsch n'schiwelendamowi, I shall or will 
 not be sad, &c. 
 
 Plural. 
 Mattatsch schiwelendamowuneen, we shall or 
 will not be sad, &c. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [thikd conjugation.] 
 
 91 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta schiwelendamowak, if or when I am not 
 
 sad 
 Matta k'schiwelendamowanne, if or when thou 
 
 art not sad 
 Matta schiwelendamoque, if or when he is not 
 
 sad 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta schiwelendamowenk, if or when we are not 
 
 sad 
 Atta schiwelendamowek, if or when ye are not 
 
 sad 
 Atta schiwelendamichtik, if or when they are not 
 
 sad. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta schiwelendamowakup, if or when I was not 
 
 sad . 
 Atta schiwelendamowanup, if or when thou wert 
 
 not sad 
 Atta schiwelendamokup, if or when he was not 
 
 sad 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta schiwelendamowenkup, if or when we were 
 
 not sad 
 Atta schiweledamowekup, if or when ye were not 
 
 sad 
 Atta schiwelendamichtitup, if or when they were 
 not sad. 
 
 No. II. 
 
 Wulelendam, to rejoice. 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Wulelendam, to rejoice. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Wulelendamenep, to have rejoiced. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nolelendam or nulelendam, I rejoice 
 Kulelendam or kulelendamen, thou rejoicest 
 Wulelendam or wulelendamohummena, he re- 
 joices 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nolendamen, we rejoice 
 Kulelendamohhumo, ye rejoice 
 Wulelendamoak or wulelendamenewo, they re- 
 joice. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nolelendameneep, I rejoiced 
 Kulelendameneep, thou rejoiced 
 Wulelendamenep or wulelendamoap, he rejoiced 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Nolelendamenenap or oolelendamennakup, we 
 
 rejoiced 
 Nolelendamohhenap or nolelendahummoakup, 
 
 ye rejoiced 
 Wulelendamopannik, they rejoiced. , 
 
92 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [third conjugation.] 
 
 The Future 
 Is formed like the present, with tsch suffixed. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Wulelenda, rejoice thou 
 
 Plural. 
 Wulelendamook, do ye rejoice 
 Wulelendamotam, let us rejoice. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Nulelendama, if or when I rejoice 
 Kulelendamane, if or when thou rejoicest 
 Wulelendanke, if or when he rejoices 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 Wulelendamenke, if or when we rejoice 
 Eulelendameque, if or when ye rejoice 
 Wulelendamichtite, if or when they rejoice. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Wulelendamakup, if or when I rejoiced 
 Kulelendamanup, if or when thou rejoicedst 
 Wulelendankup, if or when he rejoiced 
 
 Plural. 
 Nolelendamenkup, if or when we rejoiced 
 Wulelendamekup, if or when ye rejoiced 
 Wulelendamichtitup, if or when they rejoiced! 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nolelendamakpanne, if or when I had rejoiced 
 Kulelendamanpanne, if or when thou hadst re- 
 joiced 
 Wulelendankpanne, if or when he had rejoiced 
 
 Nolelendamaktsch, if or when I shall rejoice 
 Kulelendamaktsch, if or when thou shalt re 
 
 joice 
 Wulelendamaktsch, if or when he shall rejoice 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Wulelendamenkpanne, if or when we had re- 
 joiced 
 Kulelendamekpanne, if or when ye had rejoiced 
 Wulelendamiehtitpanne, if or when they had 
 rejoiced. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 Wulelendamenketsch, if or when we shall re- 
 joice 
 Kulelendamequetsch, if or when ye shall rejoice 
 Wulelendamichtitetsch, if or when they shall re- 
 joice. 
 
 NEGATIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Atta wulelendamowi, not to rejoice. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta milelendamowi, I do not rejoice 
 Atta kulelendamowi, thou dost not rejoice 
 Atta wulelendamowi, he does not rejoice 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta wulelendamowuneen, we do not rejoice 
 Atta kulelendamohhumo, ye do no* rejoice 
 Atta wulelendamowunewo, they do not rejoice. 
 
OF THE 1LENNI LEUAPE INDIANS. 
 
 {third conjugation.] 
 
 93 
 
 Atta nulelendamowip, I did not rejoice 
 Atta kulelendamo wip, thou didst not rejoice 
 Atta wulelendamowip, he did not rejoice 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta wulelendamowunenap, we did not rejoice 
 Atta kulelendamohhumoap, ye did not rejoice 
 Atta wulelendamowunewoap, tbeydidnotrejoice. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Atta nulelendamowitsch, I shall or will not re- 
 joice 
 
 Atta kulelendamowitsch, thou shalt or wilt not 
 rejoice 
 
 Atta wulelendamowitsch, he shall or will not re- 
 joice 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta wulelendamowuneentsch, we shall or will 
 
 not rejoice 
 Atta kulelendamohhumotsch, ye shall or will not 
 
 rejoice 
 Atta wulelendamowunewotsch, .they shall or 
 
 will not rejoice. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Atta nulelendamowak, if or when I do not re- 
 joice 
 
 Atta wulelendamowane, if or when thou dost 
 not rejoice 
 
 Atta wulelendamoque, if or when he does not. 
 rejoice 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta wulelendamowenke, if or when we do not 
 
 rejoice 
 Atta wulelendamoweque, if or when ye do not 
 
 rejoice 
 Atta wulelendamichtite, if or when they do not 
 
 rejoice. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta nulelendamowakup, if or when I did not re- 
 joice 
 
 Atta kulelendamowannup, if or when thou didst 
 not rejoice 
 
 Atta wulelendamokup, if or when he did not re 
 joice 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta wulelendamowenkup, if or when we did not 
 
 rejoice 
 Atta wulelendamowekup, if or when ye did not 
 
 rejoice 
 Atta wulelendawichtikup, if or when they did 
 
 not rejoice. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta nulelendamowakpanne, if or when I had not 
 
 rejoiced 
 Atta kulelendamowanpanne, if or when thou 
 
 hadst not rejoiced 
 Atta wulelendamowakpanne, if or when he had 
 
 not rejoiced 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Atta wulelendamowenkpanne, if or when we had 
 
 not rejoiced 
 Atta wulelendamowekpanne, if or when ye had 
 
 not rejoiced 
 Atta wulelendamichtitpanne, if or when they 
 
 had not rejoiced. 
 
 The Future 
 Is formed like the present, with sch suffixed. 
 
 The following verbs may easily be conjugated iaccording to -the fore- 
 going rule : 
 
 Tipelendam, to have enough, to be satiated I Schingelendam, to be tired of, to dislike, some- 
 
 Tschanelendam, to be considering, to be in doubt | 
 
 mge 
 thi 
 
 mg 
 
9 + 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 Schachachgelendam, to have one's mind made 
 up, to be determined 
 
 Wingelendam, to be pleased with something 
 
 Aptelendam, to grieve to death 
 
 Gischelendam, to hatch or meditate something 
 good or bad, to lie 
 
 Klakelendam (jocularly) to be rakish, extrava- 
 gant, dissolute, a good for nothing fellow 
 
 Lachauwelendam, to be troubled in mind 
 
 Machelendam, to honour a person 
 
 Mattelendam, to despise 
 
 Miechanelendam, to be ashamed 
 
 Miwelendam, to forgive 
 
 Wahhellemelendam, to think one's self far off 
 
 Gunelendam, to think it a long time 
 
 Pechuwelendam, to think one's self near 
 
 Sacquelendam, to be melancholy, sad 
 
 Apuelendam, to think something or labour easy 
 
 Achowelendam, to think something difficult 
 Kitelcndam, to be in earnest 
 Komelendam, to be free from trouble or care 
 Tschipelendam, to think a person disagreeable 
 Ayanhelendam, to be indifferent 
 Niskelendam, to loathe something 
 Kschiechelendam, kschiechelensin, to think 
 
 one's self free from sin or stain, to think 
 
 one's self holy, pious, clean 
 Uschuwelendam, to be overwhelmed with care 
 
 or trouble 
 Allacquelendam, to be repentant even to despair 
 Quesquelendam, to be out of humour 
 Yechauwelendam,, to love better, to prefer 
 Allowelendam, to prize something above all 
 
 other things 
 Ksinelendam, to be easy, without care. 
 
 fourth ©onjuflatton. 
 
 No. I. 
 
 Gattamen, to desire, long for. 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N'gattamen, I desire 
 Gattatamen, thou desirest 
 Gottatamen, he desires 
 
 Singular. 
 N'gattatamenep, I desired 
 Gattatamenep, thou desiredst 
 Gottatameneep, he desired 
 
 Singular. 
 N'gattatamtsch, I shall or will desire 
 Gattatamtsch, thou shalt or wilt desire 
 Gottatamtsch, he shall or will desire 
 
 Plural. 
 Gattatameneen or n'gattatamohhena, we desire 
 Gattatamohhumo, ye desire 
 Gattatamenewo, they desire. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Gattatamenap or gattamohhenap, we desired 
 Gattatamohhumoap, ye desired 
 Gattatamenowoap, they desired. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'gattatamohhenatsch, we shall or will desire 
 Gattatamohhumotsch, ye shall or will desire 
 Gattatamenewotsch, they shall or will desire. 
 
OF THE LENNI EENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 95 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Gattati, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 [ Gattatook or gattatamook. 
 
 The Imperative Mood is used in these verbs by way of exhortation, as 
 come now, be diligent, industrious, &c. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'gattatama, if or when I desire 
 Gattatamane, if or when thou desirest 
 Getatanke, if or when he desires 
 
 Singular. 
 Gattatamakup, if or when I desired 
 Gatt atamanup , if or when thou desiredst 
 Getatankup, if or when he desired 
 
 Plural. 
 Gattatamenk or gattatamenke, if or when we 
 
 desire 
 Gattatameque, if or when ye desire 
 Gattatamichtite, if or when they desire. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Gattatamenkup, if or when we desired 
 Gattatamekup, if or when ye desired 
 Gattatamichtitup, if or when they desired. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 Gattatamakpanne, if or when I had desired 
 Gattatamanpanne, if or when thou hadst desired 
 Getatankpanne, if or when he had desired 
 
 Plural. 
 Gattatamenkpanne, if or when we had desired 
 Gattatamekpanne, if or when ye had desired 
 Gattatamichtitpanue, if or when they had de- 
 sired. 
 
 Singular. 
 Gattatamak tsch, if or when I shall desire 
 Gattatamantsch, if or when thou shalt desire 
 Gattatanktsch, if or when he shall desire 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 Gattatamenketsch, if or when we shall desire 
 Gattatamequetsch, if or when ye shall desire 
 Gattatamichtitetsch, if or when they shall desire. 
 
 NEGATIVE FORM, 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta n'gattatamowi, I do not desire 
 Atta gattatamowi, thou dost not desire 
 Atta gottatamowi, he does not desire 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta gattatamowuneen, we do not desire 
 Atta gattatamohhumowi, ye do not desire 
 Atta gattatamowunewo, they do not desire. 
 
 24 
 
96 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [foubth conjugation.] 
 
 Atta n'gattatamowip, I did not desire 
 Atta gattatamowip, thou didst not desire 
 Atta gottatamowip, he did not desire 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Atta gattatamo wunenap, we did not desire 
 Atta gattatamohhuraoap , ye did not desire 
 Atta gattatamowunewoap or gattatamowipan- 
 nik, they did not desire. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Atta n'gattatamowitsch, I shall not desire 
 Atta gattatamo witsch, thou shalt not desire 
 Atta gottatamowitsch, he shall not desire 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Atta gattatamo wuneentsch, we shall not desire 
 Atta gattatamohhumotsch, ye shall not desire 
 Atta gattatamowunewotsch, they shall net de- 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Atta gattatamo wait, if or when I do not desire 
 Atta gattatamowane, if or when thou dost not 
 
 desire 
 Atta gattatamoque, if or when he does not de- 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta gattatamowenke, if or when we do not de- 
 sire 
 Atta guttata mo wcque, if or when ye do not desire 
 Atta gattatamichtite, if or when they do not de- 
 sire. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta gattatamowakup, if or when I did not de 
 
 Atta gattatamowannup, if or when thou didst not 
 
 desire 
 Atta gattatamokup, if or when he did not desire 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Atta gattatamo wenkup, if or when we did not 
 desire 
 
 Atta gattatamo wekup, if or when ye did not de- 
 sire 
 
 Atta gattatamichtitup, if or when they did not 
 desire. 
 
 Atta gattatamowakpanne, if or when I had not 
 
 desired 
 Atta gattatamowanpanne, if or when thou hadst 
 
 not desired 
 Atta gattatamowakpanne, if or when he had not 
 
 desired 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta gattatamowenkpanne, if or when we had 
 
 not desired 
 Atta gattatamowekpanne, if or when ye had not 
 
 desired 
 Atta gattatamichtitpanne, if or when ye had not 
 
 desired. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta gattatamowaktsch, if or when I shall not 
 
 desire 
 Atta gattatamo wannetsch, if or when thou shalt 
 
 not desire 
 Atta gattatamoquetsch, if or when he shall not 
 
 desire 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta gattatamowenketsch, if or when we shall 
 
 not desire 
 Atta gattatamowequetsch, if or when ye shall 
 
 not desire 
 Atta gattatamichtitetsch, if or when .they shall 
 
 not desire. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 07 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 No. II. 
 
 Pendamen, to hear. 
 
 Note by the Translator. — This verb is given here in a variety of forms, 
 active, passive, reciprocal, transitive, reflected, and adverbial; all, ex- 
 cept the two last, in the positive and the negative. It will be easily 
 perceived that if all the verbs were presented in Ihe different forms of 
 which they are capable, with all their moods, tenses, and other combina- 
 tions, a grammar of this language might be swelled to an enormous 
 size, to avoid which the Author, as may' be observed, has frequently 
 abridged, his paradigms, and it must not be supposed that it always 
 follows, because a particular form of a verb is not given in its conjugation, 
 that it is not susceptible of it. 
 
 POSITIVE FORM. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pendamen or n'pendam, I hearf 
 K'pendamen, thou hearest 
 Pendamen, he hears 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pendamen, to hear*. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'pendameneen, we-hear 
 
 N'pendamenep, I did hear 
 K'pendamenep, thou didst hear 
 Pendamenep, he did hear 
 
 K'pendamohhumo, ye hear 
 Pendamenewo, they. hear. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'pendamohhenap, we did hear 
 K'pendamohhumoap, ye did hear 
 Peudamenewoap, they did hear. 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — The late Professbr Vater, to whom I communicated a manuscript 
 of Mr Zeisberger, containing the conjugation of this verb and a. few others, inserted them in his 
 Analekten der Sprachenkunde; 2d,ha)f ofithe 2d part; but ascribed them by mistake to the Chip- 
 peway language, when, in.fact,.they,belong,tO'the Delaware. 
 
 f Note by the Translator. — From this verb and wulit, good, well, is formed nulipendam, I 
 hear or understand well. A part of the word wulit is interposed between the pronoun and the verb. 
 
98 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [foukth conjugation.] 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pendamentsch, I shall hear 
 K'pendamentsch, thou shalt hear 
 Pendamentsch, he shall hear 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'pendameneentsch, we shall hear 
 K'pendamohumotsch, ye shall hear 
 Pendamenewotsch, they shall hear. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Penda, hear thoo 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Pendamook, hear ye. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pendama or pendamaya, if or when I hear 
 Pendamane, if or when thouhearest 
 Pendanke, if or when he hears 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 Pendamenk or pendamenke, if or when we 
 
 hear 
 Pendamenque, if or when ye hear 
 Pendamichtite, if or when they hear. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Pendamakup, if or when I did hear 
 K'pendamanup, if or when thou didst hear 
 Pendankup," if or when he did hear 
 
 Plural. 
 Pendamenkup, if or when we did hear 
 Pendamekup, if or when ye did hear 
 Pendamichtitup, if or when they did hear. 
 
 Pendamakpanne, if or when I had heard 
 Pendamanpanne, if or when thou hadst heard 
 Pendankpanne, if or when he had heard 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 Pendamenkpanne, if or when we had heard 
 Pendamekpanne, if or when ye had heard 
 Pendamichtitpanne, if or when they had heard. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Pendamaktsch, if or when I shall hear 
 E'pendamantsch, if or when thou shalt hear 
 Pendanktsch, if or when he shall hear 
 
 Plural. 
 Pendamenketsch, it or when we shall hear 
 Pendamequetsch, if or when ye shall hear 
 Pendamichtitetsch, if or when they shall hear. 
 
 NEGATIVE FORM. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta n'pendamowi, I do not hear 
 Atta k'pendamowi, thou dost not hear 
 Atta pendamowi, he does not hear 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta n'pendamowuneen, we do not hear 
 Atta k'pendamohumowi, ye do not hear 
 Atta pendamowunewo, they do not hear. 
 
OF THE LENN1 LENAPB INDIANS. 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 99 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta n'pendamowip, I did not hear 
 Atta k'pendamowip, thou didst not hear 
 Atta pendamowip, he did not hear 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta n'pendamenenap, we did not hear 
 Atta k'pendamowunewoap, ye did not hear 
 Atta pendamo wune woap, they did not hear. 
 
 Future 
 
 Singular. 
 Mattatsch n'pendamowi, I shall or will not hear 
 Mattatsch k'pendamowi, thou shalt or wilt not 
 
 hear 
 Mattatsch pendamowi, he shall or will not hear 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Mattatsch pendamowuneen, we shall or will not 
 
 hear 
 Mattatsch k'pendamohumowi, ye shall or will 
 
 not hear 
 Mattatsch pepdamowunewo, they shall or will 
 
 not hear. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta n'pendamowak, if or when I do not hear 
 
 Atta|pendainowane,if or when thou dostnot hear 
 Atta pendamoque, if or when he does not hear 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta pendamo wenke, if or when we do not hear 
 Atta pendamoweque, if or when ye do not hear 
 Atta pendamichtite, if or when they do not hear. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta pendamowakup, if or when I have not 
 
 heard 
 Atta pendamowannup, if or when thou hast not 
 
 heard 
 Atta pendamokup, if or when he has not heard 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Atta pendamowenkup, if or when we have not 
 
 heard 
 Atta k'pendamowekup, if or when ye have not 
 
 heard 
 Atta pendamichtitup, if or when they have not 
 
 heard. 
 
 Atta pendamowakpanne, if or when I had not 
 
 heard 
 Atta k'pendamo wanpanne, if or when thou hadst 
 
 not heard 
 Atta pendamowakpanne, if or when he had not 
 
 heard 
 
 Pluperfect. % 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta pendamowenkpanne, if or when we had not 
 
 heard 
 Atta k'pendamowekpanne, if or when ye had 
 
 not heard 
 Atta pendamichtitpanne, if or when they had 
 
 not heard. 
 
 Atta n'pendamowaktsch, if or when I shall or 
 
 will not hear 
 Atta k'pendamowantsch, if or when thou shalt 
 
 or wilt not hear 
 Atta pendamoquetsch, if or when he shall or will 
 
 not hear 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta pendamowenketsch, if or when we shall or 
 
 will not hear 
 Atta pendamowequetsch, if or when ye shall or 
 
 will not hear 
 Atta pendamiehtitetsch, if or when they shall or 
 
 will not hear. 
 
 25 
 
100 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 PASSIVE FORM.— POSITIVE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pendaxi, I am heard 
 K'pendaxi, thou art heard 
 Pendaxu or pendaquol, he is heard 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'pendaxihhena, we are heard 
 K'pendaxibhimo, ye are heard 
 Pendaxowak, they are heard. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pendaxihump, I was heard 
 K'pendaxihump, thou wast heard 
 Pendaxop or pendaquachtop, he was heard 
 
 Plural. 
 N'pendaxihhenakup, we were heard 
 K'pendaxihhimoakup, ye were heard 
 Pendaxopannik, they were heard. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pendaxitsch, I shall or will be heard 
 K'pendaxitsch, thou shalt or wilt be heard 
 Pen d axu tsch or pendaquo tsch , he shall or will be 
 heard 
 
 Plural. 
 N'pendaxihhenatsch, we shall or will be heard 
 K'pendaxihhimotsch, ye shall or will be heard 
 Pendaxiwiwaktsch, they shall or will be heard. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Pendaxia, if or when I am heard 
 Pendaxiane, if or when thou art heard 
 Pendaxite, if or when he is heard 
 
 Plural. 
 Pendaxiyenke, if or when we are heard 
 Pendaxiyeque, if or when ye are heard 
 Pendaxichtite, if or when they are heard. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Pendaxiakup, if or when I was heard 
 Pendaxiannup, if or when thou wert heard 
 Pendaxitup, if or when he was heard 
 
 Plural. 
 Pendaxiyenkup, if or when we were heard 
 Pendaxiyekup, if or when ye were heard 
 Pendaxichtitup, if or when tbey were heard. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 Pendaxiakpanne, if or when I had been heard 
 Pendaxianpanne, if or when thou hadst been 
 
 heard 
 Pendaxitpanne, if or when he had been heard 
 
 Plural. 
 Pendaxiyenkpanne, if or when we had been 
 
 heard 
 Pendaxiyekpanne, if or when ye had been heard 
 Pendaxichtitpanne, if or when they had been 
 
 heard. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. . Plural. 
 
 N'pendaxiatsch, if or when I shall be heard Pendaxiyenketsch, if or when we shall be heard 
 
 X'pendaxianetsch, if or when thou shalt be heard i Pendaxiyequetsch, if or when ye shall be heard 
 Pendaxitetsch, if or when he shall be heard i Pendaxichtitetsch, if or when they shall be 
 
 - ' heard. 
 
OF THE LEWNI liBNAPB INDIANS. 
 
 [fourth conjugation;] 
 
 141 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta n'pendaxiwi, I am not heard 
 Matta k'pendaxiwi, thou art not heard 
 Matta pendaxuwi, he is not heard 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta pendaxiwuneen, we are not heard 
 Matta k'pendaxihhumo, ye are not heard 
 Matfa pendaxiwiwak, they are not heard. 
 
 Preterite, 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta n'pendaxiwip, I was not heard 
 Matta k'pendaxiwip, thou wast not heard 
 Matta pendaxuwip or peudaquachtowip, he was 
 not heard 
 
 Plural. 
 4atta n'pendaxiwiwunap, we were not heard 
 vlatta k'pendaxiwunewo, ye were not heard 
 Matta pendaxiwipannik, they were not heard. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Mattatsch n'pendaxiwi, I shall or will not be 
 
 heard 
 Mattatsch k'pendaxiwi, thou shall or wilt not 
 
 be heard 
 Mattatsch pendaxuwi, he shall or will not be 
 
 heard 
 
 Plural. 
 Mattatsch n'pendasiwuneen, we shall or will 
 
 not be heard 
 Mattatsch k'pendaxihhumo, ye shall or will not 
 
 be heard 
 Mattatsch pendaxiwiwak, they shall or will not 
 
 be heard. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Atta n'pendaxiwa, if or when I am not heard 
 Atta pendaxiwanne, if or when thou art not 
 
 heard 
 Atta pendaxite, if or when he is not heard 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta pendaxiwenke, if or when we are not 
 
 heard 
 Atta pendaxiweque, if or when ye are not heard 
 Atta pendaxichtite, if or when they are not. 
 
 heard. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta n'pendaxiwakup, if or when I was not 
 
 heard 
 Atta k'pendaxiwannup, if or when thou wertnot 
 
 heard ,-. | 
 
 Atta pendaxitup, if or when he was not heard 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta pendaxiwenkup, if or when ,jve were nqt 
 
 heard 
 Atta pendaxiwekup, if or when ye were not 
 
 /heard 
 Atta pendaxichtitup, if or when they were not 
 
 heard. 
 
 Pluperfect, 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta pendaxiwakpanne, if or when I had not 
 
 been heard 
 Atta pendaxiwanpanne, if or when thou 'hadstl 
 
 not been heard 
 Atta pendaxuwipanne, if or when he had not 
 been heard ! 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta pendaxiwenkparme, if or when we had 
 
 notbeen heard > 
 Atta penilaxi wekpanne, if or when ye had not 
 
 been heard 
 Atta pendaxichtitpanne, if or when they had not 
 
 been heard. 
 
102 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta pendaxiwaktsch, if or when I shall not be 
 
 heard 
 Atta pendaxi wannetsch, if or when thou shalt not 
 
 be heard 
 Atta pendaxiquetsch, if or when he shall not 
 
 be heard 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta pendaxiwenketsch, if or when we shall not 
 
 be heard 
 Atta pendaxiwenquetsch, if or when ye shall not 
 
 be heard 
 Atta pendaxichtitetsch, if or when they shall not 
 
 be heard. 
 
 RECIPROCAL FORM.— POSITIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Pendawachtin, to hear each other 
 
 j Preterite. 
 
 I Pendawachtinep, to have heard each other 
 
 Future. 
 
 Pendawaktitsch, to be to hear each other. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Pendawacbtineen or pendawachtihhena, we hear 
 
 each other 
 Pendawachtihhimo, ye hear each other 
 Pendawachtowak, they hear each other. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Pendawachtihhenakup or pendawachtihhumme- 
 
 nakup, we heard each other 
 Pendawachtohhimoakup, ye heard each other 
 Peridawachtopannik, they heard each other. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Pendawachtihhenatsch, we shall or will hear each other 
 Pendawachtihhimotsch, ye shall or will hear each other 
 Pendawachtowaktsch, they shall or will hear each other. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Pendawachtik, hear ye there (what the other is 
 
 saying) 
 Pendawachtitam, let us hear each other. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Penda wachtichti tetsch, they shall or must or let 
 them hear each other. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present- 
 
 Pendawachtiyenk or pendawachtiyenque, if or 
 
 when we hear each other . 
 Pendawachtiyek or pendawachtiyeque, if or 
 
 when ye hear each other 
 Pendawachtichtit, if or when they hear each 
 
 other. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Pendawachtiyenkup, if or when we heard each 
 
 other 
 Pendawachtiyekup, if or when ye heard each 
 
 other 
 Pendawachtichtitup, if or when they heard each 
 
 other. 
 
OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 103 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Pendawachtiyenkpanne, if or when we had 
 
 heard each other 
 Pendawachtiyekpanne, if or when ye had heard 
 
 each 'other 
 Pendawachtichtitpanne, if or when they had 
 
 heard each other. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Pendawachtiyenketsch, if or when we shall or 
 
 will hear each other 
 Pendawachtiyequetsch, if or when ye shall or 
 
 will hear each other 
 Pendawaktichtitetsch, if or when they shall or 
 
 will hear each other. 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Atta pendawachtiwuneen, we do not hear each 
 
 other 
 Atta pendawachtiwek, ye do not hear each other 
 Atta pendawachtiwiwak, they do not hear each 
 
 other. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta pendawachtiwunenap, we did not hear 
 
 each other 
 Atta pendawachtiwihhiruoap, ye did not hear 
 
 each other 
 Atta pendawachtiwipannik, they did not hear 
 
 each other. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Atta pendawachtiwuneentsch, we shall or will not hear each other 
 Atta pendawachtiwihhimotsch, ye shall or will not hear each other 
 Atta pendawachtiwiwaktsch, they shall or will not hear each other. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Katschi* pendawachtihek, do not hear each other. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Atta pendawachtiwenke, if or when we do not 
 
 hear each other 
 Atta pendawachtiweque, if or when ye do not 
 
 hear each other 
 Atta pendawachtichtite, if or when they do not 
 
 hear each other. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta pendawachtiwenkup, if or when we did 
 not hear each other ^ 
 
 Atta pendawachtiwekup, if or whtSta ye did not 
 hear each other 
 
 Atta pendawachtichtitup, if or when they did 
 not hear each other. 
 
 i 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Atta pendawachtiwenkpanne, if or when we had 
 
 not heard each other 
 Atta pendawachtiwekpanne, if or when ye had 
 
 not heard each other 
 Atta pendawachtichtitpanne, if or when they 
 
 had not heard each other. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Atta pendawachtiwenketsch, if or when we 
 shall or will not hear each other 
 
 Atta pendawachti wequetscb, if or when ye shall 
 or will not hear each other 
 
 Atta pendawachtichtitetsch, if or when they 
 shall or will not hear each other. 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — Katschi is a word of prohibition, as in English don't, and appears 
 to be compounded from atta. The Author classes it with adverbs. - See below, adverbs of nega- 
 tion, prohibitum. 
 
 26 
 
104 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fotjkth conjugation.] 
 
 REFLECTED FORM. 
 
 There is also a reflected form of the verb : 
 As Likewise 
 
 N'penda n'hakey*, I hear myself 
 K'pendawa hakey, thou hearest thyaelf 
 Pendawawall hokeyall, he hears himself. 
 
 N'dahowala n'hakey, I love myself 
 K'dahowala hakey, thou lovest thyself 
 W'dahoalawall or w'dahowalawall hokeyall, he 
 loves himself. 
 
 PERSONAL FORMS OR TRANSITIONS. 
 
 In order to enable the reader to compare these forms in the positive 
 and negative voices, they are placed here in opposition to each other. 
 
 FIRST TRANSITION. 
 
 First Person Singular, I. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 POSITIVE. 
 
 K'pendolen, I hear thee 
 N'pendawa, I hear him 
 K'pendolohhumo, I hear you 
 N'pendawawak, 1 hear them. 
 
 K'pendolenep, I did hear thee 
 N'pendawap, I did hear him 
 K'pendolohhumoap, I did hear you 
 N'pendawoapannik, I did hear them. 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 Atta k'pendolowi, I hear not thee 
 Atta n'pendawawi, I hear not him 
 Atta k'pendolhummowi, I hear not you 
 Atta n'pendawawiwak, I hear not them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta k'pendolowip, I heard not thee 
 Atta n'pendawawip, I heard not him 
 Atta k'pendolohummowip, I heard not you. 
 Atta n'pendawawipannik, I heard not them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'pehdolentsch, I shall or wilr hear thee 
 N'pendawatsch, I shall or will hear him 
 K'peridolohhumotsch, I shall or will hear you 
 N'pendawawaktsch, I shall or will hear them. 
 
 Atta k'pendolowitsch, I shall or will not hear 
 
 thee 
 Atta n'pendawawitsch, I shall or will not hear 
 
 him 
 Atta k'pendolhummowitsch, I shall or will not 
 
 hear you 
 Atta n'pendawawiwaktsch, I shall or will not 
 
 hear them. 
 
 * Note by the Translator.— Nhakey signifies literally " my body," which is synonymous to 
 " my person," or " myself " In English we say " somebody, nobody," for aliquis, nemo. There ■ 
 is nothing barbarous in those words. 
 
OF THE TjBNNI LEN/VPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 105 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 POSITIVE. 
 
 K'pendolane, if or when I hear thee 
 Pendawake, if or when I hear him 
 Pendoleque, if or when I hear you 
 Pendawawake, if or when I hear them. 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 Atta pendolowonne , if or when I -do not hear thee 
 Atta n'pendamawonne, if or when I do not hear 
 
 him 
 Atta n'pendoleque, if or when I do not hear you 
 Atta n'pendawawiwonne, if or when I do not hear 
 
 them. 
 
 E'pendolannup, if or when I did hear thee 
 N'pendawakup, if or when I did hear him 
 N'pendolekup, if or when I did hear you 
 K'pendawawakup, if or when I did hear them 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta pendolowonnup, if or when I did not hear 
 
 thee 
 Atta n'pendamawonnup, if or when I did not 
 
 hear him 
 Atta n'pendolekup, if or when I did not hear 
 
 you 
 Atta n'pendawawiwonnup, if or when I did not 
 
 hear them. 
 
 K'pendolanpanne, if or when I had heard thee 
 N'pendawakpanne, if or when I had heard him 
 Pendolekpanne, if or when I had heard you 
 N'pendawawakpanne, if or when I had heard 
 them. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Atta pendolowonpanne, if or when I had not 
 
 heard thee 
 Atta n'pendamawonpanne, if or when I had not 
 
 heard him 
 Atta pendolowekpanne, if or when I had not 
 
 heard you 
 Atta pendawawipanne, if or when I had not 
 
 heard them. 
 
 K'pendolanetsch, if or when I -shall or will hear 
 
 thee 
 N'pendawanetsch , if or when I shall or will hear 
 
 him 
 N'pendolequetsch, if or when I shall or will hear 
 
 you 
 N'pendawawaketsch, if or when I shall or will 
 
 hear them. 
 
 FutWd 
 
 Atta n'pendolowonnetsch, if or when I shall or 
 
 will not hear thee 
 Atta n'pendamawonnetsch, if or when I shall or 
 
 will not hear him 
 Atta n'pendolowequetsch, if or when I shall or 
 
 will not hear ynu 
 Atta n'pendawawiwonnetsch, if or whenl shall 
 
 or will not hear them. 
 
 SECQJVD TRANSITION. 
 
 Second Person Singular, THOU. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 K'pendawi, thou nearest me 
 K'pendawa, thou hearest him 
 K'pendawihhena, thou hearest us 
 K'pendawawak, thou hearest them. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Atta k'pendawiwi, thou hearest not me 
 Atta k'pendawawi, thou hearest not him 
 Atta k'pendawiwuneen, thou hearest not us 
 Atta k'pendawawiwak, thou hearest not them. 
 
106 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 POSITIVE. 
 
 K'pendawinep, thou didst hear me 
 K'pendawap, thou didst hear him 
 K'pendawihhenap, thou didst hear us 
 K'pendawoapannik, thou didst hear them. 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 Atta k'pendawiwip, thou didst not hear me 
 Atta k'pendawawip, thou didst not hear him 
 Atta k'pendawiwunap, thou didst not hear us 
 Atta k'pendawawapannik, thou didst not hear 
 them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'pendawitsch, thou shalt or wilt hear me 
 K'pendawatsch, thou shalt or wilt hear him 
 K'pendawihhenatsch, thou shalt or wilt hear us 
 K'pendawawaktsch, thou shalt or wilt hear them. 
 
 Atta k'pendawiwitsch, thou shalt or wilt not 
 
 hear me 
 Atta k'pendawawitsch, thou shalt or wilt not 
 
 hear him 
 Atta k'pendawiwuneentsch, thou shalt or wilt 
 
 not hear us 
 Atta k'pendawawiwaktsch, thou shalt or wilt 
 
 not hear them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 K'pendawiyane, if or when thou hearest me 
 K'pendawane, if or when thou hearest him 
 K'pendawiyenk, rf or when thou hearest us 
 E'pendawawonne, if or when thou hearest them. 
 
 Atta k'pendawiwonne, if or when thou dost not 
 
 hear me 
 Atta k'pendawawonne, if or when thou dost not 
 
 hear him 
 Atta k'pendakuwenque, if or when thou dost not 
 
 hear us 
 Atta k'pendawawiwonne, if or when thou dost 
 
 not hear them. 
 
 Preterite 
 
 K'pendawiyanup, if or when thou didst hear 
 
 me 
 K'pendawanup, if or when thou didst hear him 
 K'pendawiyenkup, if or when thou didst hear 
 
 K'pendawawawonnup, if or when thou didst 
 hear them. 
 
 Atta k'pendawiwonnup, if or when thou didst 
 
 not hear me 
 Atta k'pendawawonnup, if or when thou didst 
 
 not hear him 
 Atta k'pendawenkup, if or when thou didst not 
 
 hear us 
 Atta k'pendawawiwonnup, if or when thou didst 
 
 not hear them. 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 K'pendawiyanpanne, if or when thou hadst 
 
 heard me 
 K'pendawanpanne, if or when thou hadst heard 
 
 him 
 K'pendawiyenkpanne, if or when thou hadst 
 
 heard us 
 
 Atta k'pendawiwonpanne, if or when thou hadst 
 
 not heard me 
 Atta k'pendawonpanne, if or when thou hadst 
 
 not heard him 
 Atta k'pendawenkpanne, if or when thou hadst 
 
 not heard us 
 
 K'pendawawawonpanne, if or when thou hadst j Atta k'pendawawiwonpanne, if or when thou 
 heard them. | hadst not heard them. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 107 
 
 Future. 
 
 POSITIVE. 
 
 K'pendawiyanetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt 
 
 hear me 
 K'pendawanetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt 
 
 hear him 
 K'pendawiyenquetsch, if or when thou shalt or 
 
 wilt hear us 
 K'pendawawawonDetsch, if or when thou shalt 
 
 or wilt hear them. 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 Atta k'pendawiwonnetsch, if or when thou shalt 
 
 or wilt not hear me 
 Atta k'pendawawonnetsch, if or when thou shalt 
 
 or wilt not hear him 
 Atta k'pendawenquetsch, if or when thou shalt 
 
 or wilt not hear us 
 Atta k'pendawawiwonnetsch, if or when thou 
 
 shalt or wilt not hear them. 
 
 THIRD TRANSITION. 
 
 Third Person Singular, HE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 . N'pendagun, he hears me 
 K'pendagun, he hears thee 
 Pendagol, he hears him 
 Pendaguna, he hears us 
 K'pendaguwa, he hears you 
 Pendawawak, he hears them. 
 
 Atta n'pendagowi, he does not hear me 
 Atta k'pendagowi, he does not hear thee 
 Atta pendamawi, he does not hear him 
 Atta pendaguwuneen, he does not hear us 
 Atta k'pendaguwawi, he does not hear you 
 Atta pendawawiwak, he does not hear them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'pendagop, he heard or did hear me 
 K'pendagop, he heard or did hear thee 
 Pendagop or pendap, he heard or did hear him 
 N'pendagunap, he heard or did hear us 
 Pendaguwap, he heard or did hear you 
 Pendawapannik, he heard or did hear them. 
 
 Atta n'pendagowip, he did not hear me 
 Atta pendagowip, he did not hear thee 
 Atta pendawawip, he, did not hear him 
 Atta n'pendaguwuneenap, he did not hear us 
 Atta pendaguwawip, he did not hear you 
 Atta n'pendawawipannik, he did not hear them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'pendaguktsch, he shall or will hear me 
 K'pendaguktsch, he shall or will hear thee 
 Pendagoltsch, he shall or will hear him 
 N'pendagunatsch, he shall or will hear us 
 K'pendaguwatsch, he shall or will hear you 
 Pendawawaktsch, he shall or will hear them. 
 
 Atta n'pendagowitsch, he shall or will not hear 
 
 me 
 Atta k'pendagowitsch, he shall or will not hear 
 
 thee 
 Atta pendawawitsch, he shall or will not hear 
 
 him 
 Atta pendaguwuneentsch, he shall or will not 
 
 hear us , 
 
 Atta k'pendaguwawitsch, he shall or will not 
 
 hear you 
 Atta pendawawiwaktsch, he shall or will not 
 
 hear them. 
 
 27 
 
108 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 POSITIVE. 
 
 Pendawite, if or when he heareth me 
 Pendagake, if or when he heareth thee 
 Pendawate, if or when he heareth him 
 Pendaquenke, if or when he heareth ua 
 Pendaqueque, if or when he heareth you 
 Pendawachtite, if or when he heareth them. 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 Atta pendawique, if or when he does not hear 
 
 me 
 Atta pendaquonne, if or when he does not hear 
 
 thee 
 Atta pendawaque,.,if or when he does not hear 
 
 him 
 Atta pendaguwonque, if or when he does not 
 
 hear us 
 Atta pendaguweque, if or when he does not hear 
 
 you 
 Atta pendawachtique, if or when he does not 
 
 hear them. 
 
 i Preterite 
 
 Pendawitup, if or when he did hear me 
 Pendagukup, if or when he did hear thee 
 Pendawatup, if or when he did hear him 
 Pendaquenkup, if or when he did hear us 
 Pendaquekup, if or when he did ltear you 
 Pendawachtitup, if or when he did hear them. 
 
 Atta pendawikup, if or when he did not hear me 
 Atta pendaquonnup, if or when he did not hear 
 
 thee 
 Atta pendawakup, if or when he did not hear him 
 Atta pendawenkup, if or when he did not hear 
 
 Atta pendawekup, if or when he did not hear you 
 Atta pendawachtitup, if or when he did not hear 
 them. 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Pendawitpanne if or when he had heard me 
 Pendagukpanne, if or when he had heard thee 
 Pendawatpanne, if or when he had heard him 
 Peodayquenkpanne, if or when he had heard us 
 Pendaquekpanne, if or when he had-heard you 
 Pendawachtitpanne, if or when he had heard 
 them. 
 
 Atta pendawikpanne, if or when he had not 
 
 heard me 
 Atta pendaquonpanne, if or when he had not 
 
 heard thee 
 Atta pendawatpanne, if or when he had not 
 
 heard him 
 Atta pendaquenkpanne, if'o? - when he had not 
 
 heard us 
 Atta pendaquekpanne, if or when he had not 
 
 heard you 
 Atta pendawachtitpanne, if or when he had not 
 
 heard them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Pendawitetsch, if or when he shall or will hear 
 
 me 
 Pendaguketsch, if or when he shall or will hear 
 
 thee 
 Pendawatetsch or pendagoltsch, if or when he 
 
 shall or will hear him 
 Pendaquenquetsch, if or when he shall or will 
 
 hear us 
 Pendaqueketsch, if or when he shall or will hear 
 
 - you 
 Pendawachtitsch, if or when he shall or will 
 
 hear them. 
 
 Attatsch* pendawite, if or when he shall or will 
 
 not hear me 
 Attatsch pendaquonne, if or when he shall or 
 
 will not hear thee 
 Attatsch pendawaque, if or when he shall or will 
 
 not hear him 
 Attatsch pendaquenque, if or when he shall or 
 
 will not hear us 
 Attatsch pendaqueque, if or when he shall or 
 
 will not hear you 
 Attatsch pendawachtite, if or when he shall or 
 
 will not hear them. 
 
 * JVote by the Translator.— Here the sign of the future tense, tsch, is suffixed to the adverb 
 not, and not to the verb. 
 
OP THE LENNI I,ENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 i09 
 
 • '" '/".'.S'l 
 
 FOURTH TRANSITION. 
 
 First Person Plural, WE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 POSITIVE. 
 
 K'pendoloneen, we hear thee 
 N'pendawaneen, we hear him 
 K'pendolohhena, we hear you 
 N'pendawawunanak, we hear them. 
 
 E'pendolonenap or k'pendolohhcnap, we did 
 
 hear thee 
 N'pendawawunap, we did hear him 
 K'pendolohhenap, we did hear you 
 N'pendamawunapannik, we did hear them. 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 Atta k'pendolowuneen, we do not hear thee 
 Atta n'pendawawuneen, we do not hear hutl 
 Atta k'pendolhummowuneen, we do not hear 
 
 you 
 Atta n'pendawawunanak, we do not hear them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta k'pendolowuneenap, we did not hear thee 
 Atta n'pendamawunap, we did not hear him 
 Atta k'pendpfhummowuneenap, we did not hear 
 
 you 
 Atta n'pendawawuneenak, we did not hear them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'pendoloneentsch or k'pendolohhena tsch, we 
 
 shall or will hear thee 
 N'pendawaneentsch, we shall or will hear him 
 K'pendolohhumenatsch, we shall or will hear 
 
 you 
 N'pendawawunanaktsch, we shall or will hear 
 
 them. 
 
 Atta k'pendolowuneentsch, we shall or will not 
 
 hear thee 
 Atta n'pendawawuneentsch, we shall or will not 
 
 hear him 
 Atta k'pendolhumowuneentsch, we shall or will 
 
 not hear you 
 Atta n'pendawawu&aktscb, we shall or will pot 
 
 hear them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Pendolenque, if or when we hear thee 
 Pendamanque, if or when we hear him 
 Pendolohhumanque, if or when we hear you 
 Pendawamanque, if or when we hear them. 
 
 Atta pendolowonque, if or ^Vlien we d6 not Jie'ir 
 
 thee 
 Atta pendawanque, if or when we do n6t near 
 
 him 
 Atta k'pendamolanque, if of When we do not 
 
 hear you 
 Atta pendawawonque, or if when we do not hear 
 
 them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Pendolenkup, if or when we did hear thee 
 Pendamankup, if or when we did hear him 
 Pendolhumankup, if or when we did hear you 
 Pendawawankup, if or when we did hear them. 
 
 Atta pendolo wonkup, if or when- we did hot hear 
 
 thee >' 
 
 Atta pendawankup, if or when we did not hear 
 
 him 
 Atta k'pendamolekup, if or when we did not 
 
 hear you 
 Atta pendawawankup, if or when we did not hear 
 
 them. 
 
HO 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 POSITIVE. 
 
 Pendolenkpanne, if or when we had heard thee 
 Pendamenkpanne, if or when we had heard him 
 Pendolhumopanne, if or when we had heard you 
 Pendamawawonkpanne, if or when we had 
 heard them. 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 Atta pendotowankpanne, if or" when we had not 
 
 ' heard thee 
 Atta pendawankpanne, if or when we had not 
 
 heard him 
 Atta pendamowekpanne, if or when we had not 
 
 heard you 
 Atta pendawawonkpanne, if or when we had not 
 
 heard them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Pendolenquetsch, if or when we shall or will 
 
 hear thee 
 Pendamanquetsch, if or when we shall or will 
 
 hear him 
 Pendolohummanquetsch, if or when we shall or 
 
 will hear you 
 Pendawawanquetsch, if or when we shall or 
 
 will hear them. 
 
 Atta pendolowunatsch, if or when we shall or 
 
 will not hear thee 
 Atta pendawanquetsch, if or when we shall or 
 
 will not hear him 
 Atta pendamolhummotsch, if or when we shall 
 
 or will not hear you 
 Atta pendawawonquetsch. if or when we shall 
 
 or will not hear them. 
 
 FIFTH TRANSITION. 
 
 Second Person Plural, YE. 
 
 K'pendawihhimo, ye hear me 
 K'pendawawa, ye hear him 
 K'pendawihhenook, ye hear us 
 K'pendawawak, ye hear them. 
 
 U'pendawihhimoakup, ye heard or did hear me 
 K'pendawawap, ye heard or did hear him 
 K'pendawihummenakup, ye heard or did hear 
 
 us 
 K'pendawawapannik, ye heard or did hear them. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Atta k'pendawihhimo, ye do not hear me 
 Atta k'pendawawunewo, ye do not hear him 
 Atta k' pcndawi wuna, ye do not hear us 
 Atta k'pendawawunewo, ye do not hear them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta k'pendawihhimoap, ye heard not or did not 
 
 hear me 
 Atta k'pendawawihhimoap, ye heard not or did 
 
 not hear him 
 Atta k'pendawiwunap, ye heard not or did not 
 
 hear us 
 Atta k'pendawawunewo, ye heard not or -did 
 
 not hear them. 
 
 K'pendawihhimotsch, ye shall or will hear me 
 K'pendawawa'tsch, ye shall or will hear him 
 K'pendawihummenatsch, ye shall or will hear 
 
 us 
 K'pendawanewotscb, ye shall or will hear them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Atta k'pendawihhimotsch, ye shall or will not 
 
 hear me 
 Atta k'pendawawunewotsch, ye shall or will not 
 
 hear him 
 Atta k'pendawihummenatsch, ye shall or will 
 
 not hear us 
 Atta k'pendawawunewotsch, ye shall or will not 
 
 hear them. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 Ill 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 POSITIVE. 
 
 K'pendolane, if or when ye hear me 
 Pendawake, if or when ye hear him 
 Pendoleque, if or when ye hear us 
 Pendawawake, if or when ye hear them. 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 Atta pendawiweke, if or when ye do not hear 
 
 me 
 Atta pendamaweque, if or when ye do not hear 
 
 him 
 Atta pendawonquek, if or when ye do not hear 
 
 us , 
 
 Atta pendawiweque, if or when ye do not hear 
 
 them. 
 
 K'pendolannup, if or when ye did hear me 
 N'pendawakup, if or when ye did hear him 
 N'pendolekup, if or when ye did hear us 
 N'pendawawakup, if or when ye did hear them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta pendawiwekup, if or when ye did "not hear 
 
 me 
 Atta pendamawekup, if or when ye did not hear 
 
 him 
 Atta pendawonquekup, if or when ye did not 
 
 hear us 
 Atta pendawawiwekup, if or when ye did not 
 
 hear them. 
 
 K'pendolanpanne, if or when ye had heard me 
 N'pendawakpanne, if or when ye had heard him 
 Pendolekpanne, if or when ye had heard us 
 N'pendawawakpanne, if or when ye had heard 
 them. 
 
 Pluperfect. , 
 
 Atta pendawiwekpanne, if or when ye had not 
 
 heard me 
 Atta pendamawekpanne; if or when ye had not 
 
 heard him 
 Atta pendawonquekpanne, if or when he had not 
 
 heard us 
 Atta pendawawiwekpanne, if or when ye had 
 
 not heard them. 
 
 Future 
 
 K'pendolanetsch, if or when ye shall or will hear 
 
 N'pendawanetsch, if or when ye shall or will 
 
 hear him 
 N'pendolequetsch, if or when ye shall or will 
 
 hear us 
 N'pendawawaketsch, if or when ye shall or will 
 
 hear them. 
 
 Atta pendawiwektsch, if or when ye shall or will 
 
 not hear me 
 Atta pendamawequetsch, if or when ye shall or 
 
 will not hear him 
 Atta pendawonquektsch, if or when ye shall or 
 
 will not hear us 
 Atta pendawawiwektsch, if or when ye shall or 
 
 will not hear them. 
 
 38 
 
US 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 SIXTH TRANSITION. 
 
 Third Person Plural, THEY. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 POSITIVE. 
 
 N'pendagenewo, they hear me 
 K'pendaguwak, they hear thee 
 Pendawawall, they heard him 
 pendageneen, they heard us 
 Pendaguwawak, they heard you 
 Pendawawawall, they heard them. 
 
 N'pendagopannik, they heard me 
 K'pendagopannik, they heard thee 
 Pendawawoapannik, they heard him 
 Pendagunapannik, they heard us 
 Pendaguwapannik, they heard you 
 Pendawawapannik, they heard them. 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 Atta n'pendaguwiwak, they do not hear me 
 Atta k'pendaguwiwak, they do not hear thee 
 Atta pendawawiwak, they do not hear him 
 Atta pendaguwuneen, they do not hear us 
 Atta pendaguwawiwak, they do not hear you 
 Atta pendawawiwak, they do not hear them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta n'pendagewip, they did not hear me 
 Atta k'pendagewip, they did not hear thee 
 Atta pendawawip, they did not hear him 
 Atta pendagiiwunenap, they did not hear us 
 Atta pendaguwawip, they did not hear you 
 Atta pendawawip a unik, they did not hear them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'pendagunewotsch, they shall or will hear me 
 Pendagooktsch, they shall or will hear thee 
 Pendawawaktsch, they shall or will hear him 
 Pendaguneentsch, they shall or will hear us 
 Pendaguhhimotsch, they shall or will hear you 
 Pendawawaktsch, (hey shall or will hear them. 
 
 Atta n'pendaguwiwaktsch, they shall or will hot 
 
 hear me 
 Atta k'pendaguwiwaktsch, they shall or will not 
 
 hear thee 
 Atta pendawawiwaktsch, they shall or will not 
 
 hear him 
 Atta pendaguwuneentsch, they shall or will not 
 
 near us 
 Atta pendaguwawitsch, they shall or will not 
 
 hear you 
 Atta pendawawiwaktsch, they shall or will not 
 
 hear them. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Sing. Pendawil, do thou hear me 
 
 Sing, with Plur. Pendawik, do ye hear me 
 
 Plur. Pendawineen, hear us. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 113 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 POSITIVE. 
 
 Pencjamichtite, if or when they hear me 
 Pendageyane, if or when they hear thee 
 Pendawachtit, if or when they hear him 
 Pendageyenke, if or when they hear us 
 Pendageyeque, if or when they hear you 
 Pendawawachtite, if or when they hear them. 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 Atta pendamichtike, if or when they do not 
 
 hear me 
 Atta pendagewichtike, if or when they do not 
 
 hear thee 
 Atta pendawachtike, if or when they do not hear 
 
 him 
 Atta pendagewenke, if or when they do not 
 
 hear us 
 Atta pendageweque, if or when they do not 
 
 hear you 
 Atta pendawawachtite, if or when they do not 
 
 hear them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Pendamichtitup, if or when they heard me 
 Pendageyannup, if or when they heard thee 
 Pendawachtitup, if or when they heard him 
 Pendageyenkup, if or when they heard us 
 Pendageyekup, if or when they heard you 
 Pendawawachtitup, if or when they heard them. 
 
 Atta pendagewichtikup, if or when they do not 
 
 hear me 
 Atta k'pendagewichtikup, if or when they do not 
 
 hear thee 
 Atta pendawachtikup, if or when they do not 
 
 hear him 
 Atta pendakewenkup, if or when they do not 
 
 hear us 
 Atta pendagewekup, if or when they do not hear 
 
 you 
 Atta pendawawichtitup, if or when they do not 
 
 hear them. 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Pendamichtitpanne, if or when they had heard 
 
 me 
 Pendakhittitpanne, if or when they had heard 
 
 thee 
 Pendawachtitpanne, if or when they had heard 
 
 him 
 Pendageyenkpanne, if or when they had heard 
 
 us 
 Pendageyekpanne, if or when they had heard 
 
 you 
 PendawawacMtpanne, if or when they iad 
 
 heard them. 
 
 Atta pendamichtikpanne, if or when they had not 
 
 heard me 
 Atta pendagewichtikpanne, if or when they had 
 
 not heard thee 
 Atta pendawaehtikpanne, if or when they had 
 
 not heard him 
 Atta pendagewenkpanne, if or when they had 
 
 not heard us 
 Atta k'pendagewekpanne, if or when they had 
 
 not heard you 
 Atta pendawawichtikpanne, if or when they had 
 
 ■not heard them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Pendamichtitsch, if or .when they shall or will 
 
 hear me . 
 Pendakhittitsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 hear thee 
 Pendawachtitsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 hear him 
 Pendageyenktsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 hear us 
 Pendageyektsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 hear you 
 Pendawawachtitsch, if or when they shall or 
 
 will hear them. 
 
 Atta pendamichtiketsch, if or when they shall or 
 
 will not hear me 
 Atta penda£ewichtiktsch, if or when they shall 
 
 or will not hear thee 
 Atta pendawawichtiktsch, if or when they shall 
 
 or will not hear him 
 Atta pendagewenktsch, if or when they shall or 
 
 will hear us 
 Atta pendagewektsch, if or when they shall or 
 
 will hear you 
 Atta pendawawichtikctsch, if or when they shall 
 
 or will hear them. 
 
114 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 No. III. 
 
 Nihillatamen, I own or am master of. 
 
 ACTIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Nihillatamcn, I own 
 K'nihillatamen, thou ownest 
 Wnihillatamen, he owns 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillatameneen, we own 
 K'nihillatohhimo, ye own 
 Nihillatamenewo, they own. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Nihillatameneep, I did own 
 K'nihillatameneep, thou didst own 
 W'nihillatameneep, he did own 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillatamohhummoakup, we did own 
 K'nihillatamohhummoakup, ye did own 
 Nihillatamenewoakup, they did own. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Nihillatamentsch, I shall or will own 
 K'nihillatainentsch, thou shalt or wilt own 
 Wunihillatamentsch, he shall or will own 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nihillatameneentsch, we shall or will own 
 K'nihillatamohhumotsch, ye shall or will own 
 Nihillatamenewotsch, they shall or will own. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillalil, own me, let me belong to thee 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillalineen, own us. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillatamane, if or when it belongs to me 
 K'nihillatamane, if or when it belongs to thee 
 Nihillatanke, if or when it belongs to him 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillatamenke, if or when it belongs to us 
 Nihillatameque, if or when it belongs to you 
 Nihillatamichtite, if or when it belongs to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillatamanup, if or when it belonged to me 
 K'nihillatamanup, if or when it belonged to thee 
 Nihillatankup, if or when it belonged to him 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillatamenkup, if or when it belonged to us 
 Nihillatamekup, if or when it belonged to you 
 Nihillatamichtitup, if or when it belonged to 
 them. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 115 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillatamanpanne, if or when it had belonged 
 
 to me 
 K 'nihillatamanpanne, if or when it had belonged 
 
 to thee 
 Nihillatankpanne, if or when it had belonged to 
 
 him 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nihillatamenkpanne, if or when it had belonged 
 to us 
 
 Nihillatamekpanne, if or when it had belonged 
 to you 
 
 Nihillatamichtitpanne, if or when it had belong- 
 ed to them. 
 
 The Future 
 Is like the present, with the addition of tsck. 
 
 Imperativo Caret. 
 
 PASSIVE FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 {The proper Infinitive Form is not given.) 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Singular. I Plural. 
 
 Nihillalgussid, he who is owned or under power Nihillalgussitschik, they who are owned or un- 
 
 I der power. 
 
 Nihillalgussi, I am owned 
 K'nihillalgussi, thou art owned 
 Nihillalgussu, he is owned 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nihillalgussihummena, we are owned 
 K'nihillalgussihhimo, ye are owned 
 Nihillalgussowak, they are owned. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillalgussihump, I was owned 
 K'nihillalgussihump, thou wast owned 
 Nihillalgussop, he was owned 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillalgussihhumroenakup, we were owned 
 K'nihilialgussihhimmoakup, ye were owned 
 Nihillalgussopannik, they were owned. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillalgussitsch, I shall or will be owned 
 K'nihillalgussitsch, thou shalt or wilt be owned 
 Nihillalgussutsch, he shall or will be owned 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nihillalgtissihummenotsch, we shall or will be 
 owned 
 
 K'nihillalgussihhimotsch, ye shall or will be 
 owned 
 
 Nihillalgussowaktsch, they shall or will be own- 
 ed. 
 
 39 
 
 Imperativo Caret. 
 
GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 illalgussiane, if or when I am owned 
 ihillalgussiane, if or when thou art owned 
 illalgussite, if or when he is owned 
 
 Plural. < 
 Nihillalgussiyenke, if or when we are owned 
 Nihillalgussiyeque, if or when ye are owned 
 Nihillalgussichtite, if or when they are owned. 
 
 illalgussiyannup, if or when I was owned 
 ihillalgussiyannup, if or when thou wert owned 
 illalgussitup, if or when he was owned 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillalgussiyenkup, if or when we were owned 
 Nihillalgussiyekup, if or when ye were owned 
 Nihillalgussichtitup.if or when they were owned. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 illalgussianpanne, if or when I had been 
 
 owned 
 ihillalgussianpanne, if or when thou hadst 
 
 been owned 
 illalgussitpanne, if or when he had been 
 
 owned , 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillalgussiyenkpanne, if or when we had been 
 
 owned 
 Nihillalgussiyekpanne, if or when ye had been 
 
 owned 
 Nihillalgussichtitpanne, if or when they had 
 
 been owned. 
 
 The Future 
 h like the present, adding tsch. 
 
 Imperativo Caret. 
 
 PERSONAL FORMS. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
 PARTICIPLES*. 
 
 Singular. 
 illalid, he who owns ine, my Lord, my master 
 illalquonk, he who owns thee, thy Lord 
 illalat, he who owns him, his Lord 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillalquenk, he who owns us, our Lord 
 Nihillalqueek, he who owns you, your Lord 
 Nihillalquichtit, he who owns them, their Lord. 
 
 Substantively in the Vocative case. 
 
 Singular. I Plural. 
 
 illalian, O thou my Lord ! ! Nihillaliyenk, thou our Lord ! 
 
 Hence the following verbal form : 
 
 Nihillalek, I am your Lord. 
 
 * See above, p. 141 in note. 
 
OF THE IjENNI EENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fourth conjugation.] 
 
 117 
 
 TRANSITIONS.— FIRST TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 K'nihillalel, I own, am the master of thee 
 Nihillala, I own him 
 
 Plural. 
 Nihillalek or k'nihillalellhummo, I own yon 
 Nihilialawak, I own them. 
 
 Singular. 
 K'nihillali, thou ownest me 
 K'nihillal, thou ownest him 
 
 Nihillaluk, he owns me 
 K'nibillaluk, he owns thee 
 W'nihillalawal), he owns him 
 
 SECOND TRANSITION. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 K'nihillalineen, thou ownest us 
 E'nihillalawak, thou ownest them. 
 
 THIRD TRANSITION. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 W'nihillalguneen or w'nihillalquenk, he owns 
 
 us 
 Wnihillalqueek he owns you 
 Wnihillalawak, he owns them. 
 
 FOURTH TRANSITION. 
 
 Singular. 
 K'nihillalellohhena, we own thee 
 Nihillalaneen, we own him 
 
 . Plural. 
 
 K'nihillalhummo, we own you 
 I Nihillalawuna, we own them. 
 
 FIFTH TRANSITION. 
 
 K'nihillalihhimo, ye own me 
 K'nihillalanewo, ye own him 
 
 Plural. 
 K'nihillalineen or k'nihillalihhena, ye own ub 
 K'nihillalawak, ye own them. 
 
 SIXTH TRANSITION. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nekamawa nihillalukgunewo or nihillalgunewa, 
 
 they own me 
 Nekamawa k'nihillalukgunewo or k'nihillalgu- 
 
 newo, they own thee - 
 
 Nekamawa w'nihillalawak, they own him 
 
 Plural 
 Nekamawa nihillalguna, they own us 
 Nekamawa k'nihillalguwa, they own you 
 Nekamawa nihilialawak, they own them. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nihillalil, own me, be thou my Lord 
 
 j Plural. 
 
 \ Nihillalineen, own us, be thou our Lord". 
 
118 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [or VERBS.] 
 
 iPtftn ©onjuaatttin. 
 
 Note by the Translator. — Of this conjugation, one verb alone is given : 
 Ahoalan, to love. It is conjugated through the Active, Passive, Perso- 
 nal, and Reciprocal forms, positive and negative. The negative transi- 
 tions, however, have been omitted in the Subjunctive mood. They are 
 left blank in the original, and were probably meant to have been filled 
 up by the Author. They therefore do not appear in this grammar. 
 
 Ahoajlan, to love. 
 
 ACTIVE FORM.— POSITIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ahoalan, to love. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'dahoala, I love 
 K'dahoala, thou lovest 
 Ahoaleu or w'dahoala, he loves 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dahoalaneen, we love 
 K'dahoalohhumo, ye love 
 Ahoalewak, they love. 
 
 N'dahoalep, I loved 
 K'dahoalep, thou lovedst 
 Ahoalep, he loved 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'dahoalennenap, we loved 
 K'dahoalohhummoap, ye loved 
 Ahoalepannik, they loved. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'dahoalatsch, I shall or will love 
 K'dahoalatsch, thou shall or wilt love 
 Ahoaleuchtsch, he shall or will love 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dahoaleneentsch, we shall or will love 
 K'dahoalohhummotsch, ye shall or will love 
 Ahoalewaktsch, they shall or will love. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. I Plural. 
 
 Ahoal, love thou I Ahoalek, love ye. 
 
OP THE tENNI I.ENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 119 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular., 
 Aboalak, if or when I love 
 Ahoalanne, if or when thou lovest 
 Ehoalat, if or when he loves 
 
 Phtral. 
 Ahoalenke, if or when we love 
 Ahoaleque, if or when ye love 
 Ahoalachtite, if or when they love. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ahoalachkup, if or when I loved 
 Ahoalannup, if or when thou lovedst 
 Ehoalachtup, if or when he loved 
 
 IAhoalenkup, if or when we loved 
 Ahoalekup, if of when ye loved « 
 Ahoalachtitup, if or when they loved. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Ahoalakpanne, if or when I had loved 
 Ahoalanpanne, if or when thou hadst loved 
 Ehoalatpanne, if or when he had loved 
 
 Plural. 
 Ahoalenkpanne, if or when we bad loved 
 Ahoalekpanne, if or when ye had loved 
 Ahoalachtitpanne, if or when they had loved. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Ahoalaktsch, if or when I shall or will love 
 Ahoalantsch, if or when thou shall or wilt love 
 
 Ehoalatsch, if or when he-shall or will love 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ahoalenketsch, if or when we shall or will love 
 
 Ahoalequetsch, if or when ye shall or will love 
 
 Ahoalichtitetsch, if or when they snail or will 
 
 love. 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Atta ahoalan, not to love. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 (Not given.) 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta n'dahoalawi, I do not love 
 Atta k'dahoalawi, thou dost not love 
 Atta ahoalewi, he does not love 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta n'dahoalawuneen, we do not love 
 Atta k'dahoalawunewo, ye do not love 
 Atta ahoalewiwak, they do not love. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta n'dahoalawip, I did not love 
 Atta k'dahoalawip, thou didst not love 
 Atta ahoalewip, he did not love 
 
 30 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Atta n'dahoalowunenap, we did not love 
 Atta k'dahoalowunewo, ye did not love 
 Atta ahoalewipannik, they did not love. 
 
ISO 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 Atta n'dahoalawitsch, I shall or will not love 
 Atta k'dahoalawitsch, thou shalt or wilt not love 
 Atta ahoalewitsch, he shall or will not love 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Atta n'dahoalawuneentsch, we shall or will not 
 
 love 
 Atta k'dahoalawunewotsch, ye shall or will not 
 
 love 
 Atta ahoalawiwaktsch, they shall or will not love. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Singular. j Plural. 
 
 Atta n'dahoalawanne, if or when I do not love I Atta ahoalawonk, if or when we do not love 
 Atta k'dahoalawonne, if or when thou dost not Atta ahoalawek, if or when ye do not love 
 
 love j Atta ahoalachtik, if or when they do not love. 
 
 Atta ehoalaque, if or when he does not love I 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta ahoalawonkup, if or when we did not love 
 Atta ahoalawekup, if or when ye* did not love 
 Atta ahoalachtikup, if or when they did not love. 
 
 Atta ahoalawonnup, if or when I did not love 
 Atta ahoalawonnup, if or when thou didst not 
 
 love 
 Atta ehoalakup, if or when he did not love 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta ahoalawakpanne, if or when I had not loved 
 Atta ahoalawonpanne, if or when thou hadst not 
 
 loved 
 Atta ahoalakpanne, if or when he had not loved 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta ahoalawonkpanne, if or when we had not 
 
 loved 
 Atta ahoalawekpanne, if or when ye had not 
 
 loved 
 Atta ahoalachtikpanne, if or when they had not 
 
 loved. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta n'dahoalawiwonne, if or when I shall or 
 
 will not love 
 Atta k'dahoalawonnetsch, if or when thou shalt 
 
 or wilt not love 
 Atta ehowalequetsch, if or when he shall or 
 
 will not love 
 
 Future. 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta ahoalawonktsch, if or when we shall or 
 
 will not love 
 Atta ahoalawektsch, if or when ye shall or will 
 
 not love 
 Atta ahoalachtiktsch, if or when they shall or 
 
 will not love. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 121 
 
 PASSIVE FORM.— POSITIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 N 'dahoalgussi, I am loved 
 K'dahoalgussi, thou art loved 
 Ahoalgussi, he is not loved 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dahoalgussihhena, we are loved 
 K'dahoalgussihbimo, ye are loved 
 Ahoalgussowak, they are loved. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'dahoalgussihump, I was loved 
 K'dahoalgussinep, thou wast loved 
 W'dahoulgussop, he was loved 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dahoalgussihhenap, we were not loved 
 K'dahoalgussihhimoakup, ye were not loved 
 W'dahoalgussopannik, they were not loved. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'dahoalgussitsch, I shall or will be loved 
 K'dahoalgussitsch, thou shall or wilt be loved 
 Ahoalgussutscb, he shall or will be loved 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N'dahoalgussihhenatsch, we shall or will be 
 
 loved 
 K'dahoalgussihhimotsch, ye shall or will be loved 
 Ahoalgussiwiwaktsch, they shall or will be loved. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 " Present. 
 
 Ahoalgussiya, if or when I am loved 
 Ahoalgussiyen, if or when thou art loved 
 Ahoalgussite, if or when he is loved 
 
 I Plural. 
 
 Ahoalguasiyenk, if or when we are loved 
 Ahoalgussiyek, if or when ye are loved 
 
 I Ahoalgussichtit, if or when they are loved. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Ahoalgussiyakup, if or when I was loved 
 Ahoalgussiyannup, if or when thou wast loved 
 Ahoalgussitup, if or when he was loved 
 
 Plural. 
 Ahoalgussiyenkup, if or when we were loved 
 Ahoalgussiyekup, if or when ye were loved 
 Ahoalgussichtitup, if or when they were loved. 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Singular. 
 Ahoalgussiyakpanne, if or when I had been loved 
 Ahoalgussiyanpanne, if or when thou hadst been 
 
 loved 
 Ahoalgussitpanne, if or when he had been loved 
 
 Plural. 
 Ahoalgnssiyenkpanne, if or when we had been 
 
 loved 
 Ahoalgussiyekpanne, if or when ye had been 
 
 loved 
 Ahoalgussichtitpanne, if or when they had been 
 
 loved. 
 
 Future: 
 
 Ahoalgussiyaktsch, if or when I shall or will be 
 
 loved 
 Ahoalgussiyantsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt 
 
 be loved 
 Ahoalgitsch, if or when he shall or will be loved 
 
 Plural. 
 Ahoalgussiyenktsch, if or when we shall or will 
 
 be loved 
 Ahoalgussiyektsch, if or when ye shall or will 
 
 be loved 
 Ahoalgussichtitseh, if or when they shall or 
 
 will be loved. 
 
132 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Atta n'dahoalgussiwi, I am not loved 
 Atta k'dahoalgussiwi, thou art not loved 
 Atta w'dahoaigussuwi, he is not loved 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Atta n'dahoalgussiwuneen, we are not loved 
 Atta k'dahoalgussiwihhimo, ye are not loved 
 Atta ahoalgussiwiwak, they are not loved. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta n'dahoalgussiwip, I was not loved 
 Atta k'dahoalgussiwlp, thou wast not loved 
 Atta w'dahoalgussiwip, he was not loved 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Atta n'dahoalgussiwunenap, we were not loved 
 Atta k'dahoalgussihhimoap, ye were not loved 
 Atta wMahoalgussiwipannik, they were not loved. 
 
 Future 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta n'dahoalgussiwitsch, I shall or will not be 
 
 loved 
 Atta k'dahoalgussiwitsch, thou shall or wilt not 
 
 be loved 
 Atta ahoalgussuwitsch, he shall or will not be 
 
 loved 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta n'dahoalgussiwuneentsch, we shall or will 
 
 not be loved 
 Atta k'dahoalgussiwunewotsch, ye shall or will 
 
 not be loved 
 Atta ahoalgussiwiwaktsch, they shall or will not 
 
 be loved. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Atta ahoalgussiwak, if or when I am not loved 
 Atta ahoalgussiwonne, if or when thou art not 
 
 loved 
 Atta ahoalgussique, if or when he is not loved 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Atta ahoalgussiwenk, if or when we are not loved 
 
 Atta ahoalgussiwek, if or when ye are not loved 
 
 Atta ahoalgussichtik, if or when they are not 
 
 loved. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Atta ahoalgussiwakup.iforwhenl was not loved 
 Atta ahoalgussiwonnup, if or when thou wast not 
 
 loved 
 Atta ahoalgussikup, if or when he was not loved 
 
 Plural. 
 4tta ahoalgussiwenkup, if or when we were not 
 
 loved 
 Atta ahoalgussiwekup, if or when ye were not 
 
 loved 
 Atta ahoalgussichtikup, if or when they were 
 
 not loved. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta ahoalgussiwakpanne, if or when I had not 
 
 been loved 
 Atta ahoalgussiwonpanne, if or when thou hadst 
 
 not been loved 
 Atta ahoalgussikpanne, if or when he had not 
 
 been loved 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta ahoalgussiwenkpanne, if or when we had 
 
 not been loved 
 Atta ahoalgussiwekpanne, if or when ye had not 
 
 been loved 
 Atta ohoalgussichtitpanne, if or when they had 
 
 not been loved. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 123 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Atta ahoalgussiwaktsch, if or when I shall or 
 will not be loved 
 
 Plural. 
 Atta ahoalgussiwenktsch, if or when we shall or 
 will not be loved 
 
 Atta ahoalgussiwonktsch, if or when thou shalt , Atta ahoalgussiwektsch, if or when ye shall or 
 
 or wilt not be loved will not be loved 
 
 Atta ahoalgussiktsch, if or when he shall or will Atta ahoalgussichtitsch, if or when they shall or 
 
 not be loved I will not be loved. 
 
 PEMSOJVAL FORMS.— POSITIVE. 
 FIRST TRANSITION. 
 
 K'dahoatell, I love thee 
 N'dahoala, I love him 
 
 E'dahoalennep, I loved thee 
 N'dahoalap, I loved him 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 IK'dahoalohhummo, I love you 
 N'dahoaiawak, 1 love them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 E'dahoalohhummoap, I loved you 
 | N'dahoalapannik, I loved them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'dahoalelltsch, I shall or will love thee 
 N'dahoalauchtsch, I shall or will love him 
 
 K'dahoalohhummotsch, I shall or will love you 
 | N'dahoala waktsch, I shall or will love them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Ahoalanne, if or when I love thee 
 Ahoalachte, if or when I love him 
 
 Ahoalannup, if or when I loved thee 
 Ahoalachtup, if or when I loved him 
 
 I Ahoaleque, if or when I love you 
 Ahoalachtite, if or when I love them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Ahoalekup, if or when I loved you 
 Ahoalachtup, if or when I loved them. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Aboalanpanne, if or when I had loved thee I Ahoalekpanne, if or when I had loved you 
 
 Ahoalachtuppanne, if or when I had loved him | Ahoalatpanne, if or when I had loved them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Ahoalanhetsch, if or when I shall or will love 
 
 thee 
 Ahoalachtetsch, if or when I shall or will love 
 
 him 
 
 Ahoalequetsch, if or when I shall or will love 
 
 you 
 Ahoalachtitetsch, if or when I shall or will love 
 
 them. 
 
 31 
 
12+ 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 SECOND TRANSITION. 
 
 K'dahoali, thou lovest me 
 K'dahoala, thou lovest him 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'dahoalinep, thou didst love me 
 K'dahoalap, thou didst love him 
 
 ■ K'dahoalineen, thou lovest us 
 | K'dahoala wak, thou lovest them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 I K'dahoalihhenap, thou didst love us 
 I K'dahoalapannik, thou didst love them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'dahoalitsch, thou shalt or wilt love me 
 K'dahoalauchtsch, thou shalt or wilt love him 
 
 K'dahoalihhenatsch, thou shalt or wilt love us 
 K'dahoalawaktsch, thou shalt or wilt love them. 
 
 Ahoalil, love thou me 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 | Ahoalineen, love thou us. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Ahoaliyanne, if or when thou lovest me 
 K'dahoalanne, if or when thou lovest him 
 
 Ahoaliyenkc, if or when thou lovest us 
 K'dahoalachte, if or when thou lovest them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Ahoaliyann up, if or when thou didst love me 
 Ahoalannup, if or when thou didst love him 
 
 Ahoaliyenkup, if or when thou didst love us 
 K'dahoalachtup, if or when thou didst love 
 them. 
 
 Ahoaliyanpanne, if or when thou hadst loved me 
 Ahoalanpanne, if or when thou hadst loved him 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Ahoaliyenkpanne, if or when thou hadst loyed us 
 K'dahoalachtuppaime, if or when thou hadst 
 loved them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Ahoaliyannetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt 
 
 love me 
 Ahoalachtetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt 
 
 love him 
 
 Ahoaliyenketsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt 
 
 love us 
 Ahoalachtitetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt 
 
 love them. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 125 
 
 THIRD TRANSITION. 
 
 Ehoalid, he who loves me 
 Ehoalat, he who loves him 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Ehoalquenk, he who loyes us 
 Ehoalquek, he who loves you 
 Ehoalquichtit, he who loves them. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 N'dahoaluk, he loves me 
 K'dahoaluk, he loves thee 
 W'dahoalawall, he loves him 
 
 N'dahoalgunep, he loved me 
 K'dahoalgunep, he loved thee 
 Wdahoalap, he loved him 
 
 W'dahoalguna, he loves us 
 Wjdahoalguwa, he loves you 
 'tF'da'hoalawak, he loves them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'dahoalgunap, he loved lis 
 K'dahoalguwap, he loved you 
 Wdahoaiapannik, he loved them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'dahoalauohtsch, he shall or will love me • 
 K'dahoalauchtsch, he shall or will love thee 
 W'dahoalauchtsch, he shall or will love him 
 
 N'dahoalgunatsch, he shall or will love us 
 W'dahoalguwatsch, he shall or will love you 
 { W'dahoalawaktsch, he. shall or will love them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Ahoalite, if or when he loves me 
 Ahoalquonne, if or when he loves thee 
 Ahoalale, if or when he loves hjm 
 
 Ahoalitup, if or when, he loved me 
 Ahoaliyonnup, if or when he loved thee 
 Ahoalatuj>j.if ojr when he lovedhim 
 
 Ahoalquenke, if or when he loves us 
 Ahoaiqueque, if .or whence loves.ypu 
 Ahoajachtite.jtf or when he.lpyes iten. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 ,4hpalque,nfeup, jf or when he lojjed us 
 Ahoalquekup, if or when he loved. you 
 Atvoala.c]pjtitiip, jf or, Mhen he Jovftd *hem. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Ahoalitpanne, if or when he had loved me 
 Ahoalanpanne, if or when he had l?xe,d thee 
 Ahoalatpanne, if or when he had loved him 
 
 Ahoalquenkpanne, if or when he had loyed us 
 Ahoalquekpanne, if or when he had loved you 
 Ahoalachtitpanne, if or when he had loved them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Ahoaletsch, if or when he shall or will love me 
 Ahoalquonnetsch, if or when he shall or will love 
 
 thee 
 Ahoalechtetsch, if or when he .shall or wjU love 
 
 him 
 
 Ahpalquenketsch, if or when he shall or will 
 
 love us 
 Ahoalquequetsch, if, or when he shall or will 
 
 love you 
 Ahoalechtitetsch, if or when he shall or will love 
 
 them. 
 
426 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 FOURTH TRANSITION. 
 
 K'dahoalenneen, we love thee 
 N'dahoalawuna, we love him 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 j K'dahoalohummena, we love you 
 I N'dahoalowawuna, we love them. 
 
 K'dahoalennenap, we loved thee 
 N'dahoalawunap, we loved him 
 
 K'dahoalohhenatsch, we shall or will love thee 
 N'dahoalawunatsch, we shall or will love him 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 IK'daholohummenap, we loved you 
 N'dahoalawawunap, we loved them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'dahoalohummenatsch, we shall or will love 
 
 you 
 N'dahoalawawunatsch, we shall or will love them . 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'dahoalenk, if or when we love thee 
 Ahoalanque, if or when we love him 
 
 Ahoalenkup, if or when we loved thee 
 Ahoalankup, if or when we loved him 
 
 ! Ahoaleque, if or when we love you 
 Ahoalawonque, if or when we love them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 ! Ahoalekup, if or when we loved you 
 
 I Ahoalawawonkup, if or when we loved them. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 K'dahoalenkpanne, if or when we had loved thee I Ahoalekpanhe, if or when we had loved you 
 Ahoalankpanne, if or when we had loved him | Ahoalawonkpanne, if or when we had loved them. 
 
 Future 
 
 Ahoalenquetsch, if or when we shall or will I Ahoalequetsch, if or when we shall or will love 
 
 love thee I you 
 
 Ahoalanquetsch, if or when we shall or will Ahoalawonquetsch, if or when we shall or will 
 
 love him love them. / 
 
 FIFTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'dahoalihhimo, ye love me 
 K'dahoalanewo, ye love him 
 
 K'dahoalihhena, ye love us 
 K'dahoalawawak, ye love them. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] - 
 
 isr 
 
 ITdahoalihhimoap, ye loved me 
 K'dahoalanewoap, ye loved him 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'dahoalihhenap, ye loved us 
 K'dahoalawapannik, ye loved them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'dahoalihhimotsch, ye shall or will love me 
 K'dahoalanewotsch, ye shall or will love him 
 
 K'dahoalihhenatsch, he shall or will love us 
 l K'dahoalawawaktsch, ye shall or will love them. 
 
 Ahoalik, love you me 
 Ahoalo, love you him 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ahoalineen, love you us 
 Ahoalatam, love you them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Ahoaliyeque, if or when ye love me 
 Ahoalaque, if or when ye love him 
 
 Ahoaliyekup, if or when ye loved me 
 Ahoalachtup, if or when ye loved him 
 
 Ahoaliyenke, if or when ye love us 
 J Ahoalachtike, if or when ye love them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 I Ahoaliyenkup, if or when ye loved us 
 
 I Ahoalachtiyekup, if or when ye loved them. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Ahoaliy ekpanne, if or when ye had loved me 
 Ahoalekpanne, if or when ye had loved him 
 
 I Ahoaliyenkpanne, if or when ye had loved us 
 | Ahoalachtitpanne, if or when ye had loved them. 
 
 Future 
 
 Aboaliyequetsch, if or when ye shall or will love 
 
 Ahoalaquetsch, if or when ye shall or will love 
 * him 
 
 Ahoaliyenquetsch, if or when ye shall or will 
 
 love us . 
 Ahoalachiiquetsch, if or when ye shall or will 
 
 love them. 
 
 SIXTH TIWJVSITWJV. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 N'dahoalgenewo, they love me 
 K'dahoalgenewo, they love thee 
 Wdahoalanewo, they love him 
 
 N'dahoalgenewoap, they did love me 
 K'dahoalgenewoap, they did love thee 
 W'dahoalgenewoap, they did love him 
 
 N'dahoalgehhena, they love us 
 K'dahoalgehhimo, they love you 
 W'dahoaiawawak, they love them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'dahoalgehhenap, they did love us 
 K'dahoalgehhimoap, they did love you 
 Wdahoalawapannik, they did love them. 
 
 32 
 
138 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 N'dahoalgenewotsch, they shall or will love me 
 K'dahoalgenewotsch or k'dahoalgetsch, they 
 
 shall or will love thee 
 W'dahoalanewotsch, they shall or will love him 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'dahoalgehhenatsoh, they shall or will love us 
 K'dahoalgehhimotsch, they shall or will love you 
 W'dahoalawawaktsch, they shall or will love 
 them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Ahoalinke, if or when they love me 
 Ahoalquonne, if or when they love thee 
 Ehoalinde, if or when they love him 
 
 Ehoalquenke, if or when they love us 
 Ehoalqueque, if or when they love you 
 Ehoalachtite, if or when they love them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Ehoalinkup, if or when they loved me 
 Ehoalquonnup, if or when they loved thee 
 Ehoalindup, if or when they love him 
 
 Ehoalquenkup, if or when they loved us 
 Ehoalquekup, it or when they loved you 
 Ehoalachtitup, ff or when they loved them. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Ehoalinkpanne, if or when they had loved me 
 Ehoalquonpanne, if or when they had loved thee 
 Ehoalindpanne, if or when they had loved him 
 
 Ehoalquenkpanne, if or when they had loved us 
 Ehoalquekpanne, if or when they had loved you 
 Ehoalachtitpanne, if " or when they had loved 
 them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Ehoalinketsch, if or when they shall or will love 
 
 me 
 Ehoalquonnetschj if or when they shall or will 
 
 love thee 
 Ehoalindetsch, if or when they shall or will love 
 
 him 
 
 Ehoalquenketsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 love us 
 Ehoalquequetsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 love you 
 Ehoalachtitetsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 love them. 
 
 PERSONAL FORMS.— NEGATIVE. 
 FIRST TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 K'dahoalowi*, I do not love thee 
 N'dahoalawi, I do not love him 
 
 K'dahoalellowip, I did not love thee 
 N'dahoalawip, I did not love him 
 
 K'dahoalohhumo, I do not love you 
 N'dahoalawiwak, I do not love them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 ; K'dahoalohhumowip, I did not love you 
 | N'dahoalawipannik, I did not love them. 
 
 Atta or Matta prefixed throughout. 
 
OF THE LENNI EENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 1S9 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'dahoalellowitsch, I shall or will not love thee 
 N'dahoalawitsch, I shall or will not love him 
 
 K'dahoalohhumowitsch, I shall or will not love 
 
 you 
 N'dahowalawiwaktsch, I shall or will not love 
 
 them. ' 
 
 /The Pluperfect and the Subjunctive are not given in any of the Tran- 
 sitions. 
 
 SECOND TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 K'dahoaliwi, thou dost not love me 
 K'dahoalawi, thou dost not love him 
 
 K'dahoaliwip, thou didst not love me 
 K'dahoalawip, thou didst not love him 
 
 K'dahoaliwuneen, thou dost not love us 
 K'dahoaliwiwak, thou dost not love them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 ;'dal 
 
 ^'dahoaluwipannik, thou didst not love them. 
 
 IK'dahoaliwunenap, thou didst not love us 
 K'd " 
 
 E'dahoaliwitsch, thou shalt or wilt not love me 
 K'dahoalawitsch, thou shalt or wilt not love him 
 
 Future. . i 
 
 K'dahouliwuneentsch, thou shalt or wilt not love 
 
 K'dahoalawiwaktsch, thou shalt or wilt not love 
 them. 
 
 THIRD TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 N'dahoalguwi, he does not love me 
 K'dahoalguwi, he does not love thee 
 Wdahoalawi, he does not love him 
 
 N'dahoalguwip, he did not love me 
 K'dahoalguwip, he did not love thee 
 Wdahoalawip, he did not love him 
 
 N'dahoalguwuneen, he does not love us 
 K'dahoalguwawi, he does not love you 
 W'dahoalwiwak, he does not love them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'dahoalguwunenap, he did not love us 
 K'dahoalguwawip, he did not love you 
 W'dahoalawipannik, he did not love them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'dahoalguwitsch, he shall or will no.t love me , 
 K'dahoalguwitsch, he shall or will not love 
 
 thee 
 W'dahoalawitsch, he shall or will not love him 
 
 N'dahoalguwuneentsch, he shall or will not 
 
 love us 
 K'dahoalguwawitschj he. .shall or. will not love 
 
 you 
 Wdahoalawiwaktsch, he shall or will not love 
 »' them. 
 
130 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 FOURTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 K'dahoalowuneen, we do not love thee 
 N'dahoalawuneen, we do not love him 
 
 l K'dahoalohhummowuneen, we do not love you 
 i N'dahoalawunena, he does not love them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'dahoalowunenap, we did not love thee I K'dahoalohhummowunenap, we did not love you 
 
 N'dahoalawunenap, we did not love him | N'dahoalawawunenap, we did not love them. 
 
 K'dahoalowuneen tsch , we shall or will not love 
 
 thee 
 N'dahoalawuneentsch, we shall or will not love 
 
 him 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'dahoalohhummowuntsch, we shall or will not 
 
 love you 
 N'dahoalawunanetsch, we shall or will not love 
 
 them. 
 
 FIFTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Presents 
 
 K'dahoalihhimowi, ye do not love me 
 K'dahoalawiwa, ye do not love him 
 
 K'dahoalihhimowip, ye did not love me 
 K'dahoalawiwoap, ye did not love him 
 
 K'dahoalihhinowitsch, ye shall or will not love me 
 K'dahowalawiwatscb, ye shall or will not love him 
 
 IK'dahoaliwunena, ye do not love us 
 K'dahoalawiwak, ye do not love them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'dahoalihhimowunap, ye did not love us 
 K'dahoalawipannik, ye did not love them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'dahoaliwuneentsch, ye shall or will not love us 
 K'dahoalawiwaktsch, ye shall or will not love 
 them. 
 
 SIXTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 N'dahoalguwiwak, they do not love me 
 K'dahoalguwiwak, they do not love thee 
 Wdahoalawiwak, they do not love him 
 
 N'dahoalguwuneen, they do not love us 
 K'dahoalguwunewo, they do not love you 
 Wdahoalawiwak, they do not love them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'dahoalgewipannik, they did not love me 
 K'dahoalgewipannik, they did not love thee 
 W'dahoalawipannik, they did not love him 
 
 N'dahoalguwunenap, they did not love us 
 K'dahoalguwunenap, they did not love you 
 YVIdahoaiawawipannik, they did not love them. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 131 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'dahoalguwiwaktsch, they shall or will not 
 
 love me 
 K'dahoalguwi waktsch, they shall or will not love 
 
 thee 
 W'dahoala wi waktsch, they shall or will not love 
 
 him 
 
 N'dahoalguwuneentsch, they shall or will not 
 
 love us 
 E'dahoalguwunewotsch, they shall or will not 
 
 love you 
 Wdahoalawawiwaktsch, they shall or will not 
 
 love them. 
 
 RECIPROCAL FORM.— POSITIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ahoaltin, to love one another. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 N'dahoaltineen, we love one another 
 K'dahoaltihhimo, ye love one another 
 Ahoaltowak, they love one another. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'dahoaltihhenap, we loved one another 
 K'dahoaltihhimmoap, ye loved one another 
 Ahoaltopannik, they loved one another. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Ahoaltineentsch, we shall or will love each other. 
 E'dahoaltihhimotsch, ye shall or will love each other 
 Ahoaltowaktsch, they shall or will love each other. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ahoaltik, love ye each other 
 
 J Plural. 
 
 Ahoaltitam, let us love each other. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Ahoaltiyenk, that we may love each other 
 Ahoaltiyek, that ye may love each other 
 Ahoaltichtit, that they may love each other. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Ahoaltiyenkpanne, if or when we had loved 
 
 each other 
 Ahoaltiyekpanne, if or when ye had loved each 
 
 other 
 Ahoaltichtitpanne, if or when they had loved 
 
 each other. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Ahoaltiyenkup, that or as we have loved each 
 
 other 
 Ahoaltiyekup, that or as ye have loved each other 
 Ahoaltichtitup, that or as they have loved each 
 
 other. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Ahoaltiyenketsch, as we shall or will love each 
 
 other 
 Ahoaltiyeketsch, as ye shall or will love each 
 
 other 
 Ahoaltichti tetsch, as they shall or will love each 
 
 other. 
 
 33 
 
132 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [fifth conjugation.] 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Matta ahoaltin, not to love each other. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present- 
 
 Matta n'dahoaltiwuneen, we do not love each 
 
 other 
 Matta k'dahoaltiwihhimo, ye do not love each 
 
 other 
 Matta ahoaltiwiwak, they do not love each other. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Matta n'dahoaltiwunenap, we did not love each 
 
 other 
 Matta k'dahoaltiwihhiminoap, ye did not love 
 
 each other 
 Matta ahoaltiwipannik, they did not love each 
 
 other. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Mattatsch n'dahoaltiwuneen, we shall or will not love each other 
 Mattatsch k'dahoaltiwihhimo, ye shall or will not love each other 
 Mattatsch ahoaltiwiwak, they shall or will not love each other. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD- 
 
 Present. 
 
 Matta ahoaltiwenk, when or as we may not 
 
 love each other 
 Matta ahoaltiwek, when or as ye may not love 
 
 each other 
 Matta ahoaltichtik, when or as .they may not love 
 
 each other. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Matta ahoaltiwenkpanne, if or when we had 
 
 not loved each other 
 Matta ahoaltiwekpanne, if or when ye had not 
 
 loved each other 
 Matta ahoaltichtikpanne, if or when they had 
 
 not loved each other. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Matta ahoaltiwenkup, when or as we have not 
 
 loved each other 
 Matta ahoaltiwekup, when or as ye have not 
 
 loved each other 
 Malta ahoaltichtikup, when or as they have, not 
 
 loved each other. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Mattatsch ahoaltiwenk, when or as we shall or 
 
 will not love each other 
 Mattatsch ahoaltiwek, when or as ye shall or 
 
 will not love each other 
 Mattatsch ahoaltichtik, when or as they shall or 
 
 will not love each other. 
 
 The Reciprocal, Forms of Verhs are distinguished by their Infinitive 
 termination in tin, as in the following examples : 
 
 Pendawachtin, to hear each other 
 Pennawachtin, to look at each other 
 Nostawachtin, to understand each other 
 Neuchtin, to see each other 
 Mochtenalittin, to fight with each other 
 Schinginawachtin, schingaltin, to hate each other 
 Pakantin, to bos (fight with fists) with each other 
 
 Nilch tin, to strike each other dead 
 Eenhawachrin, to pay, satisfy each other 
 Witahentin, to help each other 
 N'galtin, to quit each other 
 Pakitatamawachtin, to forgive each other 
 Wulaptonaltin, to be reconciled to each other 
 Aptonaltin, to speak with each other 
 
OF THE LENNI IiENAPB INDIANS. 
 
 [sixth conjugation.] 
 
 133 
 
 Littin, to say to or among each other 
 Mattaptonaltin, to scold, abuse each other 
 Nawalittin, to pursue each other 
 Wipantin, to eat with each other 
 Menachtin , to drink, tipple with each other 
 Witawentin, to live or dwell with each other 
 Gettemagelentin, to be kind, merciful to each 
 
 other 
 Miguntin, to remind each other 
 
 Manschaltin, to keep each other in remembrance 
 Sachgaguntin, to lead each other 
 Wipentin, to lie or sleep with each other 
 Ntutemawachtin, to question each other 
 Gettschihhilalittin, to betray each other 
 Wentschintin, to call each other 
 Ndoochtawachtin, to inquire of each other 
 Achgaehemawachtin, to share with each other 
 Waletittin, to inform^advise each other, &c. 
 
 St ptft €oit)urja tton. 
 
 Luen, to say or tell. 
 
 MOTIVE FORM— POSITIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Luen, to say 
 Luehund, one says 
 
 I Luehundi, they say or it is said. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'dellowe, I say 
 K'dellowe, thou sayest 
 Wdellowe, he says 
 
 Singular. 
 N'dellowenep, I said 
 K'dellowenep, thou saidst 
 W'dellowenep, he said 
 
 Plural. 
 N'delloweneen, we say 
 K'dellowehhimo, ye say 
 W'dellowenewo, they say. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dellowehhenap, we said 
 K'dellowehhimoap, ye said 
 W'dellowenewoap, they .said. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'dellowentsch, I shall or will say 
 K'dellowentsch, thou shalt or wilt say 
 Wdellowentsch, he shall or will say 
 
 Plural. 
 N'dellowehhenatsch, we shall or will say 
 K'dellowehhimotsch, ye shall or will say 
 W'dellowenewotscb, they shall or will say. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Lueya, if or when I say 
 Lueyane, if or when thou sayest 
 Luete, if or when he says 
 
 Plural. 
 Lueyenk, if or when we say 
 Lueyek, if or when ye say 
 Luecbtit, if or when they say. 
 
134. 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [sixth conjugation.] 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Lueyakup, if or when I said 
 Luey annup, if or when thou saidst 
 Luetup, if or when he said 
 
 Singular. 
 Lueyakpanne, if or when I had said 
 Lueyankpanne, if or when thou hadst said 
 Luetpanne, if or when he had said 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Lueyenkup, if or when we said 
 Lueyekup, if or when ye said 
 Luechtitup, if or when they said. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 Lueyenkpanne, if or when we had said 
 Lueyekpanne, if or when ye had said 
 Luechtitpanne, if or when they had said. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Lueyaktsch, if or when I shall or will say 
 Lueyanetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt say 
 Luetetsch, if or when he shall or will say 
 
 Plural. 
 Lueyenktsch, if or when we shall or will say 
 Lueyektsch, if or when ye shall or will say 
 Luechtitsch, if or when they shall or will say. 
 
 The negative voice of this verb is not given in this Grammar, nor is the 
 Imperative Mood in the positive. 
 
 PERSOJVJlL FORMS.— POSITIVE. 
 FIRST TRSJVSITIOJY. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'dellell, I say to thee 
 N'dellan, I say to him 
 
 K'dellenep, I said to thee 
 N'dellap, I said to him 
 
 K'delletsch, I shall or will say to thee 
 N'dellantsch, I shall or will say to him 
 
 I K'dellohumo, I say to you 
 I N'dellawak, I say to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'dellohumoap, I said to you 
 N'dellapannik, I said to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 : K'dellohummotsch, I shall or will say to you 
 | N'dellawaktsch, I shall or will say to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Lellane, if or when I say to thee 
 Lake, if or when I say to him 
 
 Lellanup, if or when I said to thee 
 Lakup, if or when I said to him 
 
 Lelleque, if or when I say to you 
 j Lakpanne, if or when I say to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Lellekup, if or when I said to you 
 Lekpanne, if or when I said to them. 
 
OF THE JLENNI EENAPE INDIANS. 135 
 
 [sixth conjugation.] 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Lellanpanne, if or when I had said to thee I Lellekpanne, if or when I had said to you 
 
 Lakuppanne, if or when I had said to him | Lakpanne, if or when I had said to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Lellanetsch, if or when I shall or will say to I Lellequetsch, if or when I shall or will say to 
 
 thee I you 
 
 Laketsch, if or when I shall or will say to him r Lakpannetsch, if or when I shall or will say to 
 
 | them. 
 
 SECOJVD TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'delli, thou sayest to me I K'dellineen, thou sayest to us 
 
 K'dellan, thou sayest to him | K'dellawak, thou sayest to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'dellineep, thou saidst to me I K'dellinenap, thou saidst to us , 
 
 K'dellanep, thou saidst to him | K'dellapannik, thou saidst to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'dellitsch, thou shalt or wilt say to me I K'dellihhenatsch, thou shalt or wilt say to us 
 
 K'dellan tsch, thou shalt or wilt say to him | K'dellawawaktsch, thou shalt or wilt say to them. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ill, say thou I Lo, say to him 
 
 Luel, say on, go on with your discourse j Mauwi lo, go and say to him 
 
 Lil, tell me / Lineen, say to us 
 
 Lime, tell me at some particular time j Litam, say to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Liyane, if or when thou sayest to me I Liyenkpanne, if or when thou sayest to us 
 
 Latpanne, if or when thou sayest to him | Lakpanne, if or when thou sayest to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Liyannup, if or whon thou saidst to me I Liyenkpannup, if or when thou saidst to us 
 
 Latpannup, if or when thou saidst to him j Lakpannup, if or when thou saidst to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Liyannetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt say 
 
 to me 
 Latpannetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt say 
 
 to him 
 
 34 
 
 Liyenquetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt say 
 
 to us 
 Lakpannetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt say 
 
 to them. 
 
136 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [sixth conjugation.] 
 
 THIRD TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 N'delluk, n'dellgun, he says to me 
 W'dellan, w'dellawall, he says to thee 
 K'dellgun, k'dellak, he says to him 
 
 N'dellgop, he said to me 
 K'dellgop, he said to thee 
 Wdellanep, he said to him 
 
 N'dellguna, lukguna, he says to us 
 K'dellguwa, k'dellgehhimo, he says to you 
 W'dellawak, he says to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'dellgunenap, n'dellgehhenap, he said to us 
 K'dellguwap, k'dellgehhimoap, he said to you 
 W'dellapannik, he said to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'dellgetsch, he shall or will say to me 
 K'dellgetsch, he. shall or will say to thee 
 W'dellantsch, he shall or will say to him 
 
 N'dellgunatsch, lukgunatsch, he shall or will 
 
 say to us 
 K'dellguwatsch, k'tellgehhimotsch, he shall or 
 
 will say to you 
 Wdellawaktsch, he shall or will say to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Lite, if or when he says to me 
 Lukquonne, if or when he says to thee 
 Late, if or when he says to him 
 
 Litup, if or when he said to me 
 Lukquonnup, if or when he said to thee 
 Latup, if or when he said to him 
 
 Lukquenke, if or when he says to us 
 Lukqueque, if or when he says to you 
 Lakhittite, if or when he says to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Lukquenkup, if or when he said to us 
 Lukquekup, if or when he said to you 
 Laach titup, if or when he said to them. 
 
 Litetsch, if or when he shall or will say to me 
 Lukquonnetsch, if or when he shall or will say 
 
 to thee 
 Latetsch, if or when he shall or will say to him 
 
 Future. 
 
 Lukquenketsch, if or when he shall or will say 
 
 to us 
 Lukqueketsch, if or when he shall or will say 
 
 to you 
 Laachtitetsch, if or when he shall or will say to 
 
 them. 
 
 FOURTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'delleneen, we say to thee 
 N'dell&neen, we say to him 
 
 K'dellohhena, we say to you 
 N'dellawawuna, we say to them. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [sixth conjugation.] 
 
 137 
 
 K'dellencnap, we said to thee 
 N'dellawunakup, we said to him 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'dellohhumoakup, we said to you 
 N'dellavvawapaimik, we said to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'delleneentsch, we shall or will say to thee 
 N'delleneentsch, we shall or will say to him 
 
 K'dellohhenatsch, we shall or will say to you 
 N'dellawawaktsch or n'dellawunantsch, we shall 
 or will say to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Lellanque, if or when we say to thee 
 Lanke, if or when we say to him 
 
 Lellankup, if or when we said to thee 
 Lankup, if or when we said to him 
 
 • Lellenque, if or when we say to you 
 j Lenke, if or when we say to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 I Lellenkup, if or when we said to you 
 I Lenkup, if or when we said to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Lellanquetsch, if or when we shall or will say to 
 
 thee 
 Lanketsch, if or when we shall or will say to 
 
 him 
 
 Lellenquetsch, if or when we shall or will say to 
 
 v , y° u 
 
 Delfiketsch, if or when we shall or will say to 
 them. 
 
 FIFTH TRANSITION. 
 
 E'dellihhimo, ye say to me 
 K'dellanewo, ye say to him 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'dellihhena, ye say to us 
 
 | K'dellawawak, ye say to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'dellihhimoakup, ye said to me 
 K'dellane woap, ye said to him 
 
 K'dellihhenakup, ye said to us 
 K'dellawoapannik, ye said to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 E'dellihhimotsch, ye shall or will say to me I K'dellihhenatsch, ye shall or will say to us 
 K'dellanewotsch, ye shall or will say to him | K'dellawawaktsch, ye shall or will say to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Liyeque, if or when ye say to me 
 Leque, if or when ye say to him 
 
 I Liyenque, if or when ye say to us 
 j Leke, if or when ye say to them. 
 
138 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [sixth conjugation.] 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Liyekup, if or when ye said to me 
 Lequekup, if or when ye said to him 
 
 I Liyenkup, if or when ye said to us 
 I Lekup, if or when ye said to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Liyequetsch, if or when ye shall or will say to 
 
 me 
 Lequetsch, if or when ye shall or will say to 
 
 him 
 
 Liyenquetsch, if or when ye shall or will say to 
 
 ' us 
 Leketsch, if or when ye shall or will say to 
 them. 
 
 SIXTH TRANSITION. 
 
 N'dellge, they say to me 
 K'dellge, they say to thee 
 W'dellanewo, they say to him 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 N'dellgenep, they said to me 
 K'dellgenep, they said to thee 
 Wdellanewoap, they said to him 
 
 N'dellgeneen or n'dellgehhena, they say to us 
 K'dellgehhimo, they say to you 
 W'dellanawak, they say to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'dellgetsch, they shall or will say to me 
 K'dellgetsch, they shall or will say to thee 
 Wdellanewotsch, they shall or will say to him 
 
 N'dellgenenap, they said to us 
 N'dellgehhimoap, they said to you 
 W'dellawawapannik, they said to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'dellgeneentsch or n'dellgehhenatsch, they 
 
 shall or will say to us 
 K'dellgehhimotsch, they shall or will say to you 
 W'dellawawaktsch, they shall or will say to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Lichtinke or linke, if or when they say to me 
 Lukquonne, if or when they say to thee 
 Lachtinke or linde, if or when they say to him 
 
 Lukquenke, if or when they say to us 
 Lukqueque, if or when they say to you 
 Lachtitpanne, if or when they say to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Lichtinkup or linkup, if or when they said to me 
 Lukquonkup, if or when they said to thee 
 Luchtinkup or lindup, if or when they said to 
 him 
 
 Lukquenkup, if or when they said to us 
 Lukquekup, if or when they said to you 
 Lachtitpannup, if or when they said to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Linketsch, if or when they shall or will say to 
 
 me 
 Lukquonnetsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 say to thee 
 Lindetsch, if or when they shall or will say to 
 
 him 
 
 Lukquenquetsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 say to us 
 Lukquequetsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 say to you 
 Lachtitetsch, if or when they shall or will say 
 
 to them. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [sixth conjugation.] 
 
 139 
 
 PERSONAL FORMS.— NEGATIVE. 
 FIRST TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 K'dellowi*, I do not say to thee 
 N'dellawi, I do not say to him 
 
 K'deUowip, I did not say to thee 
 N'dellawip, I did not say to him. 
 
 K'dellohhumowi, I do not say to you 
 N'dellawiwak, I do not say to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'dellohhumowap, I did not say to you 
 
 N'dellawipannik, I did not say to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'dellowitsch^I shall or will not say to thee I K'dellohhumowitsch, I shall or will not say to 
 N'dellawitsch, I shall or will not say to him j you 
 
 | N'dellawiwaktsch, I shall or will not say to them. 
 
 The Subjunctive Mood is wanting throughout. 
 
 SECOND TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'delliwi, thou sayest not to me 
 K'dellawi, thou sayest not to him 
 
 K'delliwip, thou didst not say to me 
 K'dellawip, thou didst not say to him 
 
 K'delliwitsch, thou shalt or wilt not say to me 
 K'dellawitsch, thou shalt or wilt not say to him 
 
 I K'delliwuneen, thou sayest not to us 
 | K'dellawi wak, thou sayest not to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 IK'delliwunenap, thou didst not say to us 
 K'dellawipannik, thou didst not say to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'delliwuneentsch, thou shalt or wilt not say to 
 
 K'dellawiwaktsch, thou shalt or wilt not say to 
 them. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Katschi liyeketsch, say not to me 
 Katschi liyannetsch, say not to him 
 
 Katschi liyenketsch, say not to us 
 Katschi liyanketsch, say not to them. 
 
 Atta or Matta prefixed throughout. 
 
 35 
 
140 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LAS GU AGE 
 
 [sixth conjugation.] 
 
 THIRD TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 N'dellguwi.he says not tome 
 K'dellguwi, he say9 not to thee 
 W'dellawi, he says not to him 
 
 N'dellguwuneen or lukguwuneen, he 
 
 to us 
 K'dellguvvawi, he says not to you 
 W'dellawiwak, he says not to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'dellguwip qr lukuwip, he did not say to me 
 K'dellguwip, he did not say to thee 
 Wdellawip, he did not say to him 
 
 Lukguwuneenep, he did not say to us 
 Lukguwawip, he did not say to you 
 W'dellawipannik, he did not say to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'dellguwitsch, he shall or will not say to me 
 K'dellguwitsch, he shall or will not say to thee 
 W'dellawitsch, he shall or will not say to him 
 
 Lukguwuneentsch or n'dellgunwuneentscl 
 
 shall or will not say to us 
 Lukguwawitsch, he shall or will not say to 
 Wdellawiwaktsch, he shall or will not si 
 
 them. 
 
 FOURTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 K'dellowuneen, we do not say to thee 
 N'dellawuneen, we do not say to him 
 
 K'dellowuneenap, we did not say to thee 
 N'dellawunap, we did not say to him 
 
 K'dellowuneentsch, we shall or will not saj to 
 
 thee 
 N'dellawunatsch, we shall or will not say to him 
 
 Present. 
 
 I K'dellohhummowuneen, we do not say to j 
 I N'dellawawuna, we do not say to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 I K'dellohhummowunap, we did not say to y 
 | N'dellawawunapannik, we did not say to tl 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'dellohhummowunatsch, we shall or wil 
 
 say to you 
 N'dellawunanatsch, we shall or will not si 
 
 them. 
 
 FIFTH TRANSITION. 
 (Not given.) 
 
OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [sixth conjugation.] 
 
 141 
 
 SIXTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 N'dellgewi, they do not say to me 
 K'dellgewi, they do not say to thee 
 Wdellawiwak, they do not say to him 
 
 I N'dellgeweneen, they do not say to us 
 
 K'dellgewunewo, they do not say to you 
 I W'dellawiwawall, they do not say to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'dellgewip, they did not say to me 
 K'dejlgewip, they did not say to thee 
 Wdellawipannik, they did not say to him 
 
 N'dellgewunenap, they did not say to us 
 K'dellgehhimowi, they did not say to you 
 Wdellawiwapannik, they did not say to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'dellgewitsch, they shall or will not say to me 
 K'dellgewitsch, they shall or will not say to thee 
 Wdellawiwaktsch, they shall or will not say to 
 him 
 
 N'dellgewuneentseh, they shall or will say to us 
 K'dellgewunewotsch, they shall or will say to 
 
 you 
 Wdellawiwawaktech, they shall or will say to 
 
 them. 
 
 RELATIVE FORM. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Eloweya, as or what I say 
 Eloweyan, as or what thou sayest 
 Elowit, as or what he says 
 
 Plural. 
 Eloweyenk, as or what we say 
 Eloweyek, as or what ye say 
 Elowechtit, as or what they say. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Eloweyakup, as or what I said 
 Eloweyannup, as or what thou saidst 
 Elowetup, as or what he said 
 
 Singular. 
 Eloweyakpanne, as or what I had said 
 Eloweyanpanne, as or what thou hadst said 
 Elowetpanne, as or what he had said 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Eloweyenkup, as or what we said 
 Eloweyekup, as or what ye said 
 Elowechtitup, as or what they said. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 Eloweyenkpanne, as or what we had said 
 Eloweyekpanne, as or what ye had said 
 Elowechtitpanne, as or what they had said. 
 
 The Future 
 Is like the present, adding tsch. 
 
142 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [sixth conjugation.] 
 
 TRANSITIONS.— FIRST TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Elen, as or what I say to thee I Elek, as or what I say to you 
 
 Elak, as or what I say to him | Elachkup, as or what I say to them. 
 
 SECOND TRANSITION. 
 
 Eliyan, as or what thou sayest to me I Eliyenk, as or what thou sayest to us 
 
 Elan, as or what thou sayest to him | Elachtup, as or what thou sayest to them. 
 
 THIRD TRANSITION. 
 
 Elit, as or what he says to me 
 Elquon, as or what he says to thee 
 Elat or elguk, as or what he says to him 
 
 Elquenk, as or what he says to us 
 Elquek, as or what he says to you 
 Ellatup, as or what he says to them. 
 
 FOURTH TRANSITION. 
 
 Elenk, as or what we say to thee I Elek, as or what we say to you 
 
 Elank, as or what we say to him | Elanquik, as or what we say to them. 
 
 FIFTH TRANSITION. 
 
 Eliyek, as or what ye say to me I Eliyenkup, as or what ye say to us 
 
 Elatup, as or what ye say to him | Elaachtup, as or what ye say to them. 
 
 SIXTH TRANSITION. 
 
 Elink, as or what they say to me 
 ElquoDnik, as or what they say to thee 
 Elachtit, as or what they say to him 
 
 Elgeyenk, as or what they say to us 
 Elgeyek, as or what they say to you 
 Elachtitup, as or what they say to them. 
 
 RECIPROCAL FORM. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Littin, to say to each other | Littinep, to have said to each other. 
 
OF THE LENNI IiENAFE INDIANS. 
 
 [sixth conjugation.] 
 
 143 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Littineen or littihhena, we say to or among each 
 other 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Littenenap or Httihhenap, we said to or among 
 each other 
 
 Littihhimo ork'delltihhimo, ye say to or among ' Littihhimoap or k'dellihhimoap, ye said to or 
 
 each other among each other 
 
 Littowak, they say to or among each other. Littopannik, they said to or among each other. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Littihhenatsch, we shall or will say to or among each other 
 Iiittihhlmotsch, ye shall or will say to or among each other 
 Littowaktsch, they shall or will say to or among each other. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Littiyenk, if or when we say to or among each 
 
 other 
 Littiyek, if or when ye say to or among each 
 
 other 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Littiyenkup, if or when we said to or among 
 
 each other 
 Littiyekup, if or when ye said to or among each 
 other 
 Littichtit, if or when they say to or among each : Littichtitup, if or when they said to or among 
 other. I each other. 
 
 The Future 
 Is formed from- the present, tsch suffixed. 
 
 REFLECTED FORM. 
 
 This form is used in the Singular as follows : 
 
 N'della n'hakey, I say to myself 
 K'cJcIla k'hakey, thou sayest to thyself 
 W'dellawall hakeyall, he says to himself. 
 N'dahowala n'hakey, I love myself 
 K'dahowala k'hakey, thou lovest thyself 
 Wdahowalawall hakeyall, he loves himself. 
 N'pennauwelema n'hakey, I take care of myself 
 Pennauwelem k'hakey, take care of thyself. 
 
 Pennauwelemawal hakeyall or lachauwelema- 
 wall hakeyall, he is anxious about himself 
 (or troubled in mind) 
 
 Pennauwelemo hakeyuwa, be anxious about 
 yourselves (or troubled in mind)*. 
 
 * JVote by the Translator— This expression, which probably was first introduced by the mis- 
 sionaries in their sermons, has nothing very spiritual in it ; the ideas of body and mind will appear 
 here to be strangely confounded. But the most polished nations of antiquity have hardly been 
 moie successful in their endeavours to express ideas that are not perceptible to our senses. The 
 words irveuf**, spiritus, are at best metaphors drawn from sensible ohjects, and the same result 
 will probably be foond in all languages if we recur to the etymology of the words which are meant 
 to express soul, mind, &c. See the note above, p. 104. 
 
 36 
 
144 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [of verbs.] 
 
 Scijf ntii Conjugation. 
 
 Miltin, to give*. 
 
 This verb has no simple active voice ; we cannot say, I give, thou giv- 
 est, he gives, &c, but the personal forms must be used, I give to thee, 
 him, &,c. It is the same in the passive voice. 
 
 There is an active verb, however, which expresses the idea of giving 
 away, or parting with something, without recurring to the personal forms ; 
 thus we say n'meken, I give away, Kmeken, thou givest away, meken, he 
 gives away, &c. Preterite, mekenep, I have given away. Imperative, 
 meek, give awayf . 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 PERSONAL FORMS.— POSITIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Miltin, to give to some body or make a present of. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Milit, he who gives to me 
 Milat, he who gives to him 
 
 Milquenk, he who gives to us 
 Milqueek, he who gives to you 
 Milquichtit, he who gives to them. 
 
 FIRST TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'nuleUf, I give to thee I K'milellohhumo, I give to you 
 
 N'milan, I give to him | N'milawak or n'milanewo, I give to them. 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — The Author gives only this example of the Seventh Conjugation, 
 and does not tell us whether all the verbs belonging to it want the abstract forms active and pas- 
 sive, or whether this defect is peculiar to some of them. I have sought in vain for an explanation 
 of this difficulty, which I am not qualified to solve. 
 
 f Note by the Translator. — The verbs ending in en do not appear to be classed with any of the 
 eight conjugations. From a comparison of the forms, it would appear that they belong to the 
 first, ending in in. In an unwritten language the vowels are easily mistaken for one another, and 
 it is difficult to preserve a consistent orthography. Thus the Author writes sometimes Getanni- 
 towit, ( God ) , and sometimes JSitannitowtt. Similar inconsistencies will appear in the course of 
 this work, which the judicious reader will easily account for. 
 
 J Note by the Translator. — The Author writes gemilell, nemilan, &c. ; it is evident that he 
 uses the g, instead of the k, to indicate the inseparable pronoun of the second person. For this 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [seventh conjugation.] 
 
 145 
 
 K'milellanep, I gave to 
 N'milap, I gave to him 
 
 thee 
 
 K'milletsch, I shall or will give to thee 
 N'milantsch, I shall or will give to him 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 IK'milellohrmmoap, I gave to you 
 N'milapanmk, I gave to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 I K'milellohhumotsch, I shall or will give to you 
 I N'milawaktsch, I shall or will give to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 K'milellane, if or when I give to thee 
 N'milachke, if or when I give to him 
 
 K'milannup, if or when I gave to thee 
 N'milachkup, if or when I gave to him 
 
 Present. 
 
 I N'mileque, if or when I give to you 
 | Milatpanne, if or when I give to thein. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 I N'milekup, if or when I gave' to you 
 
 I N'milawakup, if or when I gave to them. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 K'milenpanne, if or when I had given to thee I N'milekpanne, if or when I had given to you 
 N'milachkpanne, if or when I had given to him | N'milakpanne, if or when I had given to them. 
 
 K'milellannetsch, if or when I shall or will give 
 
 to thee 
 N'milaketsch, if or when I shall or will give to 
 
 him 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'milequetsch, if or when I shall or will give to 
 
 you 
 N'milachtiquetsch, if or when, they shall or will 
 give to them. 
 
 K'mili, thou givest to me 
 K'milan, thou givest to him 
 
 SECOND TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'milihump, thou hast given to me 
 K'milap, thou hast given to Kim 
 
 K'milineen or k'milihhena, thou givest to us 
 j K'milowak or k'milanewo, thou givest to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 I K'milihhenap, thou hast given to us 
 K'milapannik, thou hast given to them. 
 
 he gives as a reason, in one of the printed works, that his printer not having a sufficiency of k's, 
 he was obliged to employ the letter g in its stead. Like the e which follows, it is meant to repre- 
 sent the sheva or mute sound between the two consonants, which elsewhere is represented by the 
 apostrophe, and sometimes is not at all designated, as the interval between the consonants is 
 sufficiently apparent. 
 
146 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [seventh conjugation.] 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'miletsch, thou shalt or wilt give to me . 
 K'milantsch, thou shalt or wilt give, to him 
 
 K'milihhenatsch, thou shalt or wilt give to us 
 K'milawaktsch, thou shalt or wilt give to them. 
 
 Mil, give 
 Mililj give me 
 Milau, give him 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Milineen, give us 
 Milo, give them 
 Milatom, let us give 
 Miltin, it is given. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Miliyamnej if or when thou givest to me 
 Milanne^if or when thou givest to him 
 
 I Miliyenke, if or when thou givest to us 
 
 | Milawawanne, if or when thou givest to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Miliyannup, if or when thou hast given to me 
 Milannup, if or when thon hast given to him 
 
 j Miliyenkup, if or when thou hast given to us 
 ; K'milannik, if or when thou hast given to them. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Miliyanpanne, if or when thou hadst given to me 
 Milanpanne, if or when thou hadst given to him 
 
 Miliyenkpanne, if or when thou hadst given to 
 
 us 
 Milawatpanne, if or when thou hadst given to 
 
 them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Miliyannetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt give 
 
 to me 
 Milannetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt give 
 
 to him 
 
 Miliyenketsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt 
 
 give to us 
 K'milachtitetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt 
 
 give to them. 
 
 THIRD TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 N'miluk, he gives to me 
 K'miluk, he gives to thee 
 Milan, milgol, milawall, he gives to him 
 
 N'milgap, he gave or has given to me 
 K'milgap, he gave or has given to thee 
 Milap, he gave or has given to him 
 
 Present. 
 
 N'milguneen, n'milguna, he gives to us 
 K'rnilguvra, he gives to you 
 Milawak, he gives to them. 
 
 us 
 
 N'miluktsch, he shall or will give to me 
 K'miluktsch, he Bhall or will give to thee 
 Milgotsch or milauchtsch, he shall or will give 
 to him 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'milgunenap, he gave or has given to 
 K'melguwap, he gave or has given to you 
 Milapannik, he gave or has given to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 I N'milgunatsch, he shall or will give to us 
 K'milguwatsch, he shall or will give to you 
 Milawaktsch, he shall or will give to them. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [seventh conjugation.] 
 
 147 
 
 Milite, if or when- he gives to me 
 Milquoune, if or when he gives to thee 
 Milate, if 01 when he gives to him 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Milqucnke, if or when he gives to us 
 Milqueque, if or when he gives to you 
 Milachtite, if or when he gives to them. 
 
 Preterite 
 Militup, if or when he has givento me 
 Milquonnup. if or when he has given to thee 
 Milatup, if or when he has given to h,im 
 
 Milquenkup, if or when he has given to us 
 Milquekup, if or when he has given to you 
 Milachtitup, if or when he has given to them. 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Militpanne, if or when he had given to me 
 Milquonpanne, if or when he had given to thee 
 Milatpanne, if or when he had given to him 
 
 Milquenkpanne, if or when he had given to us 
 Milquekpanne, if or when he had given to you 
 Milachtitpanne, if or when he had giv^jjfto them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Militetsch, if or when he shall or will give to me 
 Miliquonnetsch, if or when he shall or will give 
 
 to thee 
 Milatetsch, if or when he shall or will give to 
 
 him 
 
 Milquenketech, if or when he shall or will give 
 
 to us 
 Milqueketsch, if or when he shall or will give to 
 
 you 
 Milachtitetsch, if or when he shall or will give 
 
 to them. 
 
 FOURTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'milenneen or k'milohhena, we give to thee 
 N'milohhena, we give to him 
 
 K'milohhumo, we give to you 
 N'milaw'awuna or n'milawawak, we give to 
 them. 
 
 K'milohhenap or k'milonnenap, we gave or have 
 
 given to thee 
 N'miiawunap, we gave or have given to him 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'milohhummenap, we gave or have given to 
 
 you 
 
 N'milawawunap, we gave or have given to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'mileneentsch, we shall or will give to thee 
 N'mileneentsch, we shall or will give to him 
 
 K'milohhumotsch, we shall or will give to you 
 { N'milawa wunatsch , we shall or will give to them , 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Milenque, if or when we give to thee' 
 N'milanque, if or when we give to him 
 
 1 MiFeque, if or when we give to you 
 j Milinde, if or when we give to them, 
 
 37 
 
148 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [seventh conjugation.] 
 
 Milenkup, if or when we gave or have given to 
 
 thee 
 Milankup, if or when we gave or have given to 
 
 him 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Milekup, if or when we gave or have given to 
 
 you 
 Milawankup, if or when we gave or have given 
 
 to them. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Milenkpanne, if or when we had given to thee I Milekpanne, if or when we had given to you 
 Milankpanne, if or when we had given to him | Milindpanne, if or when we had given to them. 
 
 Milenquetsch, if or when we shall or will give 
 
 to thee 
 Milanquetsch, if or when we shall or will give 
 
 to him 
 
 Future. 
 
 Milequetsch, if Or when we shall or will give te 
 
 you 
 Milindpanne, if or when we shall or will give 
 
 to them. 
 
 WZFTH TRjUVSITIOJV. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'milihhimo, ye give to me I K'milihhena, ye give to us 
 
 K'milanewo, ye give to him | K'milawawak, ye give to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'milihhimoap, ye gave or have given to me I K'milihhenap, ye gave or have given to us 
 K'milanewoap, ye gave or have given to him | K'milawawak, ye gave or have given to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 E'milihhimotsch, ye shall or will give to me I K'millihhenatsch, ye shall or will give to us 
 K'milanewotscli, ye shall or will give to him | K'mUawawaktsch, ye shall or will give to them 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Miliyeque, if or when ye give to me I Miliyenque, if or when ye give to us 
 
 Milaque, if or when ye give to him J Milachtique, if or when ye give to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Miliyekup, if or when ye gave or have given to 
 
 me 
 Milakup, if or when ye gave or have given to 
 
 him 
 
 Miliyenkup, if or when ye gave or have given 
 
 to us 
 Milachtikup, if or when ye gave or have given 
 
 to them. 
 
 Miliyekpanne, if or when ye had given to me 
 Milakuppanne, if or when ye had given to him 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Miliyenkpanne, if or when he had given to us 
 
 ivunyenKpanne, u or when he had given to us 
 Milachtiyekpanne, if or when ye nad given to 
 them. 
 
OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [seventh conjugation.] 
 
 149 
 
 Future. 
 
 Miliyequetsch, if or when ye shall or will give I Miltyenquetsch, if or when ye shall or will give 
 
 to me | to us 
 
 Milaquetsch, if or when ye shall or will give, to I Milachtlyequetsch, if or when ye shall or will 
 
 him I give to them. 
 
 SIXTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 N'milge, they give to me 
 K'milge, they give to thee 
 Milanewo, they give to him 
 
 K'milgeneen, they give to us 
 
 Kmilgehhimo, they give to you 
 
 Milawawall or milawawak, they give to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'milgenep, they gave or have given to me 
 K'milgenep, they gave or have given to thee 
 Milapannik, they gave or have given to him 
 
 I N'milgenenap, they gave or have given to us 
 K'milgehhimoap, they gave or have given to you 
 Milawawapannik, they gave or have given to 
 them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'milgetsch, they shall or will give to me 
 K'milgetsch, they shall or will give to thee 
 Milawawaltsch, they shall or will give to hiffl 
 
 N'milgeneentsch, they shall or will give to us 
 K'milgehhimotsch, they shall or will give to you 
 Milanewotsch, they shall or will give to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Milinke, if or when they give to me 
 Milgeyane, if or when they give to thee 
 Milachtite, if or when they give to him 
 
 Milgeyenke, if or when they give to us 
 Milgeyeke, if or when they give to you 
 Milaachtite, if or when they give to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Milinkup, if or when they gave or have given 
 
 to me 
 Milgeyannup, if or when they gave or have 
 
 given to thee 
 Milachtitup or milintup, if or when they gave 
 
 or have given to him 
 
 Milgeyenkup, if or when they gave or have 
 
 given to us 
 Milgeyekup, if or when theyjgave or have given 
 
 to you 
 Milaachtitup, if or when they gave or have given 
 
 to them. 
 
 PlupeHfeet. 
 
 Milinkpanne, if or when they had given to me Milgeyenkpanne, if or When they had 
 Milgeyanpanne, if or when they had given to us 
 
 thee Milgeyekpanne, if or when thev had 
 
 thee 
 
 Milachtitpanne or milintpanne, if or when they 
 had given to him 
 
 given to 
 
 us 
 Milgeyekpanne, if or when they had given to 
 you 
 
 Milaachtitpanne, if or when they had given to 
 them. 
 
150 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [seventh conjugation.] 
 
 Milinketsch, if or when they shall or will give 
 
 to me 
 Milgeyannetsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 give to thee, 
 Milachtitetsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 give to him 
 
 Future. 
 
 Milgeyenketseh, if or when they shall or will 
 
 give to us 
 Milgeyebetsch, '• if or when they shall or will 
 
 give to you 
 MUaachtitetsch, if or when they shall or will 
 
 give to them. 
 
 The Negative Forms are not given. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE.— POSITIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Milgussin, to have (something) given to one. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 J Plural. 
 
 Milgussit, he to whom is given , . , | Milgussitschit, they to whom is given 
 
 Future. 
 
 Milgussitpannik, they to whom will he given. 
 
 PERSONAL FORMS.— FIRST TRANSITION. 
 
 K'milgussi (Lat. mihi datur), it is given to me 
 K'mjlgussu, it is given to thee 
 Milgussu, it is given to him 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural 
 Milgussiheen, it is given to us 
 
 Milgussihhimo*, it is given to you 
 Milgussowak, it is given to them. 
 
 N'milgussihump, it was given to me 
 K'milgussihump, it was given to thee 
 Milgussop, it was given to him 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Milgussihhenap, it was given to us 
 Milgussihhimoap, it was given to you 
 Milgussopannik, it was given to them. 
 
 Future 
 
 Singular. 
 N'milgussitsch, it shall or will be given to me 
 K'milgussitsch, it shall or will be given to thee 
 Milgussu tsch, it shall or will be given to him 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Plural. 
 Milgussihhenatsch, it shall or will be given to us 
 K'milgussihhimotsch, it shall or will be given to 
 vou 
 
 you 
 Milgussowaktsch, it shall 
 them 
 
 given i 
 or will be given to 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — The double hh, here and in other places, does not indicate a par- 
 ticular sound or stronger aspiration, but only that the preceding vowel i is to be pronounced short . 
 This mode of writing is borrowed from the orthography of the German language. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [seventh conjugation.] 
 
 151 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'milgussiya, if or when it is given to me 
 Milgussiyanne, if or when it is given to thee 
 Milgussite, if or when it is given to him 
 
 Plural. 
 Milgussiyenk, if or when it is given to us 
 Milgussiyek, if or when it is given to you 
 Milgussichtit, if or when it is given to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Singular. 
 Migussiyakup, if or when it was given to me 
 Milgussiyannup, if or when it was given to thee 
 Milgussitupj if or when it was given to him 
 
 Plural. 
 Milgussiyenkup, if or when it was given to us 
 Milgussiyekup, if or when it was given to you 
 Milgussichtitup, if or when it was given to them. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 Milgussiyakpanne, if or when it had been given 
 
 to me 
 Milgussiyankpanne, if or when it had been given 
 
 to thee 
 Milgussitpanne, if or when it had been given to 
 
 him 
 
 Plural. 
 Milgussiyenkpanne, if or when it had been given 
 
 to us 
 Milgussiyekpanne, if or when it had been given 
 
 to you 
 Milgussichtitpanne, if or when it had been given 
 
 to them. 
 
 Future 
 
 Singular. 
 Milgussiyatsch, if or when it shall or will be 
 
 given to me 
 Milgussiyannetsch, if or when it shall or will be 
 
 given to thee 
 Milgussite t sch , if or when it shall or will be given 
 
 to him 
 
 Plural. 
 Milgussiyenketsch, if or when it shall or will be 
 
 given to us 
 Milgusslyeketsch, if or when it shall or will be 
 
 given to you 
 Milgussichtitetsch, it shall or will be given to 
 
 them. 
 
 Note by the Translator. — The other Transitions are not given, and 
 the negative form of this Transition is given only in the Subjunctive 
 Mood, as follows: 
 
 NEGATIVE FOMM^-FIRST TRANSITION. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta milgussiwak, if or when it is not given to 
 
 me 
 Matta milgussiwonne, if or when it is not given 
 
 to thee 
 Matta milgussique, if or when it is not given to 
 
 him 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Matta milgussiwenk, if or when it is not given 
 
 to us 
 Matta milgussiwek, if or when it is not given to 
 
 you 
 Matta milgussichtik, if or when it is not given to 
 
 them. 
 
 38 
 
152 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [eighth conjugation.] 
 
 Matta milgussiwakup,if or when it was not given 
 
 to me 
 Matta milgussiwonnup, if or when it was not 
 
 given to thee 
 Matta milgussikup, if or when it was not given 
 
 to him 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta milgussiwenkup, if or when it was not 
 
 given to us 
 Matta milgussiwekup, if or when it was not 
 
 given to you 
 Matta milgussichtikup, if or when it was not 
 
 given to them. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta milgussiwakpanne, if or when it had not 
 
 been given to me 
 Matta milgussiwonpanne, if or when it had not 
 
 been given to thee 
 Matta milgussikpanne, if or when it had not been' 
 
 given to him 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta milgussiwenkpanne, if or when it had not 
 
 been given to us 
 Matta milgussiwekpanne, if or when it had not 
 
 been given to you 
 Matta milgussichtikpanne, if or when it had not 
 
 been given to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 Matta milgussiwaktsch, if or when it shall or 
 
 will not be given to me 
 Matta milgussiwonnetsch, if or when it shall or 
 
 will not be given to thee 
 Matta milgussiquetsch, if or when it shall or will 
 
 not be given to him 
 
 Plural. 
 Matta milgussiwenketsch, if or when it shall or 
 
 will not be given to us 
 Matta milgussiweketsch, if or when it shall or 
 
 will not be given to you 
 Matta milgussichtiketsch, if or when it shall or 
 
 will not be given to them. 
 
 SEtflJUli ttonjugatfon. 
 No. I. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'peton, I bring 
 K'peton, thou bringest 
 Peton, he brings 
 
 N'petonep, I have brought 
 K'petonep, thou hast brought 
 Petonep, he has brought 
 
 Peton, to bring. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'petoneen, we bring 
 K'pettohhumo, ye bring 
 Petonewo, they bring. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Plural. 
 N'petonenap, we have brought 
 E'petohhumoap, ye have brought 
 j| Petonewoap, they have brought. 
 
OF THE LENNI IiENAPE INDIANS. 153 
 
 [eighth conjugation.] 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N'petontach, I shall or will bring 
 K'petontsch, thou shalt or wilt bring 
 Petontsch, he shall or will bring 
 
 Plural. 
 N'petoneentsch, we shall or will bring 
 K'petohhumotscb, ye shall or will bring 
 Petonewotsch, they shall or will bring. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD, 
 
 Singular. , Plural. 
 
 Petol, bring thou | Petook, bring ye. 
 
 Note by the Translator. — The Subjunctive of this verb is not given, 
 except in the Personal forms, which follow : 
 
 PERSONAL FORMS.— FIRST TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'petolen, I bring to thee I K'petolohhumo, I bring to you 
 
 N'petawan, I bring to him | N'petawawak, I bring to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'petolenep, I brought to thee I K'petolohhumoap*, I brought to you 
 
 N'petawap, I brought to him | N'petawapannik, I said to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'petolentsch, I shall or will bring to thee I K'petolohhumotsch, I shall or will bring to you 
 
 N'petawantsch, I shall or will bring to him | N'petawawaktsch, I shall or will bring to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 K'petolanne, if or when I bring to thee 1 N'petoleque, if or when I bring to you 
 
 N'petawake, if or when I bring to him | N'petawawake, if or when I bring to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'petolanup, if or when I have brought to thee 
 N'petawannup, if or when I have brought to him 
 
 N'petolekup, if or when I have brought to you 
 N'petawawannup, if or when I have brought to 
 them. 
 
 N'petolannetsch, if or when I shall or will bring 
 
 to thee 
 N'petawannetsch, if or when I shall or will bring 
 
 to him 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'petolequetsch, if or when I shall or will bring 
 
 to you 
 N'petawawaketsch, if or when I shall or will 
 
 bring to them. 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — This is by contraction from k'petolohhummoakup, which is the 
 most correct form ; but is generally contracted in speech. 
 
154 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [eighth conjugation.] 
 
 SECOND TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 E'petawi, thou bringest to me 
 E'petawa, thou bringest to him 
 
 E'petawinep, thou broughtest to me 
 E'petawap, thou broughtest to him 
 
 K'petawineen, thou bringest to us 
 K'petawawak, thou bringest to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'petawinenap, thou broughtest tons 
 E'petawapannik, thou broughtest to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'petawitsch, thou shalt or wilt bring to me 
 E'petawatBch, thou shalt or wilt bring to him ' 
 
 K'petawihhenatsch, thou shalt or wilt bring to us 
 E'petawawaktsch, thou shalt or wilt bring to 
 them. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Petawil, bring to me now 
 Petawime, bring me at a future time 
 
 I Petawik, bring ye to me 
 I Petawineen, bring to us. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 E'petawiyane, if or when thou bringest to me 
 E'petawanne, if or when thou bringest to him 
 
 ! E'petawiyenke, if or when thou bringest to us 
 ! K'petawawanne, if or when thou bringestto them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 E'petawiyannup, if or when thou hast brought 
 
 to me 
 E'petawannup, if or when thou hast brought to 
 
 him 
 
 E'petawiyenkup, if or when thou hast brought 
 
 to us 
 E'petawawakup, if or when thou hast brought 
 
 to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 (Not given.) 
 
 THIRD TRANSITION. 
 
 N'petagun, he brings to me 
 E'petaguk, he brings to thee 
 Petagol, he brings to him 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 N'petaguneen, he brings to us 
 K'petaguwa, he brings to you 
 Petawawak, he brings to them. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [eighth conjugation.] 
 
 155 
 
 N'petagop, he brought to me 
 K'petagop, he brought to thee 
 Petawap, lie brought to him 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'petagunap, he brought to us 
 K'petaguwap, he brought to you 
 Petawapannik, he brought to them. 
 
 N'petaktsoh, he shall or will bring, to, me 
 K'petaguktsch, he shall or will bring to thee 
 Petagoltsch or petawatsch, he shall or will 
 bring to him 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'petageneantach.vhe shall or will bring to us 
 K'petaguwatsch, he shall or will bring to you 
 Petawawaktsch, he shall or will bring to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Petawite, if or when he brings to me 
 Petaquonne, if or when he brings to thee 
 Petawate, if or when he brings to him 
 
 Present. 
 
 Petaquenke, if or when he brings to us 
 Petaqueke, if or when he brings to you 
 Petawachtite, if or when he brings to them. 
 
 Petawitup, if or when he brought to me 
 Petaquonnup, if or when he brought to thee 
 Petawatup, if or when he brought to him 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Petaquenkup, if or when he brought to us 
 Petaquekup, if or when he brought to you 
 Petawachtitup, if or when he brought to then), 
 
 Petawitsch, when or if he shall bring to me 
 Petaquonnetsch, when or if he shall bring to thee 
 Petawatsch, when or if he shall bring to him 
 
 Future. 
 
 Petaquenktsch, when or if he shall bring to us 
 Petaquektsch, when or if he shall bring to you 
 Pe ta wach titsch, when or if he shall bring to them. 
 
 .FOURTH TRJlJVStTIQJV. 
 
 K'petoleneen, we bring to thee 
 N'petawaneen, we bring to him 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 E'petolohhena, we bring to you 
 N'petawawuna, we bring to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 K'petolenenap, we have brought to thee 
 N'petawanenap, we have brought to him 
 
 K'petolohhenap, we have brought to you 
 N'petawawunap, we have brought to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'petolenneentsch, we shall bring to thee 
 N'petawaneentsch, we shall bring to him 
 
 K'petolohhenatsch, we shall bring to you 
 I N'petawawunatsch, we shall bring to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Petolenque, when or if we bring to thee 
 Petawonque, when or if we bring to him 
 
 39 
 
 Petaquonquek, when or if we bring to you 
 Petawawonque, when or if we bring to them. 
 
 « 
 
156 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [eighth conjugation.] 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Petolenkup, when or if we brought to thee 
 Fetawonkup, when or if we brought to him 
 
 I Petaquekup, when or if we brought to you 
 I Petawawonkup, when or if we brought to tl 
 
 them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Petolenketsch, when or if we shall bring to thee I Petaquenketsch, when or if we shall bring to you 
 Peta wonketsch, when or if we shall bring to him | Petawawanketsch, when or if we shall bring to 
 
 them. 
 
 FIFTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 K'petawihhimo, you bring to me 
 E'petawanewo, you bring to him 
 
 K'petawihhimoap, you brought to me 
 E'j>etawanewap or k'petawanewakup, you 
 brought to him 
 
 Present. 
 
 IE'petawihhena, you bring to us 
 K'petawawawak, you bring to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 E'petawihhenap or k'petawihummenakup, you 
 
 brought to us 
 K'petawapannik or k'petawanewakup, you 
 
 brought to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 K'petawihhimotsch, you shall bring to me 
 K'petawanewotsch, you shall bring to him 
 
 | K'petawihhenatsch, you shall bring to us 
 | E'petawawawaktsch, you shall bring to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Petawiyek, when or if you bring to me 
 Petaquek, when or if you bring to him 
 
 Petaquiyek, when or if you brought to us 
 Petawaque or petawachtique, when or if you 
 brought to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Petawiyekup, when Or if you brought to me 
 Petaquekup, when or if you brought to him 
 
 IPetaquiyekup, when or if you brought to us 
 Petawaquekup, when or if you brought to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Petawiyektsch, when or if you shall bring to me 
 Petaquektsch, when or if you shall bring to him 
 
 Petaquiyektsch, when or if you shall bring to us 
 Petawaquektsch, when or if you shall bring to 
 them. 
 
OF THE LENNI L.ENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [eighth conjugation.] 
 
 157 
 
 SIXTH TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 N'petake, they bring or one brings to me 
 K'petake, they bring or one brings to thee 
 Petawanewo, they bring or one brings to him 
 
 Petakeneen, they bring or one brings to us 
 K'petakenewo, they bring or one brings to you 
 Petawawanewo, they bring or one brings to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 N'petakep, they brought to me 
 K'petakep, they brought to thee 
 Petawanewap, they brought to him 
 
 N'petakenenap, they brought to us 
 K'petakenewap, they brought to you 
 Petawawapannik, they brought to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N'petaketsch, they shall bring to me 
 "K'petaketsch, they shall bring to thee 
 Petawanewotsch, they shall bring to him 
 
 N'petakeneentsch, they shall bring to us 
 K'petakenewotsch, they shall bring to you 
 Petawawanewotsch, they shall bring to them. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Petamichtite, when or if they bring to me 
 Petakeyanne, when or if they bring to thee 
 Petawachtite, when or if they bring to him 
 
 Petaquenke, when or if they bring to us 
 Petaqueque, when or if they bring to you 
 Petawawachtite, when or if they bring to them. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Petamichtitup, when or if they brought to me 
 Petakeyannup, when or if they brought to thee 
 Petawachtitup, when or if they brought to him 
 
 Petaquenkup, when or if they brought to us 
 Petaquekup, when or if they brought to you 
 Petawawachtitup, when or if they brought to 
 them. 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Petamichtitpanne, when or if they had brought 
 
 to me 
 Petakeyanpanne, when or if they had brought 
 
 to thee 
 Petawachtitpanne, when or if they had brought 
 
 to him » 
 
 Petakeyenkpanne, when or if they had brought 
 
 to us 
 Petakeyekpanne, when or if they had brought 
 
 ' to you 
 Petawawachtitpume, when or if they had 
 
 brought to them. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Petamichtitsch, when or If they shall bring to 
 
 me 
 Petakeyannetsch, when or if they shall bring to 
 
 thee 
 Petawachtitsch, when or if they shall bring to 
 
 him 
 
 Petaquenketsch, when or if they shall bring to 
 
 us 
 Petaquequetsch, when or if they shall bring to 
 
 you 
 Petawawachtitsch, when or if they shall bring to 
 
 them. 
 
158 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [eighth conjugation.] 
 
 Note by the Translator. — In another part of this Grammar, the follow- 
 ing partial forms of this verb are given : 
 
 INDEFINITE TRANSITION. 
 
 N'peschogun, one brings to me 
 K'peschogun, one brings to thee 
 Pcschogol, one brings to him 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 I N'peschoguneen, one brings to us 
 I K'peschguwa, one brings to you 
 1 1 Peschguwawak, one brings to them. 
 
 ANIMATE FORM.— FIRST TRANSITION. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 N'peschuwa, I bring to him 
 E'peschuwa, thou bringest to him 
 Peschuwa, he brings to him 
 
 N'peschuwaneen, we bring to him 
 E'peschuwanewo, you bring to him 
 Peschuwawak, they bring to him. 
 
 This last form is only used when speaking of animals, as for instance, 
 nenayunges n'peschuwa, I bring the horse to him*. 
 
 No. II. 
 
 Olhatton or ^ttlattoit, to have or possess something or have it in one's custody. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Olhatton or wulatton, to have or possess. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Olhattonep or wulattonep, to have had or possessed. 
 
 * INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Nolhatton emulation, I have or possess 
 Kolhatton or kulatton, thou hast or dost possess 
 Olhatton or wulatlon, he has or possesses 
 
 Nolhattoneen or nulattoneen, we have or possess 
 Kolhattonewo or kulattohhumo, you have or 
 
 Olhattonewo or wulattonewo, they have or pos- 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — This is all that is said in this grammar respecting the animate and 
 inanimate forms of the verbs, which distinction is very general in the language. The following 
 verb, olhatton, is in the inanimate form. In the animate it is olhalla. Nenayunges nolhallau, I 
 have a horse (a horse I have him). See Heckew. Corresp. p. 438. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [eighth conjugation.] 
 
 159 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Nolhattoneep or nulattonep, I had 
 Kolhattoneep or kulattonep, thou hadst 
 Olhattoneep or wulattonep, he had 
 
 Nolhattontschi, I shall have 
 Kolhattontschi, thou shalt have 
 Olhatton tschi, he shall have 
 
 Nolhattonenakup or nulattonenap, we had 
 Kolhattonewoakup or kulattohhumoap, you had 
 Olhattonewoakup or wulattonewoap, they had. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Nolhattoneentsch, we shall have 
 Kolhattonewotsch, you shall have 
 Olhattone wotsch, they shall have. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Wulhattol, wulattol, have, keep, preserve 
 
 Plur. Wulhattook, wulattook, do you have, 
 keep, preserve. * 
 
 Future. 
 
 Sing, Wulattaketsch, he must, shall have, keep, 
 
 preserve 
 Plur. Wulattschitetsch, they must, shall have, 
 
 keep, preserve. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Nulattawak, when or if I have 
 Kulattawonne, when or if thou hast 
 Wulattaque, when or if he have 
 
 Nulattawakup, when or if I had 
 Kulattawounup, when or if thou hadst 
 Wulattakup, when or if he had 
 
 Nulattayenke, when or if we have 
 Wulattayeque, when or if you have 
 Wulattochtite, when or if they have. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Nulaltakenkup, when or if we had 
 Wulattaquekup, when or if you had 
 Wulattochtitup, when or\i they had. 
 
 Nulattakpanne, when or if I had had 
 Kulattawonpanne, when or if thou hadst had 
 Wulattakpanne, when or if I had had 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Nulattawenkpanne, when or if we had had 
 Wuiattaquekpanne, when or if you had had 
 Wulattochtitpanne, when or if they had had. 
 
 The Future 
 Is formed from the present as above mentioned. 
 
 NEGATIVE FOMM. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Nulattowi, kulattowi, wulattowi 
 Plur. Nulattowuneen, kulattowihhimo, wulat- 
 towi inewo. 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 Sing. Nulattowip, kulattowip, wulattowip 
 Plur. Nulattowunenap, kulattowihhimoap, wli- 
 lattowunewoap. 
 
 40 
 
160 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [eighth conjugation.] 
 
 Future. 
 
 Sing. Nulattowitsch, kulattowitsch, wulatto- I Plur. Wulattowunnentsch, kulattowihhimotsch, 
 witsch I wulattowune»wotsch. 
 
 The other Moods are not given. v - 
 
 In the same manner with this verb the following are conjugated with 
 very little variation. 
 
 Maniton, to make*. 
 
 Wuliton, to make something well. 
 
 Palliton, to spoil something, to do it wrong. 
 
 Matschiton, to do mischief 
 
 Kschiechton, to wash, clean. N'gieschiechton, 
 
 kischiechton, guschiechton, I clean, thou 
 
 cleanest, he cleans, or I wash, &c. 
 Gischiton, to make, prepare something. N'gis- 
 
 chiton, I prepare, has all the tenses, hut not 
 
 the personal forms. 
 Pakantschiechton, to fulfil, complete. 
 Pakandhatton, to repair something, to make it 
 
 whole. 
 
 Poniton, to let something be or remain. 
 
 Pakiton, to throw away. 
 
 Palaton, to earn, to acquire. 
 
 Nipachton, to raise or set up something, as a 
 
 post or pole. 
 Nitaton, to do or be able to do something. 
 Niskiton to dirty, to bewray. 
 Schellachtan, to hang up. 
 Pagachtschaton, to fill. 
 Logillachton, to tear, to destroy. 
 Hatton, to place or fix something. 
 Gaton, to conceal, hide. 
 Apachtschiechton, to display, to spread, to setf. 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — From this word probably comes manitto, manitou, God, the crea- 
 tor, the maker. Patamawos, another name for God, comes from pataman, to pray ; the one to 
 whom we pray. 
 
 t JVote by the Translator. — In the original manuscript there is in this place a number of para- 
 digms of verbs and parts of verbs not classed under their different conjugations, but mostly belong- 
 ing to the first. In the translation which I made for the Philosophical Society I inserted them un- 
 der the head of additional verbs. On examining them afterwards more closely, I found several 
 were deficient in moods and tenses, and were clearly considered by the author only as materials 
 to be made use of in a revision of his work. Among them were repetitions of verbs already given, 
 but in some respects more complete, containing moods and tenses, which in the first examples 
 were wanting. It will be seen in the verbs, particularly of the first conjugation, that they are not 
 all carried through their different voices, forms, moods, and tenses, so that one often supplies the 
 deficiencies of the others. If the author had lived, it is probable that he would have brought his 
 work to a greater degree of perfection. This I could not undertake to do : but I thought it unne- 
 cessary to swell this grammar with these additional verbs and fragments of verbs thus inserted with- 
 out order or method. I therefore left out all that belonged to the first conjugation, already full 
 enough, contenting myself with extracting what was wanting in the first paradigms, in order to 
 complete them as much as possible. Of the other additional verbs I have inserted two or three 
 under their proper conjugations, leaving out the remainder, which I am satisfied was not intended 
 to remain in its present form. 
 
OF THE LENNI EENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [or VERBS.] 
 
 161 
 
 * IRREGULAR VERBS, 
 
 OR, VERBS THAT ARE DEFICIENT IN PERSONS OR TENSES. 
 
 JVbfe by the Translator. — These are chiefly of the class which we call 
 impersonal; but they do not all belong to it, as will be seen by the ex- 
 amples. Therefore the denomination of the author has been preserved. 
 Of those which are called irregular in the ancient and modern languages 
 of Europe, that is to say, of which the several tenses and moods appear 
 to have sprung from different roots, as in Latin sum, eram,fui, in French 
 alter, je vais, firai, and in ^English I go, I went, he gives no examples; 
 and probably there are none in this language. It is a fact worthy of 
 some attention. Among the examples the author had included some of 
 the adjective verbs hereafter mentioned, which we have transferred to 
 their proper head. 
 
 EXAMPLES. OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Sokelan, it rains 
 
 Sokelaneep, it rained 
 
 Sokelantschi, it will rain 
 
 Sokelanke, if it rains 
 
 Sokelanketsch, when it will rain 
 
 Sokelankpanne, if it had rained. 
 
 K'schilan, it rains hard 
 
 K'schilaneep, it rained hard 
 
 Popetelan, it rains now and then, by showers, 
 
 by starts 
 Popetelanep, it rained now and then 
 Alhacquot, it rains a general rain (extending over 
 
 a large surface of country) 
 Achkikalan, it sleets. 
 
 Wineu, it snows 
 Wineep, it snowed 
 Wineuchtschi, it will snow 
 Wineke, if or when it snows 
 Winekpanne, if it had snowed. 
 
 Topan, it freezes a white frost 
 Topaneep, it did freeze a white frost. 
 
 K'schakan, the wind blows hard 
 K'schakaneep, the wind blew hard 
 K'schachinke, .when or if it blows hard 
 Tamseetsch* kschakan, it will perhaps blow 
 
 hard 
 Apitchanehelleu, it blows a contrary wind 
 Apitchanehellewak, they have a contrary wind 
 Wundschun, the wind comes from (a particular 
 
 quarter) 
 Wundschenneep, the wind did come from, &c. 
 Wundschinke, when or if the wind comes from. 
 
 Moschhaquat, the river clears up, is getting free 
 
 from ice 
 Moschhaquachteep, tbe river cleared up 
 Massipook, the river drifts ice 
 M'chaquiechen, the water is high 
 M'chaquiecneneep, the water was high 
 M'chaquiechinke, when or the water is high 
 M'chaquiechinkpanne, when or if the water was 
 
 or had been high 
 Petaquiechen, the water is rising 
 Petaquiecheneep, the water was rising. 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — This word is compounded of tamse sometimes, eet perhaps, and 
 the future termination tsch. 
 
162 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [irregular verbs.] 
 
 Wulandeu, it is fine clear weather 
 Wulandeep, it was fine clear weather 
 Wulandeuchtschi, it will be fine clear weather 
 Wulandeke, when it is fine clear weather 
 Wulandekpanne, if or when it was fine clear 
 weather. 
 
 Moschhacquat, the weather clears up 
 Moschhacquachteep, the weather was clear. 
 
 Achgumhocquat, it is cloudy weather 
 Achgumhocquach top, it was cloudy weather. 
 
 Wundeu, it boils 
 
 N'wiechen, I boil 
 
 Wundeep, it boiled 
 
 Wiechenin, to boil, cook the food 
 
 Wundpeu, it leaks, drops — JVegat. Wundpewi 
 
 Wundpewall, they leak, drop, boil over. 
 
 Tepiken, it is ripe, full grown — JVegat. Tepike- 
 
 newi 
 Tepikeneep, it was ripe 
 Tepikenol, they are ripe • 
 Tepikentschi, it will be ripe enough. 
 
 Winu, it is ripe (applied to maize or Indian 
 
 corn) 
 Winop, it was ripe 
 Winike, when or if it is ripe — JVegat. Winiwi, 
 
 when or if it is not ripe. 
 
 Winxu, it is ripe (applied to fruit on the tree) — 
 
 JVegat. Winxiwi 
 Winxuwak, they are ripe 
 Winxop, it was ripe*. 
 
 Saken, it shpots or springs up (the seed) — JVe- 
 gat. Sakenowi 
 Sakenoll, they shoot up (the beans) 
 Sakenop, it sprang up. 
 
 Luteu, it burns (from lussemen, to burn) 
 Luteuchtschi, it will bum 
 N'lussi, I bum 
 Lussop, he has burned. 
 
 K'schippehelleu, the water runs off 
 K'schippehelleup, the water ran off. 
 
 Petschihilleu, he is coming on 
 Petschihilleep, he came on. 
 
 Natcha'quet, I fetch wood, thou fetchest wood, 
 he fetches wood, we fetch wood, you fetch 
 wood, they fetch wood 
 
 Natachtu, he fetches wood. 
 
 Hattau, he has, it has, it is there 
 
 Hatteep, he had, it was there 
 
 JVegat. Atta hattewi, he has not, it is not there 
 
 Hattawawu, when or if I was there 
 
 Ika or yun hattol,have it there, put it there. 
 
 N'gatta, I will (from gattamen, to want, will, 
 
 desire) 
 K'gatta, thou wiliest 
 Gotta, he willeth 
 Gottalineen, we will 
 Gattati, come ! be willing ! 
 Gattatook, be ye willing ! 
 
 N'gatta linxumen, I will melt it. 
 
 Linxumen, to melt something 
 
 Linkten, it melts 
 
 Linktup, it melted, was melted. 
 
 Gandhatton, to hide, conceal 
 N'gandhatton, I hide, conceal 
 N'gandattoneep, I hid, concealed 
 In all other cases gandhatton is unalterably 
 used. 
 
 Mayawiechen, it agrees, it is right, it suits-^-JVe- 
 
 gat. Mayawiechenowi 
 Pret. Mayawiechenep. 
 
 Aski, must, has neither persons nor tenses, and 
 must be used in the following manner : 
 Aski n'witschema, I must help him 
 Aski n'witschemap, I was obliged to help 
 
 him 
 Aski witschemepannik, they were obliged 
 
 to help him 
 Aski sachgapenawall, I must lead him 
 Aski nayumap, I was forced to carry 
 
 him 
 Aski n'pehawall, I must wait for you. 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — The above are properly adjective verbs ; but they have been left 
 here out of their proper place in order to shew the variety of ways in which the Indians express 
 the same thing in relation to different objects. Had these words been carried to the following list 
 of adjective verbs, they must have been separated in the different classes. 
 
 ■)■ JVote by the Translator. — This word is compounded from naten, to fetch and tachan, wood. 
 
0P THE LENN1 LENAPE INDIANS. 163 
 
 [of verbs.] 
 
 OF ADJECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 JVote by the Translator. — The author observes here that he hesitated 
 long whether he should class adjectives by themselves or include them 
 all under the head of verbs. On the one hand he could not but observe 
 that there are in this language pure adjectives, which receive different 
 forms when employed in the verbal sense, such as wulit, vmlik, wulisso, 
 good, handsome, pretty; wulilissu, he, she, or it is good,, pretty, or hand- 
 some, and several others of which the author gives examples, as for in- 
 stance (Class I.) 'in sabbeleechen, sparkling, glittering, whence sabbeleu, 
 it sparkles, glitters.- But these are not very numerous. A great number 
 of them are impersonal verbs in the third person of the singular of the 
 present tense, while others are conjugated through various persons, moods, 
 and tenses, as appears from the following examples. He determined, at 
 last, after presenting a few under the head of adjectives, above page 41, 
 to include them all in a list of verbs of this description, which the Trans- 
 lator has called adjective verbs, as he has denominated adverbial verba 
 those which are formed by or derived from them. It is to be regretted that 
 the venerable missionary did not more particularly distinguish the pure 
 adjectives from the others, and did not enter more fully into this subject. 
 It is most certain that all the adjectives of the Delaware language are not 
 verbs ; but a rule ox principle of discrimination is wanting, and the Trans- 
 lator cannot undertake to establish it. 
 
 The Author here exhibits a list qf adjective verbs, divided into eleven 
 classes according to their termination, which in the three first is that of 
 the' third person singular of the indicative mood of the first conjugation. 
 The first is in eu; the second in wi; the third in u or o; the fourth in on 
 or an; the fifth in ot, at; the sixth in to; the seventh in i; the eighth in 
 it, ik, et; the ninth in en; the tenth in en or on; and the eleventh in in. 
 This last appears to belong to the first conjugation, and its termination 
 is that of the infinitive mood. It is conjugated through several moods, 
 persons, and tenses. 
 
 ADJECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 CLASSED ACCORDING TO THEIR TERMINATIONS. 
 
 Class L — Jn eu. 
 
 Kschitteu, warm, hot (it is) | Atta kschittewi*, it is not warm 
 
 Kschittep, it was warm | Atta kschittewip, it was not warm. 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — The termination tei is not here adverbial ; it is employed in a ne- 
 gative sense, as in the verbs. See above, page 104, k'pendolen, I hear thee, atta k'pendolowi, I 
 near thee not, and in most other negative forms of the verbs. 
 
 41 
 
164 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [adjective verbs.] 
 
 Kineu, it is sharp 
 Kineep, it was sharp. 
 
 Guneu, long {it is) 
 Ouneep, it was long 
 Guneuchtschi, it will be long. 
 
 Kschiecheu, clean (it is) 
 Kschiecheep, it was clean. 
 
 Machkeu, red (it is) 
 Machkeep, it was red. 
 
 M'cheu, big, large 
 M'chap, it was big. 
 
 Gachteu, dry 
 Gachteep, it was dry. 
 
 Teu, it is cold 
 Teep, it was cold 
 Teuchtschi, it will be cold. 
 
 Poquihilleu, it is broken 
 Poquihilleep, it was broken. 
 
 Pimeu, pimiecheu, oblique 
 Pimihilleu, it is oblique 
 Pimihilleep, it was oblique. 
 
 Pisgeu, it is dark 
 Pisgeep, it was dark. 
 
 Takpeu, wet, damp 
 Takpeep, it was wet 
 Takpeuchtschi, it will be wet. 
 
 Winkteu, winkteek, it is quite done, boiled 
 Winkteep*, it was boiled 
 Winkteke, if or when it is boiled. 
 
 Wisaweu, wisaweek, yellow. 
 
 Waktscheu, crooked. 
 
 Woapeu, white 
 Woapeleechen, it appears white. 
 
 Suckeu, black 
 
 Suckeleecheu, it appears black 
 , Suckeep, it was black. 
 
 Wtackeu, soft, delicate 
 Wtackeep, it was soft, delicate 
 Wtackeuchtschi, it will be soft, delicate. 
 
 Acheweu, bushy. 
 
 Achgameu, broad 
 Achgameeke, if it was broad. 
 
 Achgiguwen, to be lively, jocular 
 N'gagiguwe, I am lively 
 Kagiguwe, he is lively 
 N'gagiguweneen, we are lively 
 Kagiguwenewo, you are lively 
 Achgiguwewak, they are lively. 
 
 Achginche, to be quick of hearing 
 N'gaginche, I am quick of hearing 
 Eaginche, thou art quick of hearing 
 Achgincheu, he is quick of hearing. 
 
 Achgumeu, dull cloudy weather. 
 
 Gischachteu, it is clear, light 
 Gischachteep, it was clear 
 Gischachteke, if or when it was clear 
 Gischachtekpanne, if it had been clear. 
 
 Gischhatteu, it is ready 
 Gischhatteep, it was ready 
 Gischhatteke, if it was ready 
 Gischhattekpanne, if it had been ready. 
 
 Gischuteu, warm, lukewarm 
 Gischuteep, it was lukewarm 
 Gischuweu, it is warm 
 Gischuweep, it was warm 
 Gischuweuchtsch, it will be warm. 
 Gisihuweke, if it was warm 
 
 Kschillandeu, it is hot (weather) 
 Kschillandeep, it was hot 
 Kschillandeke, if it was hot. 
 
 Moschachgeu, bald, bare 
 Moschantpeu, bald headed. 
 
 Pimochqueu, turned, twisted. 
 
 Sabbeleu, it sparkles, glitters 
 Sabbeleechen, sparkling, glittering. 
 
 Schauwutteu, it is faded 
 Schauwutteep, it was faded 
 Schauwutteke, when or if it is faded. 
 
 Wapaneu, easterly 
 Wundchenneu, westerly 
 Lowaneu, northerly 
 Schawaneu, southerly 
 Gachpatteyeu, south easterly. 
 
 Tihhilleu, it is cool (the meat) 
 Tihhille, I am cool (after being heated) 
 Tihhilleu, he is cool. 
 
 Tschitaneu, strong (it is) 
 Tschitaneep, it was strong 
 Tschitaneke, if it was strong. 
 
OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [adjective veebs.J 
 
 165 
 
 "Waseleu, woacheyeu, clear, light. 
 
 WtackaneUj it is mild (weather) 
 Wtackaneke, when it is mild 
 Wtackanup, it was mild 
 Wtackaneuchtsch, it will be mild. 
 
 Achgepinque, to be blind 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'gagepinque, I am blind 
 Kagepinque, thou art blind 
 Achgepinque, he is blind 
 
 Plural. 
 N'gagepinqueneen, we are blind 
 Kagepinquenewo, you are blind 
 Achgepinquewak, they are blind 
 
 PRETERITE TENSE. 
 
 N'gagepinquep, I was or have been blind 
 Kagepinquep, thou wast or hast been blind 
 Achgepinquep, he was or has been blind 
 
 Plwal. 
 N'gagepinquep, we were or have been blind 
 Kagepinquenewoap, you were or have been blind 
 Achgepinquewapannil, they were or have been 
 blind. 
 
 Arhgepchoan, to be deaf 
 N'gagepchoa, I am deaf 
 Kagepchoa, thou art deaf 
 Acngepcheu, he is deaf. 
 
 Achsinnigeu, stony, stony land. 
 
 Fiskeu, it is dark (night) 
 Piskeep, it was dark 
 Achwipiskeu, quite dark 
 Achwipiskeep, it was quite dark. 
 
 Memeechaitin, to be barefooted 
 N'memechaitin, I am barefooted 
 K'memechaitin, thou art barefooted 
 Memeechxiteu, he is barefooted. 
 
 Mesitcheyeu, whole, entire. 
 
 Fagatschateu, full, to fill. 
 
 Penquon, dry 
 Penquihilleu, it is dry 
 Penquihilleep, it was dry. 
 
 Pikihhilleu, it is. torn 
 Pikihhillup, it was torn. • 
 
 Pimachtelinque, squint eyed 
 Pimachtelinqueu, he is squint eyed. 
 
 Poquihilleu, it is broken 
 Poquihilleep, it was broken. 
 
 Chitqueu, chuppecat, deep water 
 Chuppeachtop, it was deep water. 
 
 Schachachgen, straight, even. 
 Wschacheu, wschachan, smooth, glossy 
 Wschachihilleu, it is smooth, glossy 
 Wschachihilleep, it was smooth, glossy. 
 
 Schauwipachteu, it is faded 
 Schauwipachteep, it was faded. 
 
 Tachanigeu, woody, full of wood 
 Taachanigeep, it was woody. 
 
 Tonquihilleu, it is open. 
 
 Tsachgihilleu, it is torn off 
 Tschachpihilleep, it was torn off. 
 
 Tschetschpihilleu, split, broken off 
 Tschetschpihillewall, they are split 
 Tschetschpihilleep, it was split. 
 
 Wulelemileu, it is wonderful 
 Wulelemileep, it was wonderful 
 
 These words are compounded from wulele 
 melendam I wonder, and leu it is so. 
 
 Scappeu, it is wet 
 
 Scappewall, they are wet (speaking of things) 
 
 Scape wak, they are wet (speaking of persons). 
 
 Wulamoe, he says true or the truth 
 Wulamoyu, it is true, right 
 Kulamoe, thou art right, correct 
 Wulamoe, he is right 
 Nulamoeneen, we are right 
 Kulamoehhimo, you are right 
 Wulamowak, they are right. 
 
 Assiskuyu, marshy, muddy 
 Gundassikuyu,. deeply . marshy. 
 
 Wulapeyu, honourable, upright. 
 
 Wuskiyeyu, it is new. 
 
 N'chowiyeyu, it is old. 
 
166 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [adjective verbs.] 
 
 Class II. 
 
 Contains only the pure adjectives in wi, which see above page 104. 
 
 Class III. — In u or o 
 
 Schahachgekhasu, long, straight, striped. 
 Sassapeekhasu, speckled. 
 
 Psacquitchasu, crucified (he is). 
 Psacquitchasoop, he was crucified. 
 
 Wiyagaskau, fickle. 
 
 Wtacksu, soft, tender, supple. 
 
 Wschewinaxu, wschewinaquot, painful. 
 
 Waliechtschessu, puchtschessu, hollow (a tree) . 
 
 Tachpachaxu, little, mean. 
 
 Schiphasu or schipenasu, spread out, extended, 
 from schiphammen, to spread, extend 
 
 Schipenasike, when it is stretched, spread out, 
 extended 
 
 Schipenasop, it was stretched, spread out, ex- 
 tended. 
 
 Piselisso, it is wrinkled 
 
 Piselid tulpe, a large sea tortoise, so called he- 
 cause its shell is soft and its skin wrinkled. 
 
 Pimorhkhasu, stirred, moved 
 Pimochkhasoop, it was stirred, moved 
 Pimochkhasike, if it was stirred, moved. 
 
 Machtu, machtitso, had 
 
 Machtitso sipo, a bad creek (to cross) 
 
 Machtitsoop, it was bad. 
 
 Machtississi, thou art ugly, dirty looking 
 Machtississu, he is ugly, dirty looking. 
 
 Gischambeso, bound. 
 
 Aschukiso, to be poor, worth nothing, to be a 
 
 N'daschuki, I am poor 
 K'daschuki, thou art poor 
 Wdaschuku, he is poor 
 Aschukiso, one who is poor 
 W'daschukuwak, they are poor 
 Aschukoop, to have been poor 
 JVote. — Although the Indians often apply this 
 
 word to themselves, yet it is an insult if applied 
 to them by another. 
 
 Wulisso, good, handsome 
 Wulilissin, to be good 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nulilissi, I am good 
 Kulitissi, thou art good 
 Wulilissu, he is good 
 
 Plural. 
 Wulilissihummena, we are good 
 Wulilissihimo, you are good 
 Wulilissowak, they are good 
 
 PRETERITE TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nulilissip, I was good 
 Kulilissip, thou wert good , 
 Wulilissop, he was good 
 
 Plural. 
 Nulilissihummenakup, we were good 
 Kulilissihummoakup, you were good 
 Wulilissopannik, they were good. 
 
 Walhasu, buried (he is). 
 
 Tschingalsu, stiff, unbending. 
 
 Papesu, patient. 
 
 Messiau, naked. 
 
 Sopsu, soopsu, naked, from sopsin, to be naked. 
 
 Messissu, whole. 
 
 Lusasu, burned 
 Lusasike, if it was burned. 
 
 Linxasu, melted 
 Linxasike , if it was melted. 
 
 Leekhasu, lekhasik, it is written 
 Leekhasoop, it was written 
 Elekhasik, as appears written. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [adjective verbs.] 
 
 167 
 
 Kpaskbasu, stopped 
 Epahasu, to stop 
 Epahasop, it was stopped 
 Epahasike, if it was stopped. 
 
 Gaschsasii) dried. 
 
 Wapsu, white 
 N'wapsi, I am white 
 Wapsi, thou art white 
 Wapsu, he is white 
 Wapelechen, it is white 
 Wapsid, a white person 
 Wapsitschik, the white people. 
 
 Auchzu, wild, untraceable — 
 
 This is said of beasts ; as applied to men it 
 means avaricious, difficult to deal with, hard, 
 stingy. 
 
 Wisu, fat (he is) 
 Wisop, he was fat. 
 
 Eihnsu, from kineu, sharp : as for instance, your 
 
 discourse is sharp, biting, harsh 
 N'kihnsi, I am sharp, jealous 
 Eihnsi, thou art sharp, jealous 
 Kihnsu* he is sharp, jealous 
 Kihnsop, he has been sharp, jealous 
 
 As for instance — 
 N'kihnsi ni Getannitowit, I am a jealous God. 
 
 Winn, it is ripe, fit to eat : as for instance, the 
 
 Indian corn 
 Winike, when it is ripe 
 Winoop, it was ripe 
 Winuchtschi, it will be ripe. 
 
 Aloku, lean. 
 
 Wipiechku, rotten wood. 
 
 Windasu, mentioned, named 
 Windasike, if it was mentioned, named 
 Windasop, it was mentioned, named 
 Windasutsch, it will be mentioned, named. 
 
 Class IV. — In on or an. 
 
 Schwon, salt tasted, sour 
 Schwonnoop, it was salt tasted, sour. 
 
 Ache won, strong, spirituous 
 Achewonnoop, it was strong, spirituous. 
 
 Eschuppan, blunt, dull. 
 
 Esuequon, hard, difficult 
 Esuequonnool, they are hard (things). 
 
 Lachcan, it is sharp tasted. 
 
 Langan, easy (it is) 
 
 Langannool, they are easy (things) 
 
 Langannoop, it was easy. 
 
 Thitpan, bitter. 
 
 Wingan, good tasted, good to eat 
 Winganool, they were good tasted, good to eat, 
 (apples, &c.) 
 
 Eopachkan, thick (a board, plank) 
 Eopachkisso, thick (a skin, hide). 
 
 Wiquon, dull, blunt, not sharp. 
 
 Wschappan, woasgeyen, thin. 
 
 Penquon, dry 
 
 Penquihhilleu haki, the earth is dry. 
 
 Gulucquot, lame. 
 
 Apuat, easy (to do) 
 Apuattop, it was easy. 
 
 Acbgepinquot, blind 
 
 Gegepinquot, a blind man or person. 
 
 Gegepchoat, a deaf person. 
 
 Achpequot, wounded. 
 
 4a 
 
 Class V. — In ot, at. 
 
 Achowat, hard, painful, troublesome. 
 
 Gunalachgat, deep (a hole in the earth, or the 
 
 canoe is deep ) 
 Tepalachgat, deep enough 
 
 The latter of these two words is formed from 
 tepi, an adverb, which means enough, the for- 
 mer from gwieu, an adjective, long, both com- 
 bined with walak, a hole. 
 
 Ayandamolquot, gachtalquot, it is to be wished. 
 
168 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [adjective verbs.] 
 
 Class VI— In to. 
 
 Chawachto, dear (it is) ■ 
 Talawachto, how dear is it ? how much does it 
 cost? 
 
 Apuawachto, cheap, from apuat, easy. 
 
 Achgepchoa, deaf. 
 
 Tepawachto, from tepi, enough, and chwa- 
 wachto, a just, equitable price, it is not too 
 dear. 
 
 Tangawachto, cheap, low priced. 
 
 Class VII.—In i. 
 
 Wuski, new. 
 
 Amangi, great, big, large 
 
 Amangewall, (namessal), the fishes are large. 
 
 Macheli, m'chelit, much, many 
 Machelook, they are many 
 Machelopannik, they were many. 
 
 Class VIII. — In it, ik, et. 
 
 Mequit, mequik, m'hocquik, bloody. 
 Maechgilik, m'chakgilik, the great, the big. 
 Machtit, bad(it is). 
 Wulit, good 
 
 Wulittol, they are good 
 Wulittoop, it was good. 
 
 Alett, rotten 
 
 Alettot, they are rotten. 
 
 Machkalet, they are rusty, from machkeu, red. 
 
 Waseleechen, it is clear, light. 
 Tschitaniechen, it is strong. 
 
 Class IX. — In en. 
 
 Waktschiechen, the road is crooked. 
 Tsetschpiechen, it is separated. 
 
 Achewiechen, strong, spirituous : as for instance, 
 strong lie. 
 
 Machkeleechen, ted. 
 
 Wapeleechen, white. 
 
 Tenktschechen, it is open (say, the door). 
 Tauwiechen, it is open (the way thither). 
 
 Tacquiechen, joined together 
 Psacquiechen, close together. 
 
 Pequiechen, broken to pieces. 
 
 Class X. — In en, on, um. 
 
 Tacquatten, frozen (it is) 
 
 Tacquattenol, the potatoes, &c. are frozen 
 
 | Pret. Sing. Tacquattenop, it was frozen 
 
 Plur. Tacquattenopannilj they were frozen 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [adjective vebbs.] 
 
 169 
 
 E'patten, it is frozen up (the river) 
 E'pattenop, it was frozen 
 K'pattentschi, it will be frozen 
 Tschitanatten, it is frozen hard. 
 
 Tepiken, it is ripe, full grown (say, the Indian 
 com) 
 
 Tepikanool, they are fully ripe, fit to pick (the 
 beans, peas, &c.) 
 
 Packenum, dark. 
 
 Nolhand, to be lazy 
 
 Sing. Nolhando, he is lazy 
 
 Plur. Nolhandowak, they are lazy. 
 
 Class XI. — In in. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Pawalessin, to be rich 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Singular. 
 Pewallessit, a rich person 
 
 Plural. 
 Pewallessitschik, rich persons 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 N'pawalessin, I am rich 
 K'pawallsi, thou art rich 
 pawalessu, he is rich 
 
 Plural. 
 N'pawallsihummena, we are rich 
 K'pawallsibhummo, ye are rich 
 Pawallesowak, they are rich 
 
 PRETERITE TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pawallessihump, I was rich 
 K'pawalleseihump, thou wast rich 
 Pawallessop, he was rich 
 
 Plural. 
 N'pawallsihummenakup, we were rich 
 E'pawallsihummoakup, ye were rich 
 Pawallsopannik, they were rich 
 
 FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 N'pawallsitsch, I shall be rich 
 E'pawallsitsch, thou shall be rich 
 Pawallessutsch, he shall be rich 
 
 Plural. 
 N'pawallsihummenatsch, we shall be rich 
 K'pawallsihhimotsch, ye shall be rich 
 Pawallsowaktsch, they shall be rich 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Singular. 
 Pawallessil, be rich 
 
 Plural. 
 Pawalessik, be ye rich 
 
 The remainder follows as in the ordinary 
 verbs : 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 Pawallsiyane, if or when I am rich 
 K'pawallsiyane, if or when thou art rich 
 Pawallessite, if or when he is rich 
 
 Plural. 
 Pawallsiyenke, if or when we are rich 
 Pawallsiyeque, if or when ye are rich 
 Pawallessichtite, if or when they are rich 
 
 The Preterite and Future as has been shewn 
 in the verbs. 
 
 Thence comes further — 
 Pa wallessohen, to make one rich 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'pawallsohalgun, he makes me rich 
 K'pawallsohalgun, he makes thee rich 
 Pawallsohalgol, he makes him rich 
 
 Plural. 
 Pawallsohalguna, he makes us rich 
 K'pawallsohalguwa, he makes you rich 
 Pawallsohalawak, he makes them rich. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Wulelensin, to be proud, haughty, high minded 
 
170 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [of adverbs.] 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nulelensi, I am proud 
 Kulelensi, thou art proud 
 Wulelensu, he is proud 
 
 Plural. 
 Wulelensihummena, we are proud ' 
 Kulelensihummo, ye are proud 
 Wulelensowak, they are proud. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD.' 
 rTschitatiessin, to be strong 
 
 INDICATIVE M$OD. 
 
 "1. PBESENT TENSE. 
 
 N'tschitanessi, I am strong 
 K'tschitanessi, thou art strong 
 Tschitanessu, he is strong 
 
 PRETERITE TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'tschitanessihump, I was strong 
 K'tschitanessihump, thou wast strong 
 Tschitanessop, he was strong. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD,* 
 
 S<maxin,to be avaricious 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 N'schaxi, I am avaricious 
 K'schaxi, thou art avaricious 
 Schaxu, he is aVaricfous 
 
 Plural. 
 Schaxihummena, we are avaricious 
 Schaxihhumo, ye are avaricious 
 Schaxowak, they are avaricious. 
 
 Ktemaxin, gettemaxin, to be poor, miserable. 
 
 Soopsin, to be bare, naked 
 Soophalan, to make one bare, naked. 
 
 Poochpsin, to be weakly. 
 
 Adverbs qualify the verb as adjectives qualify the substantive. They 
 are the adjective of the verb. Hence adjectives proper are not unfre- 
 quently used in an adverbial sense, as when we say in English he works 
 hard. The same takes place in the Delaware where the same word is 
 sometimes employed in the twofold capacity of an adjective and an 
 adverb. 
 
 In the following examples the adverbs are divided into classes for the 
 facility of the student*. 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — This short heading is not in the text ; but the division into 
 classes has been made by the Author. It will be seen that several words which he includes in his 
 lists are not properly adverbs, according to our notions of grammar ; but it has not been thought 
 proper to omit or transpose them, as the Author perhaps had reasons for placing them here, which 
 the. Translator will not undertake to judge of. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [op adverbs.] 
 
 17i 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 I.— Of Place. 
 
 These are of four kinds : 1. Loci; 2. De Loco; 3. Ad Locum; 4. Per 
 Locum. 
 
 1. Loci. 
 Yun, here 
 Icku, talli, there 
 Nanne talli , even there 
 Undachqui, this or that way . ; 
 Palliwi, elsewhere 
 Allami, allamiyey, in there 
 AUamunque, uchtschegunque, within 
 Wochgitschik, wochkunk, above, at the top 
 Wewundachqui, on both sides 
 Ta ? tani ? where ? 
 Ta undachqui .' where abouts ? 
 Taktani, be it who it may 
 Wenni ta li, every where 
 Kotschemunk, without, abroad 
 Matta ta, nowhere. 
 Equiwi (hacking), under (the groun 
 Li, to, to the, thither 
 Nada, yonder, to 
 
 Peschot, peschotschi, peschuwat, near 
 Wulik, yonder 
 Yawi, on one side. 
 
 2. De loco. 
 
 Yuwuntschi, from hence, is used also for there- 
 fore 
 
 Icka untschi, nanne untschi, na untschiyeg, 
 from thence 
 
 «e» 
 
 Ta untschi ? where from ? 
 Wemi ta untschi, from every where 
 Palli untschi, from somewhere else 
 Takta untschi, from somewhere 
 Wahhelemat, far 
 Gochpiwi, from the water. 
 
 3. Ad locum. 
 Yu undachqui, yuchuall, hither 
 Ickali, thither 
 Ehda, whither 
 
 Palli undachqui ? whither else ? 
 Nanne undachqui ? towards where ? 
 Wtellenuhawannink li, towards the right hand 
 Lennahawannink li, towards the right, to the 
 
 right 
 Kotschemunk, out of doors, out of this place 
 JKjpahamink, backwards, behind 
 Pinnassiechen, where the road goes slanting 
 
 down a hill 
 Menanschiwonink, to the left. 
 
 4. Per locum. 
 Yun (m'tamen) through here 
 Nanne talli (pomiechen aney)*, through there, 
 
 that way 
 Schachachgeu, straight along 
 Schachgiechen, elemiechen, along the road. 
 
 II.— 0/ Time. 
 
 Yucke, now, presently 
 Yucke (gischquik) to day 
 Gigischquik, this day pas 
 Ulaque, yesterday 
 Wulaquike, last night 
 Wulacaniwi, in the evening 
 Nischokunackat, two nights ago 
 Wapange, alappa, to morrow 
 Sedpok, ayapawe, to morrow morning 
 Wulaku, evening (in the) 
 
 Pachhacqueke, at noon 
 
 Tachpachihilla, in the afternoon 
 
 Tgauwitti, tgauwiwi, slowly 
 
 Abtschi, ngemewi, yanewi, always 
 
 Lappi, again 
 
 Abtschi, likhiqui, at all times 
 
 Likhiqui, about the time 
 
 Yucke likhiqui, about the present time 
 
 Gunigiseheek, daily 
 
 Loamissowe, lately , 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — Pomiechen, from pomissin, to walk, and aney, a road, a walking 
 road, a path. The Author here gives his explanation in Delaware, probably by inadvertence. 
 
 43 
 
172 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [op adverbs.] 
 
 Wuski, a little while ago (this day) 
 
 Wusken, latterly 
 
 Gintsch, gentsch, gintsch linitti, a little while 
 
 ago* 
 Pecho, soon 
 
 Pecho linitti, in a little time 
 Loamoe, long ago 
 Wtenk, afterwards 
 Wtenkuntschi, thereupon 
 Elemokunak, one of these days 
 Elemi gendowoacan, this week 
 Elemi kechocunak, in a few days 
 Motochimi, soon 
 Schawi, immediately, directly 
 Tschinge, when 
 Esquo, esquota, nelema, nelemago, nelemala, 
 
 notyet 
 
 Aschite, then 
 
 Yabtscbi, quayaqui, yet 
 
 Haschi, ever, at any time 
 
 Atta haschi, ikaschi, never 
 
 Tschigantschi, likhiqui, as soon as 
 
 Tamse keechen, sometimes, now and then 
 
 Tatamse, ametschimi, often 
 
 Elgiqui ametschimi, so often 
 
 Hilleu, commonly 
 
 N'dauwat, rarely, seldom 
 
 Amiga, long, a long time 
 
 Petschi, until 
 
 Yucke petschi, 'til now 
 
 Anena, anenawi, by little and little, by degrees. 
 
 III.— Of Number. 
 
 Mawat, only one 
 Nekti, the only one 
 
 I Whence nukti, once more 
 Mamayauchsid, each one. 
 
 IV. — Of Quantity. 
 
 Mecheeli, mecheltol, much 
 
 Mecheelok, many 
 
 Mechelgik, a great many 
 
 Mechelit, much (applied to inanimate things) 
 
 Husca, very 
 
 Husca mecheli, very much 
 
 AUowiwi, more 
 
 Wsami, too much 
 
 Tepi, enough 
 
 Tatchittu, tatchen, little 
 
 Eeechitti, a little 
 
 Alende, some 
 
 Ta keeche, some, a little 
 
 Wiacki, in abundance 
 
 Gunalachkat deep, (speaking of a hole, canoe, 
 
 &c.) 
 Chitqueu, deep water 
 M'chaquiechen, high water (when it is swelled 
 
 with rains) 
 Guneu, long 
 Achganeu, broad 
 Cobachean, thick 
 Taquetto, short 
 Sangettu, tangitti, small, little 
 Wschappan, waskeyek, thin 
 Mayauchsu, mauchsu, a person, one 
 Happi, with it, in the bargain. 
 
 V.— Of Quality. 
 
 Linaquot, elinaquot, elgiqui, so, so as 
 N'delgiqui, so as I 
 K'delgiqui, so as thou 
 W'delgiqui, so as he 
 
 Pallilinaquot, otherwise 
 
 Wulit, wulinaquot, well, good 
 
 AUowiwi wulit, better 
 
 Elewiwulik mayawi wulit, best, the best 
 
 * Note by the Translator. — There are undoubtedly shades of difference between these various 
 expressions, but the Author has not explained them, except in the instance of wuski, -which is con- 
 fined to the space of a day, 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [of adverbs.] 
 
 173 
 
 Huska wulit, very well, very good 
 
 Maclitit, machtitso, ill, bad 
 
 Apuat, easy, easily (some work to be done) 
 
 Langan, light, not heavy (speaking of weight) 
 
 Esuequon, hard, hardly 
 
 Lilchpin, diligent (is a verb) 
 
 Wingi, fain, willingly 
 
 Nawingi, I fain (would, &c.) 
 
 Kuwingi, thou fain wouldst 
 
 Wawingi, he fain would 
 
 Wulisso, handsome (is a verb) 
 
 Lippoe, luppoe, wisely 
 
 Mayawi, right, rightly 
 
 Schachachgeu, right, exact, correct 
 
 Wosgeu, thin 
 
 Schachachgiechen, straight way 
 
 Nutschque, in vain 
 
 Schachachki, certain, certainly 
 
 Leu, true 
 
 Lennowinaquot, manfully 
 
 Kimi, secretly 
 Mqschiwi, clearly, openly 
 Leppi, over again 
 Wiamochki, among each other 
 Mesitscheyeh, wholly, entirely 
 Nischeleney, twofold 
 Nacheleney, threefold 
 Neweleney, fourfold 
 Cheveleleney, manifold 
 Tschitanek, fast, strong 
 Sohawi, immediately, directly 
 Miechaninaquot, shameful 
 Temiki, something, be it what it will 
 Temiki koecu, something 
 Yawl, on one side 
 Welsid, the best (Sing.) 
 Welsitschik, the best (Plwr.) 
 Moschachgen, clear, not turbid 
 Moschpecat, clear water. 
 
 VI.— .(y .Interrogation. 
 
 Gachane, whether, if 
 
 Quatsch, why 
 
 Quatsch eet, why perhaps 
 
 Eoen untschi, for what reason or cause ? 
 
 Quatsch atta, why not ? 
 
 Ta wo, ta undachqui, towards where ? 
 
 La untschi, whence, wherefrom ? 
 
 Tchinge, when ■' 
 
 Tschingetsch (in the future) 
 
 Ta likhiqui, at what time ? 
 
 Ta schacki, how long ? 
 
 Ta ne liecken, how is it ? 
 
 Ta linaquot, what is it like ? 
 
 Koen «et,.what may it be ? 
 
 Ta hatsch (leu, how will it be ? ) 
 
 VII. — Of Similitude. 
 
 Elgiqui, as, like as 
 N'delgiqui, I am like 
 K'delgiqui, thou art like 
 
 Wdelgiqui, be is like 
 Mallachsche, like unto. 
 
 VIII. — Of Comparison. 
 
 Allowiwi, more 
 Tschitsch, still more 
 
 | Elinaquo, linaquot, as this, that, or the other 
 
 j Tpisqui, exactly so. 
 
 IX. — Of Extension. 
 
 Husca, huscateek, very, very much so 
 Wtellgiqui, so much so 
 Elgiqui, as much so 
 Tschitsch, yet, still 
 
 Quayaqui, yabtschi, yet 
 Ikalissi, still further, still more 
 Pakantschi, fully, entirely. 
 
174 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [or adverbs.] 
 
 Tgauwitti, by little and little 
 Gachti, almost, nearly 
 Koechitti, a little 
 
 X. — Of Diminution. 
 
 Mingachsa, a little better 
 
 Schuk, only 
 
 Schuk atta, but not, only not. 
 
 Gohan, kehella, woak, yes 
 Bischik, yes indeed 
 Kitschiwi (leu) certainly, truly 
 Kitschikele, yes it is true 
 
 XI. — Of Affirmation. 
 
 Nanne leu, it is certainly true 
 Schachacki, certainly 
 Huscateek, certainly true. 
 
 XII. — Of Negation, Prohibition. 
 
 Matta, atta, 'ta, no, not 
 Atta am, 'ta am, not at all 
 Atta haschi, no, never 
 Eatschi, let it alone, don't do this 
 Matta tani, in no way 
 
 Attago, by no means 
 
 Ponito, let it alone (this is a verb) 
 
 Atta ihaschi, not at all 
 
 Atta ilewi, not at all true. 
 
 Pit, piteet, eet, perhaps, may be 
 
 Na eet, perhaps 
 
 Taneek, perhaps I don't know 
 
 XIII.— Of Doubt. 
 
 Taktani, perhaps some where, I don't know 
 where. 
 
 XIV. — Of Demonstration. 
 
 Sche, Schela, see there ! (a verb) 
 Schepella, see there ! (a verb) 
 Penna, loquel, see thou (a verb) 
 
 Loqueek, see ye (a verb) 
 I Elinaquot, also, likewise 
 I Elgiqui, like that 
 
 Kitschiwi (leu) truly 
 
 XV.— Of Asseveration. 
 
 | Schachachki (leu), certainly true. 
 
 Na schachki, so far 
 Na yu pitschi, to here 
 
 XVI.-^-Q/" Restriction. 
 
 Nachgiechen, contrary, against 
 ; Psacquiechen, close to each other. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENA PE INDIANS. 
 
 [of adverbs.] 
 
 175 
 
 1 ukella, ah ! that (it were so) 
 
 XVII.— Of Desire. 
 
 | Ay euia, if, if only (it were so). 
 
 XVIII.— 0/ Exhortation. 
 
 Gattati, ( Sing.) well ! allqns ! 
 Gattatook, (Plur.) well! allons ! 
 
 Wischekill, {Sing.) on, briskly, go on with your 
 
 work carefully, attentively. — Wischiksik, 
 Wischiki, (Plur.) 
 
 Tpettawe, all together 
 Tachquiwi, together 
 Nechoha, alone 
 N'gutteli, singly 
 
 XIX. — Of Collection and Separation. 
 
 N'gutteleneyachgat, a single one 
 Lirni, secretly , 
 Tspiwi, tspat, separately- 
 Mawuni, assembled. 
 
 Schuk, Schukend, only 
 Tspat, strange, unusual 
 Pili, another 
 
 XX. — Of Exclusion. 
 
 Miguipili, otherwise 
 Palliwi, elsewhere. 
 
 XXI.— Of Order. 
 
 Nigani, n'hitam, netamiechink, first, in the first 
 
 place 
 Nischink, in the second place 
 Lappi, again, once more 
 
 Nechink, the third time 
 
 Wtenk untschi, thereupon, afterwards 
 
 Ickalin, further 
 
 Wtenk, lastly, at last. 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ADVERBS. 
 
 Amiga, long 
 
 Awossi, Awossiyey, beyond, over, the other side 
 Atta, no 
 
 Allamunk, allamunque, allami, allameyey, there- 
 in, in there 
 Alende, some 
 
 Alendemiyeek, some of you 
 Alendemiyenk, some of us 
 Alendeyuwak, some of them 
 Apitschi, by and by 
 
 44 
 
 Abtschi, always 
 
 Abtschi likhicqui, at all times 
 
 Auween, who, somebody 
 
 Atta keeku, nothing 
 
 Annawi, anenawi, by little and little 
 
 Ametschimi, often 
 
 Alacqui, 'tis pity 
 
 Ank, when (a conditional conjunction suffixed 
 
 to verbs) 
 Attago, no, by no means 
 Attach, moreover 
 
176 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [of adverbs.] 
 
 Alappa, to morrow 
 
 Awossi, over there, the other side 
 
 Awossake, behind the house 
 
 Awossenachk, that side of the house 
 
 Awossachtenne, over the hill, over there 
 
 Alod, there, yet 
 
 Atta haschi, never 
 
 Atta auween, no body 
 
 Auweeni, who is it ? 
 
 Auweenik, who are they ? 
 
 Achgameu, over against 
 
 Achparni, about. 
 
 B. 
 Bischi, bischik, yes, willingly. 
 
 C. 
 
 Chuppecat, deep, high water 
 Chitqueu, deep water 
 Chweli, much 
 Chwelit, much (water, meal). 
 
 E. 
 Eschiwi, through 
 Elemameek, every where 
 Eet, perhaps 
 Endchen, so often as 
 Endchi, so much as 
 Endchiyenk, as much as we have 
 Endchiyeek, as much as ye have 
 Endchichtit, as much as they have 
 Esquo, esquota, not yet 
 Elgiqui, so as, like 
 Eli, while 
 Eligischquik, to day 
 Ehelikhicqui, at which lime 
 Ekee, ay! 
 Ekayah, ay ! ay ! 
 Es, yet 
 Eliwi, both 
 
 Elemiechink, long (on the way) 
 Elinquechin, before me, before my eyes 
 Elinquechinan, before thee, before thy eyes 
 Elinquechink, before him, before his eyes 
 Elinquechinink, before us, before our eyes 
 Elinquechinoak, before you, before your eyes 
 Elinquechenhittit, before them, before their eyes 
 Enda, where 
 Equiwi, under. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gamunk, over there, over the water 
 
 Gohan, yes 
 
 Gachti, almost, close by 
 
 Gintsch, gaschene, if 
 
 Gintsch linitti, directly, presently 
 
 Gunaweke, yet a while 
 
 Giechgi, near, by 
 
 Gatti, gachti, gagachti, near, almost 
 
 Gunih, a long while 
 
 Gopene, about, thereabouts 
 
 Gahan, shallow (water). 
 
 i 
 
 H. 
 
 Husca, much 
 Huscateek, very much 
 Hackung, above 
 Hacking, under 
 Haschi, ever, at any time. 
 
 I. 
 
 Ickali, ikali, thither 
 Ickatalli, there, over there 
 Icka, there 
 
 Ickalitti, a little way farther 
 Hi, though. 
 
 Kitschiwi, certainly 
 
 Kehella, yes 
 
 Kotschemund, out 
 
 Ktschimine, as soon as 
 
 Keeku, something 
 
 N'telli, that I ! 
 
 K'telli, that thou! 
 
 W'telli, that he ! 
 
 Keechilti, a little 
 
 Keechi, keecha, how much ? 
 
 Kechoak, kechowak, how many of them? (speak- 
 ing of persons) 
 
 Keechennol, how many of them? (speaking of 
 inanimate things) 
 
 Eeechihhimo, how many of you ? 
 
 Keechihhena, how many of us ? 
 
 Eatschi, no, no, let it alone 
 
 Keeku wuntschi, why ? 
 
 Kimi, secretly. 
 
 Lappi, again 
 Likhicqui, as, so as 
 Likhicquiechen, so as 
 Li, to (some place) 
 Lawat, long ago 
 Lannitti, a little while 
 Linaquot, as, like 
 
 Linaquachtop, (Pret.) it was so, like 
 Linaquachtool, they are like (speaking of inani- 
 mate things) 
 Lelawi, half way 
 Luqui, at this time. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [of adverbs.] 
 
 177 
 
 M. 
 
 Matta, mattago, no 
 
 Miqui, far, far off 
 
 Miqui palliwi, quite different 
 
 Menewi, in a particular place 
 
 Metschi, already 
 
 Metschimi, soon, presently 
 
 Ma, there, there it is 
 
 Mayawi, alone, simple, right 
 
 Mayauchsu, mauchsu, one alone 
 
 Mayawat, mawat, one, only one (of inanimate 
 
 things) 
 Mingachsu, better 
 Mallachsche, as if, as it were 
 Mechingui, large, big 
 Meyaucnsit, one alone 
 Megungi, purely, quite alone 
 Memayauchsiyenk, each of us 
 Mekeniechink, on earth. 
 
 N. 
 Nischogunakat, two nights (days) ago 
 Nischogunakhacke, within two days 
 Nissahwi, by night 
 Nachpi, with 
 
 N'hittami, nigani, at first, the first 
 Nechoha, alone 
 
 Nihillatschi, self, one's own person 
 Nado, therein 
 
 N'gemeewi, always, constantly 
 N'telli, I (do, say, &c.) thus or so 
 K'telli, thou dost thus or so 
 W'telli, he does thus or so 
 Newentschi, therefore 
 Ma tchi, so much 
 
 Nail ne tchi, it is so much, that is all 
 Nanne untschi, from thence 
 Nachwena, thereupon, after 
 Nagayeek, by and by 
 Nagewitti, in a little while 
 Nutschque, in vain 
 Nahik, under the water 
 Nahiwi, above the water 
 Nutchen, nolltchen, that is all 
 Nutschi, at the beginning 
 Ndauwat, rare, rarely 
 Nelema, nelemata, nelemago, not yet 
 Netami, the first / 
 
 N'hittami, at first 
 Netamieechen, the first 
 Nallahik, nallahiwi, the water here above 
 Nekti, the only one, single 
 Nahanne, so, so it is 
 N'titechta, n'titechquo, then, while. 
 
 Pechot, soon 
 
 Pechuwat, pechuwiwi, near 
 
 Pechotschi, much more 
 
 Petschi, 'til theie, so far 
 Palliwi, elsewhere 
 Peki, perhaps then 
 Pit, pitut, perhaps 
 Packantschi, fully, enough 
 Poquewi, straight way, directly 
 Pili, other, another 
 Pili keeku, something else 
 Pili auween, somebody else 
 Pemmi, as far as 
 Pachsiwi, half, the half 
 Pitschi, unwillingly. 
 
 Q. 
 
 Quatsch, why? 
 Quatscheet, why perhaps ? 
 Quonna, however, nevertheless 
 Quonnagetsch, it will be indifferent 
 Quayaqui, yet, yet more 
 Quin, long 
 Quenek, short. 
 
 Sayewi, at first 
 
 Schawi, immediately 
 
 Schi, schita, or 
 
 Shacki, so far as 
 
 Seki, so long 
 
 Schuk, only, but 
 
 Schukand, but then 
 
 Sedpok, to morrow morning 
 
 Schepage, (P ret.) this day early 
 
 Schigi, pretty 
 
 Sche, schela, see there 
 
 Schingi, unwillingly 
 
 N'schingi, I (do it) unwillingly 
 
 K'schingi, thou dost it unwillingly 
 
 W schingi , he does it unwillingly 
 
 Schachachki, certainly 
 
 Schachachgek,just so. 
 
 Tschigantschi, full, enough, all 
 
 Tangitti, small, little 
 
 Taquetto, tangetto, short 
 
 Tachtachean, thick, steep (a hill) 
 
 Tachquiwi, together 
 
 Tetauwiwi, between 
 
 Tepi, enough 
 
 Temiki, a single one (thing) 
 
 Temikikeekii, a single thing 
 
 Tschinge? when? 
 
 Ta? where? 
 
 Ta talli ? whitherwards ? 
 
 Tani ? how ? 
 
 Ta elgiqui ? how soon ? 
 
 Tpisqui, just so 
 
 Tawonni, although 
 
 Tamse, sometimes 
 
 Tachtamse, now and then, often 
 
178 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [adverbial verbs.] 
 
 Ta tchen ? how many ? (inanimate) 
 
 Tatchittu, little 
 
 Ta haschi, never 
 
 Taat, as if 
 
 Tackan, another 
 
 Takeet, perhaps I don't know 
 
 Taktani, I don't know well 
 
 Tschetschpi, tschetschpat, differently 
 
 Thagitti, a little while 
 
 Tpittawe, altogether 
 
 Tschitsch, once more 
 
 Talli, there 
 
 Tatchendo, very little 
 
 Tgauwitti, by little and little. 
 
 U. 
 Untschi, of, by, therefore 
 Undach, here, this way 
 Undach litti, a little this way 
 Undachgameu, this side the water 
 Undachqui, hither. 
 
 W. 
 Wapange, to morrow 
 Wulaque, yesterday 
 Wulaquike, this evening 
 Welaquike, last evening 
 Wulaguniwi, in the evening 
 Wak, and, also 
 Wtenk, at last, the last 
 Wtenk untschi, thereon, thereafter 
 Weeski, sometime to day 
 Wiechgawotschi, unexpectedly 
 Wottalauwin, wotsche anenk, by the way 
 Wotschi, near by 
 Wiemochki, among each other 
 Wemi, all 
 
 Wemi auween, every man 
 Wentschi, therefore, for this reason 
 Witschi, with, at the same time 
 Wtscheyunque, within 
 Wsami, wsamiechen, too much 
 Wulamoe, long ago 
 Wulamisso we, a little while ago . 
 Wuli, there 
 Wingi, willingly 
 
 N'wingi, I willingly 
 
 K'wingi, thou willingly 
 
 Wawingi, he willingly 
 
 Wochgitschik, up there, above 
 Wiacki, wiackat, enough and to spare 
 Wuntscbi, ef, on account of 
 Wtellgiqui, likewise 
 Wiwuntschi, before this 
 Wiwuntschkamik, very long ago. 
 
 Yucke, now 
 
 Yucke gischquik, to day 
 
 Yun, y u talli, yuntalli, here, there 
 
 Yucke untschi, here 
 
 Yucke likhicqui, to this time 
 
 Yucke petschi, 'til now 
 
 Yanewi, always 
 
 Yuch, yuchnook, well ! allons 
 
 Yuwuntschi, from hence 
 
 Yulak, there 
 
 Yukella, ! that (it were so) 
 
 Yuketeek, (Plur.) O! that It (those things) 
 
 were so 
 Yapewi, on the river bank 
 Yapeechen, along the bank 
 Yabtschi, yet. 
 
 ADVERBIAL VERBS, 
 OR, VERBS FORMED FROM ADVERBS. 
 
 Schingelendam, I dislike, it is against my will 
 
 or my inclination 
 N'schingelendam, it goes against the grain, I 
 
 hate it 
 K'schingelendam, thou hatest it 
 Wschingelendam, he hates it 
 Schinginamen, to hate something 
 Schingattam, to be unwilling about something 
 Schiogalan, to hate a person 
 
 I. — From Schingi, unwillingly. 
 
 Schingsittam, to hear something with displea- 
 
 Schingoochwen, to go somewhere unwillingly 
 Schingachpin, to be somewhere unwillingly 
 Schingimikemossin, to work unwillingly 
 Schinghakiheen, to plant unwillingly 
 Schingiglistam, to hear unwillingly 
 Schingtschenamen, to hate something to excess, 
 not to be able to bear something. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [adverbial verbs.] 
 
 179 
 
 II. — From Wingi, willingly. 
 
 Wingsittam, to hear somebody willingly 
 Winginamen, to be pleased with 
 Wingachpin, to be willingly somewhere 
 Wingoochwen, to go willingly somewhere 
 Wingipendam, to hear (something) willingly 
 Wingallawin, to hunt willingly 
 
 Wingilauchsin, to live willingly in a particular 
 manner 
 
 Wingelendam, to love or be pleased with some- 
 thing 
 
 Wingelawemen, to do a pleasure 
 
 Wingelawossi, you have a good fire. 
 
 Ill, — From Eschiwi, through. 
 
 Eschoochwen, to go, pass through 
 Eschoochweyu petschindehenk, it penetrates 
 through the heart 
 
 Eschoochwalan, to help or carry one through 
 Eschoochwalukgun,hehas brought me through. 
 
 IV. — From Gunih, long. 
 
 Gunelendam, to think one long 
 Gunagen, to stay out long 
 Gunaquot, it is long 
 
 Gunaxin, to be long, tall of stature 
 Gunaquachtol, they are long (the fishes). 
 
 V. — From Lappi, again. 
 
 Lappilenin, to come again together 
 Laphattdn, to restore something to its former 
 state 
 
 Laphachken, to replant 
 Lappiechsin, to repeat something over. 
 
 VI. — From Mayawi, right. 
 
 Mayawiechton, to do something right, as it j Mayawihilleu, it is well as it is 
 
 ought to be I Mayawelendam, to be fixed or settled in mind. 
 
 VII. — From Mayauchsu, single. 
 
 Mayauchsuwi (Jldj.) , of one mind, united I Mayauchsohen, to make of one mind. 
 
 Mayauchsuwin, to be of one mind ' | 
 
 VIII. — From Nipahwi, by night. 
 
 Nipawoochwen, to go, travel by night. 
 
 45 
 
180 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [adverbial verbs.] 
 
 IX. — From Pechuwat, near. 
 
 Pechuwelendam, to think one's self near | Pechuwihhilleu, the time is near. 
 
 X. — From Nechoha, alone. 
 
 Nechohanne, nechohalennin, to be alone | Nechoheteu, the house is empty. 
 
 Nechoochwen, to go, travel alone 
 
 XL — From Nekti, the only one. 
 
 Nektilenin, to be quite alone (somewhere). 
 
 XII. — From Nahik or Nahiwi, down, below. 
 
 Nahimen, to go down the water (river, creek) I Nahimenke, if or when we go down 
 Nahihilleen, to saU down the water | Nahoochwen, to go down or below. 
 
 XIII. — From N'gutti, one. 
 
 N'guttitehin, to be one, to agree. 
 
 XIV. — From Nallahik, above (the water). 
 
 Nallahhemen, to sail up (the water, river) | Nallahoochwen, to go up (the water, river) . 
 
 XV.— From Petschi, until, unto. 
 
 Petschihilleu, he is coming 
 Petscholtin, they are coming 
 Petschimuin, to escape to 
 Petapan, the day breaks, it dawns 
 Petisgauwan, to hunt or drive beasts to 
 Petauchsin, to live till now, to this day 
 
 Petaquiecheu, the water has risen up to him 
 Petachdonamen, to come to seek something 
 Peteuchtummen, to come weeping 
 Petschitchen, to press so far 
 Atta auwen petschitchewi, no body can think so 
 far. 
 
 XVI. — From Pachsiwi, half. 
 Pachsenummen, to divide equally in two parts. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [adverbial verbs.] 
 
 181 
 
 XVII. — From Shacki, so far, so long. 
 
 Shackoochwen, to go so far off and no further. 
 
 XVIII. — From Palliwi, otherwise. 
 
 Pallilissin, to do wrong 
 Palliaan, to go away 
 Palliaal, go away (Imper.) 
 PaUatschimain, to speak otherwise than the 
 truth 
 
 Palliwochwen, to go elsewhere 
 Pallanummen, pallilenemen, to do or attempt 
 something wrong. 
 
 XIX. — From Schachachki, certain. 
 
 Sehachachgelendam.tobe sure of a thing 
 Schachachgennemen, to make straight (what is 
 
 crooked) 
 Schachachkoochwen, to go straight, follow the 
 
 straight way 
 
 Schachachkatschiino, to say, relate the truth 
 Schachachkaptonen, to speak the exact truth, 
 
 tell a true straight story - 
 Schachachgapewin, to be true, correct, upright: 
 
 XX. — From Tangitti, small, little. 
 
 Tangelendam, tangitehen, to think little of one's 
 
 self 
 Tangelensin, to he humble 
 
 Tangelensoochwen, to walk humbly 
 Tangenensin, to vouchsafe, condescend 
 Tangawachto, cheap. 
 
 XXI. — From Tepi, enough. 
 
 Tepihilleu, it is enough 
 Tepilawehan, to satisfy one 
 Tepikeu, it is ripe, full grown 
 
 Tepawachte, it is reasonable, not too dear 
 Tepilaweechgussin {Passive) to be satisfied, to 
 have received satisfaction. 
 
 XXII.— From T'pisgauwi, just so. 
 
 T'pisgauwichton, to do something just so | T'pisquihhilleu, the time draws near. 
 
 XXIII.— From Tschetschpi, different, not alike. 
 
 Tschetschpihillen, to be split off, separated from I Tschetschpissin, to be unlike, 
 one another j 
 
183 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [adverbial verbs.] 
 
 XXIV. — From Untschi, Wuntschi, or Wentschi, of, from, on account of, 
 
 for the sake of. 
 
 Untschihilleu, it comes from somewhere 
 Undochwen, to go somewhere for the sake or 
 
 purpose of something 
 Wundanunxin, to be angry at or for something 
 Wuntschi men, to call some one hither 
 Wundchen, the wind comes from thence 
 
 Wundanglen to do something, for the sake of 
 
 something 
 Wundaptonen, to speak of something 
 Wundelemuin, to boast of something 
 Undauchsin, to live for something. 
 
 XXV.— From Wemi, all. 
 
 Wemihillen, it is all over 
 
 Wemoltin, wemoltowak, they are all going out, 
 
 forth, abroad 
 Wemiten (Infin.), to go all out 
 
 Wemihawak, they have made an end of them, 
 
 they are all destroyed 
 Wemihawak awessiwak, they have destroyed 
 
 all the ground. 
 
 XXVI. — From Wapange, to morrow. 
 
 Wapanacheen, good morrow I Tamsa matta wapanachewi, he will not per- 
 
 K'wapanacheen hummo, good morrow to you | haps live 'til to morrow, or until morning. 
 
 XXVII. — From Wulakik or Wulaku, evening. \ 
 
 Kulakween, good evening | Kulakween hummo, good evening to you. 
 
 XXVIII. — From Gischi, ready, done. 
 
 Gischapan, it is day, it is day light 
 
 Gischiecheu, it is ready, done, finished 
 
 Gischikin, born, to be bom 
 
 Gischikheen, to make a house ready, put a 
 house in order 
 
 Gischitoon, to make something ready 
 
 Gischileu, it has proved true 
 
 Gischachpoanku, the bread is ready, it is baked 
 
 Gischachgenutasu, it is concluded, settled, de- 
 termined 
 
 Gischalogen, to finish a work 
 
 Gischaloge, the work is finished 
 Gischackiheen, ready to plant 
 Gischatten, it is there ready 
 Gischuwallen, is ready packed, ready laden 
 Gischeenachk, the fence is ready 
 Gischamocholheu, the canoe is ready 
 Gischitehen, to be determined 
 Gischenaxin, to be ready, prepared 
 N'gischipenauwelendam, I have considered of 
 it, I have made up my mind, I am ready. 
 
 XXIX. — From Machtit, Machtitso^fcad. 
 
 Matschiton, to spoil something 
 Mattoochwen, to travel badly 
 Machtatenamin, machtatenamohen, to be unfor- 
 tunate 
 
 Mattelendam, to be uneasy, troubled in mind 
 
 Matteleman, to despise one 
 i Matrachgeniman, to accuse one 
 i Machtittonhen, mattaptoonen, to abuse, scold. 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 [op prepositions.] 
 
 183 
 
 XXX. — From Pitschi, accidentally, by chance. 
 
 Pitenummen, to commit a mistake 
 Pitaptonen, to blunder in speaking 
 N'pitschi, I blunder accidentally 
 K'pitschi, thou blunderest accidentally- 
 
 Pitschi, he blunders accidentally 
 N'pitschi lissin, I have not done it wilfully Or 
 designedly. 
 
 XXXI. — From Witschi, with, to go with. 
 
 Witep, to go with 
 
 Witschinden, to put on with bands 
 
 Witalogen, to work with (somebody) 
 
 Witawendin, to work together 
 Witoschwen, to go or travel with 
 Widhomen, to go in a canoe with (some one). 
 
 Prepositions are particles which are placed before nouns or verbs, 
 to express an accessory idea in connexion with them. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Li, liwi, to 
 
 Tuppisgauwi, tpisqui, against, aver 
 
 Yu undach, this side 
 
 Ta pemi, about 
 
 Tetauwiwi, between 
 
 Eli, because 
 
 Pechotschi, gieschgi, near, by, close by 
 
 Wtenk, after, at last 
 
 Untschi, of, by, from 
 
 Newentschi, therefore 
 
 Yun, here 
 
 Yu schacki, so far as here 
 
 Yu seki, so long 
 
 Seki, petschi, until 
 
 Techi, quite* 
 
 Techi matta, not at all, quite, absolutely not 
 
 Pakantschi, fully, entirely 
 
 Alike, but, for 
 
 Ay ema, if,, if only. 
 
 Prepositions are frequently compounded with nouns and verbs, 
 the following examples : — 
 
 • From Wochgitschi, above, on the top, or on the surface of. 
 
 Wochgidhackamique, on the earth | Wochgitaque, on the top of the house. 
 
 as in 
 
 * JVote by the Translator. — This is more properly an adverb ; but the Author not (infrequently 
 confounds the different parts of speech, which is not extraordinary in a language in which they are 
 so strangely intermixed. Besides, it is evident he intended a revising of mis work. 
 
 46 
 
184 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [of pbepositions.] 
 
 Laphatton, to restore, replace 
 Laphacki, to replant 
 
 From Lappi, agai». 
 
 Lappilenin, to be again together 
 Lappiechsin, to repeat. 
 
 From Witschi, with. 
 
 Witen, to go with 
 
 Witachpirj, to live, dwell with 
 
 Witonquam, to lodge at one's house, board with 
 
 one 
 Witsehingen, to help, (in German tmt helfen) 
 Witschendin, to help one another 
 
 Witalogen, to work with 
 Witatschimolsin, to advise with 
 Witschimachke, to put on with hands 
 Wipengen, wipenditam, to lie, sleep with ano- 
 ther. 
 
 From Kimi, secretly. 
 
 Kimixin, to go secretly somewhere 
 Kimingehsin, kimochwen, to steal away pri- 
 vately 
 
 Kiminatlan, to make some one escape secretly. 
 
 From Untschi, of, therefrom. 
 
 Undaptonen, to speak thereof 
 Undochwen, to come for or on account of some- 
 thing 
 
 Untschihillen, to come from somewhere 
 Wundenummen, wundelemuin, to flow that way. 
 
 From Awossi, that side. 
 
 Awossenachk, that side the fence 
 Awossakihakan, that side the plantation 
 Awossenuppeque, over the lake 
 
 Awosschakque, that side the stump or the tree. 
 Awossachtenne, over or beyond the hill. 
 
OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 
 
 [OF CONJUNCTIONS INTERJECTIONS.] 
 
 183 
 
 TT&— ©f Conjtttwtious* 
 
 Conjunctions are of different sorts : — 
 1. Copulative. 
 
 Wak, and, also 
 
 Schi, schitta, or, either 
 
 Nanne wak, as also. 
 
 2. Disjunctive. 
 Schak, but 
 
 Wak atta, nor, neither. 
 
 3. Conditional. 
 
 These are severally compounded With the 
 verbs active and passive in the Conjunctive 
 Mood ; they are one, anup, anpanne, when, if, 
 
 as,&c. 
 
 4. Adversative. 
 Schuk, but 
 
 Iyabtschi, yabtschi, yet, though 
 Bischi, to be sure, true 
 Auwiyewi, yet. 
 
 5. Concessive. 
 A, am, well indeed 
 Quonna, although 
 
 Leke (a verb), true (it is*). 
 
 6. Causative. 
 N'titeschquo, for 
 
 Eli, wentschi, because 
 N'telli, that I 
 K'telli, that thou 
 W'telli, that he. 
 
 7. Conclusive. 
 Newentschi, yuwuntschi, therefore 
 
 Nanne wantschi, nahanne wentschi, for this rea- 
 son 
 Nanne wuntschi, therefore. 
 
 8. Ordinative. 
 Woak lappi, repeatedly, again 
 Ickalissi, farther 
 
 Nail, at last 
 
 Nan wtenk, hereafter 
 
 Yucke petschi, 'til here, 'til now. 
 
 TK&— ®t mttxinttom. 
 
 Interjections are particles, sometimes a mere exclamation to express 
 the different emotions of the mind. 
 
 1. Of Joy, as 
 Hoh ! hohok ! yu ! anischik, quek. 
 
 2. Of Laughter, as 
 Ha! ha! he! he! 
 
 8. Of Sorrow, as 
 Ihik ! iwi ! ihih ! auwik ! ekih ! kih ! 
 
 4. Of Indignation, as 
 
 Sa, gissam, niskelendam (which is a verb), gis- 
 sa, ekisch. 
 
 5. Of Blandishment, as 
 Nitsch, my childf- 
 
 * JVbte by the Translator. — From this verb is formed nanne leketsch, Amen, so beit! Nanne 
 means this or that, leketsch is the adjective verb leke in the future tense, and here is meant in a 
 potential sense, may this or that be true, that is to say, happen. Thus Amen, in Delaware, is an 
 adverb in the future tense. 
 
 f JVote by the Translator.—" My little friend," from nitis, friend, my friend. 
 
186 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE 
 
 [concluding note.] 
 
 6. Cf Calling, as 
 Hu ! yuhuh ! 
 
 7. Of Answering, as 
 Yu ! yo ! oh ! oho ! 
 
 8. Of Approbation, as 
 Eh ! eh ! kehella ! gohan ! 
 
 9. Of Admiration, as 
 Ekayah .' hoh ! quatschee ! ekee ! ekisah ! 
 
 10. Of Exclamation, as 
 Ohoh, ho ! wo ! 
 
 CONCLUDING NOTE BY THE TRANSLATOR. 
 
 T, 
 
 HIS Grammar exhibits a language, entirely the work of the children 
 of nature, unaided by our arts and sciences, and what js most remark- 
 able, ignorant of the art of writing. Its forms are rich, regular, and 
 methodical, closely following the analogy of the ideas which they are 
 intended to express; compounded, but not confused; occasionally ellip- 
 tical in their mode of expression; but not more so than the languages 
 of Europe, and much less so than those of a large group of nations on 
 the Eastern Coast of Asia, I mean the Chinese and those which possess 
 analogous idioms. The terminations of their verbs, expressive of num- 
 ber, person, time, and other modifications of action and passion, while 
 they are richer in their extension than those of the Latin and the Greek, 
 which we call emphatically the learned languages, appear to have been 
 formed on a similar but enlarged model, without any aid than that 
 which was afforded by nature operating upon the intellectual faculties of 
 man. To what cause are these phenomena to be attributed 1 
 
 1 hope I shall be excused for saying that this question, which I think 
 of the highest importance, as it leads immediately to that of the origin 
 of the variety of human languages, and perhaps of language itself, has 
 not received, either in America or Europe, all the attention that it de- 
 serves. In Europe, an idea appears generally to prevail, that the gram- 
 matical forms of languages have proceeded, if not entirely, at least in a 
 very great degree, from the operation or influence of the art of writing, 
 which is saying, in other words, that these forms have been produced or 
 essentially modified by the arts of civilization. A celebrated French 
 philologist, to whose varied talents and extensive acquirements no man 
 pays a more willing homage than myself, M. Abel Remusat, expresses 
 
OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. , 187 
 
 [concluding note.] 
 
 himself thus on this subject : " I do not only speak of those forms, the 
 object of which is to point out the relations of words and the mechanism 
 of which, simple or complicated, ingenious or confused, attests the more 
 or less successful efforts of the writers who first gave laws to language*". 
 
 This learned author, whose exquisite sense and sound judgment leave 
 no room to suppose that it ever occurred to him that his proposition might 
 be contradicted, appears evidently!^) have considered it as one of those 
 philological axioms which have been so long and so universally estab- 
 lished that no one even thinks of calling them in question. And so it 
 has appeared to many other European writers, and it seems, in fact, to be 
 an opinion generally received in that part of the world. I must own that 
 to me it seems inconsistent with the facts which this Grammar exhibits, 
 anoV which all point to nature and not to art as the source, from whence 
 have proceeded the various grammatical forms of the languages of men. 
 
 I have not room to develop here this conclusion, more than I have done 
 incidentally in the preface ; I have thought it right, however, to point it 
 out specifically as the principal result which, in my opinion, the publica- 
 tion of this Grammar will produce. It appears to me that after a care- 
 ful reading of the work and a comparison of this language with those of 
 civilized nations, the mind must be necessarily drawn to the following 
 inferences: 
 
 1 That the grammatical forms of a language constitute what may be 
 called its organization. 
 
 2. That this organization is the work of nature, and not of civilization 
 or its arts. 
 
 & That the arts of civilization may cultivate, and by that means polish 
 a language to a certain extent ; but can no more alter its organization, 
 than the art of the gardener can change that of an onion or a. potato. 
 
 4. That the contrary opinion is the result of the pride of civilized men ; 
 a passion inherent in our nature, and the greatest obstacle that exists to 
 the investigation of truth. 
 
 In thus expressing my opinion with all the clearness and precision 
 that I am capable of, I do not by any means intend to establish these 
 propositions as axioms ; but merely to submit them as questions to the 
 investigation of the learned, if they shall be thought worthy of the atten- 
 tion to which it appears that the subject entitles them. That new facts, or 
 facts already known in part, but now more clearly made apparent, should 
 produce new opinions is what may naturally be expected, and he will be, 
 I hope, acquitted of presumption, who simply expresses his sentiments on 
 this new subject, without any other pretension than that of eliciting the 
 
 * Je ne parle pas settlement de ces formes destinees a marquer les rapports des mots, et dont 
 le mecanisme, simple ou complique, ingenieux on embrooille, atteste les efforts plus ou moins 
 heureux des ecrivains qui ont les premiers donne des loix au langage. — Mecherches sur les ton- 
 gues Tartares, Discours Prelminaire, p. xirj. 
 
 47 
 
188 • GRAMMAR OF THE LENNT LENAPE LANGUAGE. 
 
 [cONCLKDSNG NOTE.] 
 
 thoughts of men better qualified than himself -to trace it to all its impor- 
 tant consequences. 
 
 To what degree nature and art have respectively contributed to the 
 formation of languages, or their improvement, appearsto me to be a ques- 
 tion highly deserving of deep consideration ; I am afraid the part of na- 
 ture will be found to be the lion's share. If it be true that the poems 
 attributed to Homer were composed at a time when the Greeks were 
 ignorant of the art of writing, we have the true measure of nature's share 
 in the-formation of their beautiful language. The Romans, who could 
 write, did not prove by their idiom the superiority of art. 
 
 Many observations, arising from the details of this Grammar, and which 
 ■would considerably tend to the elucidation of its contents, .have. suggest- 
 ed themselves to <my mind while this volume was passing through the 
 press ; some of them I have subjoined in the form of notes, and the rest 
 I must reserve for another opportunity. 
 
 I ought to observe, however, before I finally conclude, that the Author 
 writes the termination of the third person plural of the Perfect Tense of 
 the Indicative, indifferently pannik or pannil, without any apparent rule of 
 discrimination. This was noticed by ^Vater, who published a few Delaware 
 conjugations (under the name of Chvppeway) from some loose -sheets of 
 Zeisberger's own manuscript, which I had transmitted to him. The learn- 
 ed (professor was of opinion that pannik was the correct treading, and I 
 have, in consequence, adopted it throughout this Grammar. Perhaps 
 the difference arises from the variety of dialects. .See jinalekten Jer 
 Sprachenkunde,Zweytes Heft, p. 50, in note. 
 
ERRATA. 
 
 This mark (t) shews that the lines are to be counted from the top, and this (].) from the 
 bottom. The running titles are not to be reckoned. 
 
 Page 5, line 22f, for " 17th" read " 19th" 
 5, line 26f, for " 19th" redd " 20th" 
 " 37, line 17-f, for " melat" read " milat" ; and for " eternal life" read " he gives (to him) 
 
 eternal life" 
 " 3§, line 6t, for " noon" read " noom" 
 " 49, line 17f, for " NowiWn" read " N'wikin" 
 « 54, — In the Future of the Subjunctive Mood, lines 1st, 3d, and 6th of that tense, for " ach- 
 
 piwenque, achpiweke, achpichtique" read " achpiwenke, achpiweque, achpichtite" 
 " 58, — In the Present of the Subjunctive, line 5th of that tense, for " lissichtique" read 
 
 " lissichtite" 
 " 68, line 10f, for " Pommauchsichtique" read " Pommauchsichtite" 
 " 72, line 8f, for " N'dellunchsohalguneen" read '.' N'dellauchsohalguneen" 
 " 93, line 14|, for " Wulelendawichtikup" read " Wulelendamichtitup" 
 " 109, line 12f, for " atta n'pendamawunap" read " atta n'pendawawunap" 
 " 173, line 14f, for " koecu" read " keeku"- 
 

 ■ >'. k 
 
 ._--*— 
 
 V> ;: ; 
 
 
 
 
 1 .tf 
 
 
 r *sd